UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

FORM 20-F

¨ Registration statement pursuant to Section 12(b) or 12(g) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934

or

x Annual report pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934

For the Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2010

or

¨ Transition report pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934

For the transition period from/to

or

¨ Shell company report pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934

Date of event requiring this shell company report:

Commission file number 000–12033

TELEFONAKTIEBOLAGET LM ERICSSON

(Exact Name of Registrant as Specified in Its Charter)

LM ERICSSON TELEPHONE COMPANY

(Translation of Registrant’s Name into English)

Kingdom of Sweden

(Jurisdiction of Incorporation or Organization)

SE-164 83 Stockholm, Sweden

(Address of Principal Executive Offices)

Roland Hagman, Vice President Group Function Financial Control

Telephone: +46 8 719 53 80, Facsimile: +46 8 719 42 22

SE-164 83 Stockholm, Sweden

(Name, Telephone, E-mail and/or Facsimile Number and Address of Company Contact Person)

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:

Title of Each Class	Name of Each Exchange on Which Registered
American Depositary Shares		The NASDAQ Stock Market LLC
B Shares*		The NASDAQ Stock Market LLC

* Not for trading, but only in connection with the registration of the American Depositary Shares representing such B Shares pursuant to the requirements of the Securities and Exchange Commission

Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act:

None

Securities for which there is a reporting obligation pursuant to Section 15(d) of the Act:

None

Indicate the number of outstanding shares of each of the issuer’s classes of capital or common stock as of the close of the period covered by the Annual Report:

B shares (SEK 5.00 nominal value)	3,011,595,752
A shares (SEK 5.00 nominal value)	261,755,983
C shares (SEK 1.00 nominal value)	0

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act.    Yes  x    No  ¨

If this report is an annual or transition report, indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.    Yes  ¨    No  x

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant: (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.    Yes  x    No  ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically and posted on its corporate Web site, if any, every Interactive Data File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files).    Yes  ¨    No  ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, or a non-accelerated filer. See definition of “accelerated filer” and “large accelerated filer” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act.

x  Large accelerated filer            ¨  Accelerated filer             ¨  Non-accelerated filer

Indicate by check mark which basis of accounting the registrant has used to prepare the financial statements included in this filing:

US GAAP  ¨    International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board  x    Other  ¨

Indicate by check mark which financial statement item the registrant has elected to follow.    Item 17  x    Item 18  ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act).    Yes  ¨    No  x

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

CONTENTS

FORM 20-F 2010 CROSS REFERENCE TABLE	i
LETTER FROM THE CEO	1
OUR BUSINESS	3
OUR SOLUTIONS	4
OUR ASSETS	11
2010 HIGHLIGHTS	13
FIVE-YEAR SUMMARY	15
SHARE INFORMATION	16
LETTER FROM THE CHAIRMAN	24
BOARD OF DIRECTORS’ REPORT	25
REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM	67
CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS	68
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS	73
RISK FACTORS	167
FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS	175
REMUNERATION REPORT	177
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT 2010	185
UNCERTAINTIES IN THE FUTURE	220
MANAGEMENT’S REPORT ON INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING	221
SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION	222
SHAREHOLDER INFORMATION	240
GLOSSARY	243
FINANCIAL TERMINOLOGY	246
SIGNATURES	248

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

FORM 20-F 2010 CROSS REFERENCE TABLE

Our Annual Report on Form 20-F consists of the English version of our Swedish Annual Report for 2010, with certain adjustments made to comply with U.S. requirements, together with certain other information required by Form 20-F which is set forth under the heading Supplemental Information. The following cross reference table indicates where information required by Form 20-F may be found in this document.

Form 20-F Item Heading			Location in Document	Page Number
PART I
1	Identity of Directors, etc.		N/A
2	Offer Statistics & Timetable		N/A
3	Key Information
	A	Selected Financial Data	Five-Year Summary		15
			Supplemental Information
			Exchange Rates		224
	B	Capitalization & Indebtedness	N/A		-
	C	Reason for Offer & Use of Proceeds	N/A		-
	D	Risk Factors	Risk Factors		167
4	Info on the Company
	A	History and Development of the Company	Our Solutions
			Mobile Broadband		4
			Managed Services		8
			Operations & Business Support Systems		9
			Board of Directors’ Report
			Vision		26
			Strategy		27
			Business Focus		29
			Cash Flow—Capital Expenditures		43
			Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
			Note C26 Business Combinations		145
			Note C33 Events After the Balance Sheet Date		166
			Supplemental Information
			General Facts on the Company		222
			Company History and Development		223
	B	Business Overview	Our Business		3
			Our Solutions		4
			Our Assets		11
			Board of Directors’ Report
			Vision		26
			Strategy		27
			Business Focus		29
			Business Results		44
			Material Contracts		59
			Corporate Governance		59
			Sourcing and Supply		61
			Sustainability and Corporate Responsibility		61

i

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Form 20-F Item Heading			Location in Document	Page Number
			Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
			Note C3—Segment Information		95
			Note C32—Contractual Obligations		166
			Risk Factors
			Market, Technology and Business Risks		167
			Regulatory, Compliance and Corporate Governance Risks		172
	C	Organizational Structure	Supplemental Information
			General Facts on the Company		222
			Investments		238
	D	Property, Plants and Equipment	Supplemental Information
			Primary Manufacturing and Assembly Facilities		224
			Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
			Note C11—Property, Plant and Equipment		110
			Note C27—Leasing		149
			Board of Directors’ Report
			Cash Flow—Capital Expenditures		43
4A	Unresolved Staff Comments		—
5	Operating & Fin’l Review & Prospects		—		-
	A	Operating Results	Our Solutions		4
			Our Assets		11
			Board of Directors’ Report
			Business Results		44
			Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
			Note C1—Significant Accounting Policies—Group Companies		73
			Note C20—Financial Risk Management and Financial Instruments—Foreign Exchange Risk		133
			Risk Factors
			Regulatory, Compliance and Corporate Governance Risks		172
			Board of Directors’ Report
			Risk Management		60
			Supplemental Information
			Operating Results		225
			Taxation		231
	B	Liquidity and Capital Resources	Board of Directors’ Report
			Financial Position		38
			Cash Flow		42
			Risk Management		60

ii

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Form 20-F Item Heading			Location in Document	Page Number
			Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
			Note C19—Interest-Bearing Liabilities		132
			Note C20—Financial Risk Management and Financial Instruments		133
			Note C25—Statement of Cash Flows		143
	C	R&D, Patents & Licenses	Five-Year Summary		15
			Board of Directors’ Report
			Strategy—Technology Leadership		27
			Business Focus—Technology		31
			Financial Results of Operations—Operating expenses		36
			Consolidated Financial Statements
			Consolidated Income Statement and Statement of Comprehensive Income		68
	D	Trend Info	Our Solutions		4
			Our Assets		11
			Board of Directors’ Report
			Business Results		44
	E	Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements	Board of Directors’ Report
			Financial Position—Off-balance sheet arrangements		41
			Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
			Note C14—Trade Receivables and Customer Finance—Credit Risk—Finance Credit Risk		115
			Note C24—Contingent Liabilities		143
	F	Tabular Disclosure of Contractual Obligations	Board of Directors’ Report
			Material Contracts		59
			Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
			Note C32—Contractual Obligations		166
6	Directors, Senior Management and Employees				-
	A	Directors & Senior Management	Corporate Governance Report 2010
			Members of the Board of Directors		202
			Members of the Executive Leadership Team		211
	B	Compensation	Board of Directors’ Report
			Corporate Governance		59
			Corporate Governance Report 2010
			Committees of the Board of Directors—Remuneration Committee—Remuneration to Board members		201
			Members of the Executive Leadership Team		211
			Remuneration Report		177

iii

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Form 20-F Item Heading			Location in Document	Page Number
			Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
			Note C17—Post-Employment Benefits		124
			Note C29—Information Regarding Members of the Board of Directors, the Group Management and Employees		151
	C	Board Practices	Corporate Governance Report 2010
			Board of Directors		192
			Members of the Board of Directors		202
			Members of the Executive Leadership Team		211
			Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
			Note C29—Information Regarding Members of the Board of Directors, the Group Management and Employees		151
	D	Employees	Five Year Summary		15
			Board of Directors’ Report
			Business Focus		29
			Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
			Note C29—Information Regarding Members of the Board of Directors, the Group Management and Employees		151
	E	Share Ownership	Share Information
			Shareholders		22
			Corporate Governance Report 2010
			Members of the Board of Directors		202
			Members of the Executive Leadership Team		211
			Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
			Note C29—Information Regarding Members of the Board of Directors, the Group Management and Employees		151
7	Major S/Hs and Related Party Transactions
	A	Major Shareholders	Share Information
			Shareholders		22
	B	Related Party Transactions
			Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
			Note C30—Related Party Transactions		162

iv

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Form 20-F Item Heading			Location in Document	Page Number
	C	Interests of Experts & Counsel	N/A		—
8	Financial Information
	A	Consolidated Statements and Other Financial Information	Consolidated Financial Statements		68
			Please see also Item 17 cross references
			Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm		67
			Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements		73
			Note C4 Net Sales		102
			Supplemental Information
			Memorandum and Articles of Association—Dividends		228
	B	Significant Changes	Board of Directors’ Report
			Post-Closing Events		66
			Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
			Note C33—Events After the Balance Sheet Date		166
9	The Offer and Listing
	A	Offer and Listing Details	Share Information
			Offer and Listing Details		20
	B	Plan of Distribution	N/A
	C	Markets	Share Information
			Stock Exchange Trading		16
	D	Selling Shareholders	N/A
	E	Dilution	N/A
	F	Expenses of the issue	N/A
10	Additional Information
	A	Share Capital	N/A
	B	Articles of Association	Supplemental Information
			Memorandum and Articles of Association		228
	C	Material Contracts	Board of Directors’ Report
			Material Contracts		59
			Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
			Note C32 Contractual Obligations		166
	D	Exchange Controls	Supplemental Information
			Exchange Controls		231
	E	Taxation	Supplemental Information
			Taxation		231
	F	Dividends and paying agents	N/A
	G	Statement by Experts	N/A
	H	Documents on Display	Supplemental Information
			General Facts on the Company		222
	I	Subsidiary Information	N/A

v

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Form 20-F Item Heading			Location in Document	Page Number
11	Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk
	A	Quantitative Information about Market Risk	Board of Directors’ Report
			Risk Management		60
			Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
			Note C20—Financial Risk Management and Financial Instruments		133
	B	Qualitative Information about Market Risk	Board of Directors’ Report
			Risk Management		60
			Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
			Note C20—Financial Risk Management and Financial Instruments		133
	C	Interim Periods	N/A
	D	Safe Harbor	N/A
	E	Small Business Issuers	N/A
12	Description of Securities Other than Equity Securities
	A	Debt Securities	N/A
	B	Warrants and Rights	N/A
	C	Other Securities	N/A
	D	American Depositary Shares	Supplemental Information
			Depositary Fees and Charges		235
PART II
13	Defaults, Dividends, Arrearages and Delinquencies		N/A
14	Material Modifications to the Rights of Security Holders and Use of Proceeds		N/A
15	Controls and Procedures		—		—
	A	Disclosure Controls and Procedures	Corporate Governance Report 2010
			Disclosure Controls and Procedures		216
	B	Management’s annual report on internal control over financial reporting	Management’s report on internal control over financial reporting		221
	C	Attestation report of the registered public accounting firm
	D	Changes in internal control over financial reporting

vi

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Form 20-F Item Heading			Location in Document	Page Number
16	Reserved		—		—
	A	Audit Committee Financial Expert	Corporate Governance Report 2010
			Audit Committee—Members of the Audit Committee		198
	B	Code of Ethics	Corporate Governance Report 2010
			Code of Business Ethics		187
	C	Principal Accountant Fees and Services	Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
			Note C31 Fees to Auditors		165
			Corporate Governance Report 2010
			Committees of the Board of Directors—Audit Committee		197
	D	Exemptions from the Listing Standards for Audit Committees	Corporate Governance Report 2010
			Board of Directors—Independence		193
			Supplemental Information
			Independence Requirements		236
	E	Purchase of Equity Securities by the Issuer and Affiliated Purchasers	N/A
	F	Change in Registrant’s Certifying Accountant	N/A
	G	Corporate Governance	Corporate Governance Report 2010
			Board of Directors—Independence		193
			Supplemental Information
			Independence Requirements		236
PART III
17	Financial Statements		—		—
			Consolidated Income Statement and Statement of Comprehensive Income		68
			Consolidated Balance Sheet		70
			Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows		71
			Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity		72
			Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements		73
			Note C1—Significant Accounting Policies		73
			Note C16—Equity and Other Comprehensive Income		119
			Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm		67
18	Financial Statements		N/A

vii

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

19    Exhibits

Form 20-F Item Heading	Location in this document	Page Number
Exhibit 1	Articles of Association
Exhibit 2	Not applicable
Exhibit 3	Not applicable
Exhibit 4	Not applicable
Exhibit 5	Not applicable
Exhibit 6	Please see Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements, Note C1 Significant Accounting Policies		73
Exhibit 7	For definitions of certain ratios used in this report, please see Financial Terminology		246
Exhibit 8	Please see Supplemental Information, Investments		238
Exhibit 9	Not applicable
Exhibit 10	Not applicable
Exhibit 11	Our Code of Business Ethics and Conduct is included on our web site at www.ericsson.com/bg/res/thecompany/docs/corporate-responsibility/2009/cobe/cobe_english.pdf
Exhibit 12	302 Certifications
Exhibit 13	906 Certifications
Exhibit 14	Not applicable
Exhibit 15.1	Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
Exhibit 15.2	Consolidated Financial Statements of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB
Exhibit 15.3	Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

viii

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

LETTER FROM HANS VESTBERG

“LONG-TERM GROWTH AND PROFITABILITY ARE ERICSSON’S CHARACTERISTICS”

FINANCIAL RESULTS IN SHORT
NET SALES	NET CASH
SEK 203.3 (206.5) billion	SEK 51.3 (36.1) billion
OPERATING MARGIN*	EARNINGS PER SHARE
12% (12%)	SEK 3.46 (1.14)
NET INCOME
SEK 11.2 (4.1) billion

Dear shareholders,

In 2010, Group sales decreased –2 percent to SEK 203.3 billion. Our operating margin, before JV’s and excluding restructuring charges, was flat at 12 percent. Net income increased 172 percent to SEK 11.2 billion, mainly due to improvements in earnings in our joint venture Sony Ericsson and less restructuring charges.

In the first half of 2010, we were still impacted by the economic slowdown in the world. In the latter part of the year, sales of mobile broadband took off, especially in North America and Japan. This was driven by a strong increase in mobile data traffic.

During the year, we struggled with the industry-wide component shortage. While the supply of components has now normalized we are still not fully meeting the increased demand on certain mobile broadband products due to the increased customer demand.

We have four Group targets that should secure increased shareholder value: grow faster than the market, deliver best-in-class margins, cash conversion of more than 70 percent and improved earnings in our JVs.

Early market data indicates that we kept our market shares in our network and services businesses. We delivered the industry’s best-in-class margins and achieved a cash conversion of 112 percent. The fourth target, growth in JV earnings, was partly reached thanks to better performance in Sony Ericsson.

2010 was the year when mobile broadband took off. The number of mobile subscriptions increased by more than 60 percent to about 600 million and the number is forecasted to almost double and hit 1 billion this year.

Once you are connected, you want connectivity 24/7, wherever you are.

This will become a reality for more and more people since we will see more smartphones in the market, and also more affordable ones. Embedded mobile broadband modules will become standard in laptops and other devices. To meet this consumer demand, network speed, capacity and quality are prerequisites.

In the networked society, everything that benefits from a connection will be connected. We have spoken about how 50 billion devices will be networked by 2020. We are already today enabling the networked society: from the concept of building future networks in demanding urban settings, to our networks which recently attained speeds of 168 Mbps on HSPA—to our business in TV and media, and our services, which help manage and integrate the complex networks that are behind the networked society.

* Excluding restructuring charges and share in earnings of JVs

1

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Of course our joint ventures bring devices into the picture, and we are finding that this is getting more and more personal for consumers. No longer is the device only a tool for them; it is part of themselves that they want to have alongside them during their daily lives.

Finally, I would like to sincerely thank all our highly dedicated and skilled employees for their efforts in 2010. In 2011, we will focus even more on understanding and meeting our customer demand, ultimately seeking increased value for our shareholders. Continued long-term growth and profitability are Ericsson’s characteristics, along with a healthy financial position.

Hans Vestberg

President and CEO

2

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

OUR BUSINESS

Communication technology is positively changing the way we work and live. As a leading provider of communications infrastructure, services and multimedia solutions, Ericsson strives to enable this change. We constantly innovate to empower people, business and society.

Network infrastructure provides the fundamentals for people to communicate. Today, more than 40 percent of the world’s mobile traffic passes through networks provided by Ericsson. The networks we support for operators serve more than 2 billion subscriptions.

We are also a global leader in telecom services, which accounts for close to 40 percent of our revenues.

Currently, we serve approximately 400 customers, most of whom are network operators. Our ten largest customers account for 46 percent of our net sales.

New customers include TV and media companies as well as utility companies.

Our total addressable market was estimated at approximately USD 200 billion in 2009 (excluding joint ventures’ markets).

To best reflect our business, we report five business segments, two of which are the joint ventures Sony Ericsson and ST-Ericsson.

ERICSSON

NETWORKS

Segment Networks develops and delivers mobile and fixed infrastructure equipment and related software. We pioneered 2G/GSM and 3G/WCDMA mobile technologies. We now provide 4G/LTE as the evolution of mobile broadband and toward all-IP environments. Our portfolio also includes CDMA solutions as well as xDSL, fiber and microwave transmission.

MULTIMEDIA

Segment Multimedia develops and delivers software-based solutions for real-time & on-demand TV, consumer & business applications and Business Support Systems (BSS) for telecom operators. Revenue management, i.e. software based solutions for charging and billing, is part of BSS.

GLOBAL SERVICES

With more than 45,000 services professionals globally, we have robust local capabilities with global expertise in managed services, consulting, systems integration, customer support and network rollout. We manage complex projects with advanced IS/IT competence and multi-vendor experience.

JOINT VENTURES

SONY ERICSSON

Sony Ericsson offers mobile phones, accessories, content and applications. Sony Ericsson is a 50/50 joint venture with Sony Corporation.

ST-ERICSSON

ST-Ericsson offers wireless platforms and semiconductors for leading handset manufacturers. ST-Ericsson is a 50/50 joint venture with STMicroelectronics.

3

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

OUR SOLUTIONS

We are shifting our focus toward a more solutions-oriented sales process. During the year, we therefore organized our portfolio into seven solution areas to better address customer needs. Here we describe our solutions, the business drivers and the market trends.

MOBILE BROADBAND	4
FIXED BROADBAND AND CONVERGENCE	7
COMMUNICATION SERVICES	8
MANAGED SERVICES	8
TELEVISION AND MEDIA MANAGEMENT	8
OPERATIONS AND BUSINESS SUPPORT SYSTEMS	9
CONSUMER AND BUSINESS APPLICATIONS	10

MOBILE BROADBAND

User trends

1. Smartphones change behavior

2. Soaring video usage

3. Demand for 24/7 internet connectivity

24/7 connectivity to the internet is becoming an essential part of modern life. During the year, we met increased demand for mobile broadband infrastructure and services. The accelerated demand was fuelled by smartphones and notebooks, coupled with sharply rising usage of video services (like YouTube). Mobile data traffic more than doubled in 2010 and is expected to double annually over the coming three years.

Expansion opportunities

Today, we are doing for broadband what we did for voice 20 years ago—making it mobile and affordable for the vast majority of people. Mobile subscriptions worldwide have reached approximately 5.3 billion of which approximately ten percent are now on mobile broadband. We estimate the number of mobile broadband subscriptions to reach almost 5 billion in 2016, the vast majority being for smartphones.

Our broadband solutions not only include equipment but also business advice, systems integration and roll-out service for fast implementation of cost-effective solutions.

4

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Meeting the need for speed

To accommodate the massive growth in data traffic, operators are turning to us to boost capacity and speed in their networks. Networks are continuously being upgraded as the number of data users and data volume transported increase. All Ericsson-supplied commercial WCDMA networks have now been upgraded to HSPA. Four of our customers have launched 4G/LTE networks in 2010, covering 140 million people, 60 percent of whom are served by Ericsson LTE equipment.

On the devices side, notebooks and other electronic devices are equipped with our latest 3G/HSPA broadband modules, delivering speeds of up to 21 Mbps.

Operators implement tiered pricing

When mobile broadband was introduced, many operators offered flat rates and unlimited usage to encourage fast uptake of service. A challenge for operators today is to secure user experience and increase revenue from mobile broadband. The answer is differentiated service offerings. Tiered pricing and innovative business models are becoming more common. The user can thus select and pay for a subscription with a certain service level. Voice still represents the main source of revenue for operators. Data traffic accounts for approximately 30 percent of total revenues on average and will represent the majority of future growth.

5

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Ramp up of our RBS 6000

The multi-standard radio base station, RBS 6000, can run 2G/GSM, 3G/WCDMA and 4G/LTE technologies in the same unit, using different frequency spectrum bands. The RBS 6000 takes up 25 percent less space and reduces power consumption by up to 65 percent compared to previous-generation RBSs. This is a significant saving as operators may spend up to 50 percent of operating expenses on power. Many operators are therefore looking to modernize their radio networks with the RBS 6000. Modernization projects often involve a high degree of consulting, systems integration and network rollout.

Core networks may also need capacity upgrades to accommodate increasing data traffic and speed. Our 4G/LTE core network, the Evolved Packet Core, is an all-IP network, supporting both mobile and fixed access. Our 2G and 3G packet core networks require only a software upgrade to support 4G/LTE access.

Mobile broadband stimulates GDP growth

High-speed broadband infrastructure (mobile and fixed) is becoming as essential as roads, water and electricity. Studies show a direct correlation between broadband penetration and GDP growth. In emerging markets, many users can access the internet only via mobile devices due to the lack of fixed network infrastructure.

SPEED AND DATA TRAFFIC

Feature phone user

10 kbps

approx. 10 MB/month

Smartphone user

100-1,000 kbps

approx. 100 MB/month

Mobile PC/tablet user

>1 Mbps

approx. 1 GB/month

6

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

FIXED BROADBAND AND CONVERGENCE

Fixed broadband

In today’s mature markets, most data traffic is handled by fixed networks. Operators compete by evolving their networks to provide fast internet speeds, reliable high-definition IPTV and video on demand. We enable this by providing end-to-end broadband access solutions via high-speed fiber (such as GPON) and copper (xDSL).

All-IP networks and convergence

To reduce cost and enable service bundling, fixed traffic can be provided over a multi-service network converging telephony, internet and TV. This multi-service network is IP based, providing lower-cost and higher-performance broadband services. IP starts in the core network. Our Evolved Packet Core (EPC) provides support for multiple access technologies and fixed-mobile convergence. New functionality is introduced through software upgrades. With our breadth of experience, we provide a service, including consulting and systems integration, to manage transformation of networks to all-IP, often involving multiple-vendor equipment.

7

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

COMMUNICATION SERVICES

Communication services are the services people use to interact with each other, such as voice and video calls as well as text and multimedia messaging. These operator-based services are provided globally and are based on industry standards, ensuring interoperability.

As voice and SMS still account for the main part of operator revenues, operators now exploit opportunities to enhance user experience while reducing costs for voice communication.

Users want enriched communication and the ability to instantaneously share experiences and information with family, friends and colleagues—anywhere, anytime and to any device. Our IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) makes this possible. Services controlled by IMS are voice (incl. HD-voice), video calls, the Rich Communication Suite (RCS) and messaging. With RCS, consumers get a suite of IMS-based services (e.g. presence information, chat and content sharing) from the address book of a mobile phone or from a broadband connection.

MANAGED SERVICES

Network operations have traditionally been seen as core to operators. Today, competitive pressure, rapid technology evolution and changing user demands drive another focus. Many operators now view strategy, marketing and customer retention as being equally important as technology. Our managed services agreements free up in-house resources for this focus, and can reduce network operating costs by as much as 20 percent.

We have a long history of taking on employees from operators. We have invested USD 1 billion in tools, methods and processes to secure capabilities and competence.

Improving operators’ operational efficiency

The need to improve operational efficiency, reducing both capital expenditures and operating expenses, is a key driver for an operator to change its business. It is estimated that a mature operator spends approximately 5-6 percent of revenues on network equipment and 10-12 percent on operating the network, i.e. operating expenses account for twice the capital expenditures for networks. Our network operations contracts are often multi-year, multi-technology and multi-vendor agreements.

Simplifying network complexity

Another key driver is the increasing complexity of networks as they are transformed and modernized. IT and telecom convergence creates many opportunities for us to act as an advisor, both in streamlining business and operations support systems and helping to quickly and cost-efficiently introduce new services.

Shared networks and shared capacity

The initial growth of managed services was driven by operational efficiency. There is now an increasing demand for business models that support shared capacity and network sharing between two or more operators. This trend also drives structural efficiencies in the networks. Managed services play a decisive role in this evolution.

TV AND MEDIA MANAGEMENT

TV is going digital and interactive

In the converging media landscape, broadcast and broadband are coming together, moving towards a connected world.

8

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

The worldwide digital TV market is growing. TV solutions and services enable global media companies and operators (cable, satellite, telecom and terrestrial) to deliver TV content, either directly to consumers or for professional digital video content exchange.

With a broad suite of open standards-based products, we offer high-quality solutions for digital TV, HDTV, video on demand, IPTV, mobile TV, connected home and content management.

High-performance video means large amounts of traffic in the networks. This can be handled with our media distribution (MDN) solution for video delivery over IP, combining a content distribution network with our TV portfolio.

Business consulting, systems integration and implementation ensure a smooth launch of new TV services and infrastructure.

Outsourcing trends:

• Reduce and control spending

• Focus on key business priorities

• Greater operational efficiency

• Lower risks, reduce complexity

• Shared capacity—structural efficiency

OPERATIONS AND BUSINESS SUPPORT SYSTEMS

Operations Support Systems—for control

Rising network complexity drives the need for one consolidated “dashboard-style” Operations Support System (OSS). Our OSS includes capabilities for performance monitoring and fault management, configuration and security management as well as systems to optimize performance for efficiency. OSS can also handle multi-vendor equipment.

Business Support Systems—efficient billing and charging

Our Business Support Systems (BSS) support operators in instant provisioning and activation of services, devices and price plans. Our solutions can also provide real-time convergent charging (i.e. the user gets one invoice for both mobile and fixed usage) and billing and data management. With our solutions, operators can capture and secure revenue streams. Users can instantly start using a new service or device and control their spending.

Operators have to handle the increased data traffic in their networks along with many new devices. At the same time, operators introduce tiered pricing and new business models in order to maximize their revenues for mobile broadband services as well as voice traffic. This development requires upgrading of old support systems as well as the introduction of new BSS solutions.

Consulting and systems integration services are vital components of BSS solutions.

9

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

CONSUMER AND BUSINESS APPLICATIONS

Interaction and collaboration

To support operators in growing their revenues, we provide new means of interaction and collaboration. Our solutions include messaging, social networks, location-based services, media, advertising, internet commerce and enterprise applications.

We support our customers in the modernization and consolidation of legacy service delivery systems and messaging systems, such as SMS, MMS and video mail.

Our Business Communication Suite (BCS) targets the enterprise market. It enables sharing of voice, video data, messaging and web conferences in a collaborative environment.

Our multimedia brokering solution facilitates payment and distribution of content. We act as the interface between enterprises and multiple mobile operators with consumer data and services such as via SMS.

Several of our solutions can be delivered as cloud services.

10

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

OUR ASSETS

UNIQUE GLOBAL PRESENCE AND SCALE

Our global presence and scale give us a competitive advantage. In the industry consolidation, where operators are merging, we can handle larger cross-border contracts as well as targeted local assignments. It is key for us to stay close to customers, building trust, earning a strong track record and applying our in-depth expertise.

Today, over 1,000 networks in more than 180 countries use equipment supplied by us. Over the years, we have gained local knowledge and experience in network rollouts and systems integration as well as managing, upgrading and modernizing networks.

TECHNOLOGY LEADERSHIP—INVESTING FOR THE FUTURE

Our technology leadership is a key asset that we leverage. We focus on early involvement in creating new technologies, strong contribution in technology standardization work, development of intellectual property rights and establishment of licensing agreements. We pioneered the development of digital AXE switching, 2G/GSM, 3G/WCDMA and 4G/LTE, leading to 27,000 granted patents. We invested approximately 15 percent of our total sales into R&D in 2010. At year end, the number of R&D employees was more than 20,000. Over 80 percent of our product development is software related.

SERVICES LEADERSHIP

Networks are becoming increasingly complex and often include multi-vendor equipment. The knowledge gained from managing networks for 750 million subscribers is an asset. Today our global services organization handles consulting, systems integration, network rollout, network operation, customer support and education. Competence development is further enhanced by insourcing staff from operators and acquiring companies in consulting and systems integration.

11

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Our breadth of experience enables us to offer end-to-end support to our customers.

ERICSSON ACADEMY

In 2010 we launched Ericsson Academy and Learning Services. It is an online platform for sharing knowledge and inspiration both internally and externally. The site offers free telecom tutorials, technical snapshots and a forum to exchange smart ideas.

CREATING A WINNING CULTURE

We want to attract and develop the most competent, high-performing and motivated people in the industry. The culture we encourage is innovative, fast moving and responsive, with a business-winning mindset. To get the entire company moving in this direction, we implemented a group wide empowerment program. We also run a leadership training program to promote global diversity and cultivate top talent worldwide.

PUTTING CONSUMER INSIGHT TO WORK

To stay abreast of consumer trends, we use our ConsumerLab market research unit, which conducts more than 40,000 interviews annually. This represents the combined opinions and behavior patterns of more than 1 billion people. Not only do we incorporate these insights into our product development, but we can also make them available to our customers.

12

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

2010 HIGHLIGHTS

JANUARY-MARCH

• World record of 84 Mbps HSPA demonstrated.

• TeliaSonera rolls out 4G/LTE in Norway and Sweden, with core network and RBS 6000 from Ericsson. Three more customers have since launched LTE.

• Ericsson delivers LTE network equipment and services to AT&T.

• A world record is set with 1 Gbps for LTE in a live demo.

• Ericsson performs a live demo of the world’s first high-speed microwave radio connection with a transporting capacity of 2.5 Gbps.

APRIL-JUNE

• Ericsson increases presence in Korea by acquiring Nortel’s stake in the joint venture LG-Nortel. The business is consolidated by Ericsson.

• First managed operations contract in Canada, for Mobilicity’s 3G network.

• Indosat, Indonesia, prepares for 4G and launched Asia’s fastest network with 42 Mbps.

• Ericsson chosen to operate Telefonica’s network operations center in São Paulo.

• Ericsson provides industry’s first 3D sports television network, ESPN 3D, with standards-based video processing solution, tuned for 3D and HD broadcasts.

JULY-SEPTEMBER

• Mobile data is growing ten times faster than voice.

• China Mobile Hebei selects Ericsson as its managed services partner.

• MetroPCS launches first 4G/LTE network in the USA, with Ericsson as primary supplier.

13

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

• Ericsson gets its largest fiber-to-the-home contract in India.

• Ericsson announces embedded mobile broadband modules—world’s first to support 21 Mbps (HSPA) for notebooks and other consumer electronics.

• EMOBILE upgrades its HSPA network with the HSPA Evolution technology—the highest-speed network in Japan with a peak data rate of 42 Mbps.

OCTOBER-DECEMBER

• TeliaSonera renews and expands its managed services contract with Ericsson to include field service for voice and data networks in 29 countries.

• Hans Vestberg, CEO, participated via Telepresence at COP 16 in Mexico, to stress the importance of ICT in addressing climate change.

• Ericsson is selected as key equipment and services provider for next evolution of the Sprint network, supplying radio access, core and IP/Microwave backhaul.

• Ericsson wins managed services contract with China Unicom.

• Verizon Wireless launches the world’s largest LTE network with Ericsson as the primary vendor.

• 3 Italia chooses Ericsson for data center consolidation and modernization of IT infrastructure.

14

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

FIVE-YEAR SUMMARY

For definitions of the financial terms used, see Glossary, Financial Terminology and Exchange Rates.

FIVE-YEAR SUMMARY

SEK million	2010			Change			2009			2008			2007			2006
Income statement items
Net sales		203,348			–2	%		206,477			208,930			187,780			179,821
Operating income		16,455			178	%		5,918			16,252			30,646			35,828
Financial net		–672			–307	%		325			974			83			165
Net income		11,235			172	%		4,127			11,667			22,135			26,436
Year-end position
Total assets		281,815			4	%		269,809			285,684			245,117			214,940
Working capital		105,488			6	%		99,079			99,951			86,327			82,926
Capital employed		182,640			1	%		181,680			182,439			168,456			142,447
Gross cash		87,150			14	%		76,724			75,005			57,716			62,280
Net cash		51,295			42	%		36,071			34,651			24,312			40,728
Property, plant and equipment		9,434			–2	%		9,606			9,995			9,304			7,881
Stockholders’ equity		145,106			4	%		139,870			140,823			134,112			120,113
Non-controlling interest		1,679			45	%		1,157			1,261			940			782
Interest-bearing liabilities and post-employment benefits		35,855			–12	%		40,653			40,354			33,404			21,552
Other information
Earnings, per share, basic, SEK		3.49			203	%		1.15			3.54			6.87			8.27
Earnings, per share, diluted, SEK		3.46			204	%		1.14			3.52			6.84			8.23
Cash dividends per share, SEK		2.25	1)		13	%		2.00			1.85			2.50			2.50
Stockholders’ equity per share, SEK		45.34			4	%		43.79			44.21			42.17			37.82
Number of shares outstanding (in millions)
end of period, basic		3,200			—			3,194			3,185			3,180			3,176
average, basic		3,197			—			3,190			3,183			3,178			3,174
average, diluted		3,226			—			3,212			3,202			3,193			3,189
Additions to property, plant and equipment		3,686			–8	%		4,006			4,133			4,319			3,827
Depreciation and write-downs/impairments of property, plant and equipment		3,296			–6	%		3,502			3,105			2,914			3,038
Acquisitions/capitalization of intangible assets		7,246			—			11,413			1,287			29,838			18,319
Amortization and write-downs/impairments of intangible assets		6,657			–23	%		8,621			5,568			5,459			4,479
Research and development expenses		31,558			–5	%		33,055			33,584			28,842			27,533
as percentage of net sales		15.5	%		—			16.0	%		16.1	%		15.4	%		15.3	%
Ratios
Operating margin excluding joint ventures		8.7	%		—			6.5	%		8.0	%		12.5	%		16.7	%
Operating margin		8.1	%		—			2.9	%		7.8	%		16.3	%		19.9	%
EBITA margin		11.0	%		—			6.7	%		9.4	%		18.0	%		21.0	%
Cash conversion		112	%		—			117	%		92	%		66	%		57	%
Return on equity		7.8	%		—			2.6	%		8.2	%		17.2	%		23.7	%
Return on capital employed		9.6	%		—			4.3	%		11.3	%		20.9	%		27.4	%
Equity ratio		52.1	%		—			52.3	%		49.7	%		55.1	%		56.2	%
Capital turnover		1.1			—			1.1			1.2			1.2			1.3
Inventory turnover days		74			—			68			68			70			71
Trade receivables turnover		3.2			—			2.9			3.1			3.4			3.9
Payment readiness, SEK million		96,951			9	%		88,960			84,917			64,678			67,454
as percentage of net sales		47.7	%		—			43.1	%		40.6	%		34.4	%		37.5	%
Statistical data, year-end
Number of employees		90,261			9	%		82,493			78,740			74,011			63,781
of which in Sweden		17,848			–2	%		18,217			20,155			19,781			19,094
Export sales from Sweden, SEK million		100,070			6	%		94,829			109,254			102,486			98,694

1) For 2010, as proposed by the Board of Directors.

15

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

SHARE INFORMATION

STOCK EXCHANGE TRADING

The Ericsson Class A and Class B shares are listed on NASDAQ OMX Stockholm. In the United States, the Class B shares are listed on NASDAQ in the form of American Depositary Shares (ADS) evidenced by American Depositary Receipts (ADR) under the symbol ERIC. Each ADS represents one Class B share.

In 2010, approximately 6 (7) billion Ericsson shares were traded, of which about 3.4 billion were traded on NASDAQ OMX Stockholm and about 1.6 billion were traded on NASDAQ. (Note: The approximate total volumes include trading on alternative trading venues such as BATS Europe, Burgundy, Chi-X Europe.)

Trading volume in Ericsson shares decreased by approximately 30 percent on NASDAQ OMX Stockholm and decreased by approximately 7 percent on NASDAQ as compared to 2009.

CHANGES IN NUMBER OF SHARES AND CAPITAL STOCK 2006–2010

		Number of shares		Share capital
2006	December 31 (no changes)		16,132,258,678		16,132,258,678
2007	December 31 (no changes)		16,132,258,678		16,132,258,678
2008	June 2, reverse split 1:5		3,226,451,735		16,132,258,678
2008	July 23, new issue. (Class C shares, later converted to Class B)		19,900,000		99,500,000
2008	December 31		3,246,351,735		16,231,758,678
2009	June 8, new issue (Class C-shares, later converted to Class B)		27,000,000		135,000,000
2009	December 31		3,273,351,735		16,366,758,678
2010	December 31		3,273,351,735		16,366,758,678

PERFORMANCE INDICATORS

	2010		2009		2008		20072)		20062)
Earnings per share, diluted (SEK)		3.46		1.14		3.52		6.84		8.23
Operating income per share (SEK)1)		7.42		5.80		7.50		9.64		11.29
Cash flow from operating activities per share (SEK)		8.31		7.67		7.54		6.04		5.82
Stockholders’ equity per share, basic, end of period (SEK)		45.34		43.79		44.21		42.17		37.82
P/E ratio		22		57		17		11		17
Total shareholder return (%)		22		15		–20		–43		3
Dividend per share (SEK)3)		2.25		2.00		1.85		2.50		2.50

1) For 2010, 2009 and 2008 excluding restructuring charges.

2) 2006 and 2007 restated for reverse split 1:5 in 2008.

3) For 2010 as proposed by the Board of Directors.

For definitions of the financial terms used, see Glossary, Financial Terminology and Exchange Rates.

All performance indicators except Earnings per share, diluted, and Stockholders’ equity per share, basic, end of period are calculated on average number of shares outstanding, basic.

16

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

THE ERICSSON SHARE

Share listings

NASDAQ OMX, Stockholm

NASDAQ, New York

Total number of shares outstanding	3,273,351,735
of which Class A shares	261,755,983
of which Class B shares	3,011,595,752
of which Ericsson treasury shares, Class B	73,088,515
Quotient value	SEK 5.00
Market capitalization, December 31, 2010	approx. SEK 255b.
GICs (Global Industry Classification)	45201020
Ticker codes
NASDAQ OMX	ERIC A
Stockholm	ERIC B
NASDAQ, New York	ERIC
Bloomberg NASDAQ	ERICA SS
OMX Stockholm	ERICB SS
Bloomberg NASDAQ	ERIC US
Reuters NASDAQ	ERICa.ST
OMX Stockholm	ERICb.ST
Reuters NASDAQ	ERIC.O
ISIN
ERIC A	SE0000108649
ERIC B	SE0000108656
ERIC	US2948216088
CUSIP	294821608

17

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

18

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

SHARE TREND

In 2010, Ericsson’s total market capitalization increased by about 18 (13) percent to SEK 255 billion (SEK 215 billion in 2009). The OMX Stockholm Index on NASDAQ OMX Stockholm increased by 23 percent, the S&P 500 Index increased by 13 percent and the NASDAQ composite index increased by 17 percent.

19

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

OFFER AND LISTING DETAILS

Principal trading market—NASDAQ OMX Stockholm—share prices

The table below states the high and low share prices for our Class A and Class B shares as reported by NASDAQ OMX Stockholm for the last five years. Trading on the exchange generally continues until 5:30 p.m. (CET) each business day. In addition to trading on the exchange there is also trading off the exchange and on alternative venues during trading hours and also after 5:30 p.m. (CET).

NASDAQ OMX Stockholm publishes a daily Official Price List of Shares which includes the volume of recorded transactions in each listed stock, together with the prices of the highest and lowest recorded trades of the day. The Official Price List of Shares reflects price and volume information for trades completed by the members. The equity securities listed on the NASDAQ OMX Stockholm Official Price List of Shares currently comprise the shares of 258 companies.

Host market NASDAQ—ADS prices

The table below states the high and low share prices quoted for our ADSs on NASDAQ for the last five years. The NASDAQ quotations represent prices between dealers, not including retail mark-ups, markdowns or commissions, and do not necessarily represent actual transactions.

SHARE PRICES ON NASDAQ OMX STOCKHOLM

(SEK)	2010		2009		2008		20071)		20061)
Class A at last day of trading		74.00		65.00		59.30		76.80		138.00
Class A high for year (June 21, 2010)		88.40		78.80		83.60		148.50		154.50
Class A low for year (January 4, 2010)		65.20		55.40		40.60		73.00		104.50
Class B at last day of trading		78.15		65.90		58.80		75.90		138.25
Class B high for year (June 21, 2010)		90.45		79.60		83.70		149.50		155.00
Class B low for year (January 4, 2010)		65.90		55.50		40.60		72.65		104.50

1) 2006 and 2007 restated for reverse split 1:5 in 2008.

20

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

SHARE PRICES ON NASDAQ NEW YORK

(USD)	2010		2009		2008		20071)		20061)
ADS at last day of trading		11.53		9.19		7.81		11.68		20.12
ADS high for year (April 23, 2010)		12.39		10.92		14.00		21.71		20.57
ADS low for year (February 5, 2010)		9.40		6.60		5.49		11.12		14.44

1) 2006 and 2007 restated for reverse split 1:5 in 2008.

SHARE PRICES ON NASDAQ OMX STOCKHOLM AND NASDAQ

	NASDAQ OMX Stockholm								NASDAQ
	SEK per Class A share				SEK per Class B share				USD per ADS1)
Period	Low		High		Low		High		Low		High
Annual high and low
20062)		104.50		154.50		104.50		155.00		14.44		20.57
20072)		73.00		148.50		72.65		149.50		11.12		21.71
2008		40.60		83.60		40.60		83.70		5.49		14.00
2009		55.40		78.80		55.50		79.60		6.60		10.92
2010		65.20		88.40		65.90		90.45		9.40		12.39
Quarterly high and low
2009 First Quarter		55.40		78.00		55.50		78.70		6.60		9.65
2009 Second Quarter		64.10		78.80		64.00		79.60		8.10		9.92
2009 Third Quarter		65.80		78.60		66.10		79.50		9.10		10.84
2009 Fourth Quarter		64.70		76.25		65.25		76.95		8.94		10.92
2010 First Quarter		65.20		78.70		65.90		80.00		9.40		11.33
2010 Second Quarter		73.00		88.40		74.15		90.45		9.51		12.39
2010 Third Quarter		69.00		86.55		70.85		89.35		9.62		12.20
2010 Fourth Quarter		66.95		77.05		68.85		79.95		9.96		11.71
Monthly high and low
August 2010		69.00		79.45		70.85		81.05		9.62		11.40
September 2010		69.70		78.50		71.85		80.65		9.98		11.33
October 2010		68.80		74.50		70.65		76.80		10.49		11.60
November 2010		66.95		72.00		68.85		74.20		9.96		11.20
December 2010		70.00		77.05		72.45		79.95		10.48		11.71
January 2011		72.50		78.55		74.80		82.00		10.99		12.61
February 2011		74.00		80.05		77.15		83.00		12.09		12.93

1) One ADS = 1 Class B share.

2) 2006 and 2007 restated for reverse split 1:5 in 2008.

21

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

SHAREHOLDERS

As of December 31, 2010, the Parent Company had 630,592 shareholders registered at Euroclear Sweden AB (the Central Securities Depository—CSD), of which 1,334 holders had a US address. According to information provided by Citibank, there were 262,814,956 ADSs outstanding as of December 31, 2010, and 4,888 registered holders of such ADSs. A significant number of Ericsson ADSs are held by banks, broker and/or nominees for the accounts of their customer. As of December 31, 2010, the number of bank, broker and/or nominee accounts holding Ericsson ADSs was 196,360.

According to information known at year-end 2010, almost 78 percent of our Class A and Class B shares were owned by institutions, Swedish and international.

Our major shareholders do not have different voting rights than other shareholders holding the same classes of shares.

As far as we know, the Company is not directly or indirectly owned or controlled by another corporation, by any foreign government or by any other natural or legal person(s) separately or jointly.

TOP EXECUTIVES AND BOARD MEMBERS, OWNERSHIP

	Number of Class A shares		Number of Class B shares		Voting rights, percent
Top executives and Board members as a group (31 persons)		2,416		3,937,920		0.07

For individual holdings, see Corporate Governance Report.

22

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

The table shows the total number of shares in the Parent Company owned by top executives and Board members (including Deputy employee representatives) as a group as of December 31, 2010.

The following table shows share information, as of December 31, 2010, with respect to our 15 largest shareholders, ranked by voting rights, as well as percentage of voting rights as of December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008.

LARGEST SHAREHOLDERS, DECEMBER 31, 2010 AND PERCENTAGE OF VOTING RIGHTS, DECEMBER 31, 2010, 2009 AND 2008

Identity of person or group1)	Number of Class A shares		Of total Class A shares, percent		Number of Class B shares		Of total Class B shares, percent		2010 Voting rights, percent		2009 Voting rights, percent		2008 Voting rights, percent
Investor AB		102,664,038		39.22		61,414,664		2.04		19.33		19.33		19.42
AB Industrivärden		77,680,600		29.68		0		0.00		13.80		13.62		13.28
Handelsbankens Pensionsstiftelse		19,800,000		7.56		0		0.00		3.52		3.52		3.00
Skandia Liv		15,719,072		6.01		10,745,693		0.36		2.98		3.02		2.89
Swedbank Robur Fonder AB		1,495,549		0.57		138,868,343		4.61		2.73		3.07		2.44
Pensionskassan SHB Försäkringsföreningen		11,672,000		4.46		0		0.00		2.07		2.25		2.26
BlackRock Fund Advisors		0		0.00		81,187,654		2.70		1.44		1.81		0.00
Dodge & Cox, Inc.		0		0.00		80,330,400		2.67		1.43		1.05		0.98
AMF Pensionsförsäkring AB		800,000		0.31		67,174,148		2.23		1.34		1.30		1.55
OppenheimerFunds, Inc.		0		0.00		72,416,412		2.40		1.29		1.29		1.31
Handelsbanken Fonder AB		1,340		0.00		59,260,630		1.97		1.05		0.94		1.02
Gamla Livförsäkringsbolaget SEB Trygg Liv		4,675,919		1.79		12,275,600		0.41		1.05		0.98		1.04
Aberdeen Asset Managers Ltd.		0		0.00		56,648,517		1.88		1.01		0.71		0.38
SEB Investment Management AB		498,441		0.19		50,604,935		1.68		0.99		0.89		0.98
PRIMECAP Management Co.		0		0.00		52,241,292		1.73		0.93		0.83		0.56
Others		26,749,024		10.21		2,268,427,464		75.32		45.04		45.39		48.89
Total		261,755,983		100.00		3,011,595,752		100.00		100.00		100.00		100.00

1) Source: Capital Precision.

23

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

LETTER FROM MICHAEL TRESCHOW

Dear shareholders,

When I summarized year 2009, I wrote that the key future opportunities for the industry and Ericsson would be increased mobile traffic. In 2010 we saw massive data traffic uptake, driven by laptops and smartphones. The global mobile data traffic actually more than doubled. As a consequence, Ericsson saw a growing demand for mobile broadband.

The telecom industry has for a very long time been characterized by rapid technology development and consolidation. Along with the introduction of new technologies, Ericsson’s business is becoming more and more services and software-related. Management has taken action to adapt the Company to this change and the implementation of a new organization has so far been smooth. This is an important foundation for Ericsson’s future growth.

In 2010, Ericsson acquired companies to the value of SEK 3.3 billion. Many new employees came aboard during the year, 5,250 joined through acquisitions and about 1,300 through managed services contracts. The Board closely follows the integration of acquired businesses and the insourcing of new employees from operators via managed services contracts. Ericsson has a well-established integration process and a culture where new colleagues quickly become a part of the Company.

During the year, The Board has continued to monitor the Company’s remuneration principles. The Board is of the opinion that Ericsson has a well-balanced and competitive compensation structure which rewards performance. We think it is beneficial that senior executives invest in shares and we hope the new long-term variable remuneration (LTV) program will prove to be motivational.

Ericsson has a strong financial position with net cash of SEK 51.3 billion. A strong cash position is important since it gives the Company the ability to play a role in industry consolidation and to strengthen its assets in areas such as systems integration and consulting.

At my very first Board meeting in April 2002, Ericsson was in a quite different situation. The Company was in a financial crisis and at that meeting, we took the decision to propose a rights offering of SEK 30 billion. Since then we have paid back about SEK 41.9 billion in dividends to our shareholders, including the proposed dividend for 2010. In 2002 the share price declined below the subscription price of SEK 3.80 per B-share. Following the rights offering the share price saw sustained growth until 2007. Since then the share price has underperformed.

It has been an exciting journey for me to help to steer Ericsson and shape the industry during my years as Chairman of the Board. I have introduced two new CEOs and their management teams. We have seen the services part of the Company grow to represent close to 40 percent of revenues. Ericsson and the industry are now in the initial phase of rolling out mobile broadband on a large scale.

It is an exciting future ahead for Ericsson. Taking into account the Company’s strong market and financial position, it is well positioned to continue to lead the industry.

After nine years in this position it is time to hand over to my successor. I wish the new chairman and Ericsson all the best.

Michael Treschow

Chairman of the Board

24

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

BOARD OF DIRECTORS’ REPORT

CONTENTS

VISION	26
STRATEGY	27
BUSINESS FOCUS	29
OPERATIONAL GOALS AND RESULTS	32
FINANCIAL RESULTS OF OPERATIONS	34
FINANCIAL POSITION	38
CASH FLOW	42
BUSINESS RESULTS	44
LEGAL AND TAX PROCEEDINGS	58
MATERIAL CONTRACTS	59
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE	59
RISK MANAGEMENT	60
SOURCING AND SUPPLY	61
SUSTAINABILITY AND CORPORATE RESPONSIBILITY	61
PARENT COMPANY	64
POST-CLOSING EVENTS	66
BOARD ASSURANCE	66

25

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

This Board of Directors’ Report is based on Ericsson’s consolidated financial statements, prepared in accordance with IFRS as endorsed by the EU. The application of reasonable but subjective judgments, estimates and assumptions to accounting policies and procedures affects the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and contingent assets and liabilities at the balance sheet date as well as the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. These amounts could differ materially under different judgments, assumptions and estimates. Please see Note C2—“Critical Accounting Estimates and Judgments” (p. 91).

Also non-IFRS measures are used to provide meaningful supplemental information to the IFRS results. Non-IFRS measures are designed to facilitate analysis by indicating Ericsson’s underlying performance. However, these measures should not be viewed in isolation or as substitutes to the IFRS measures. A reconciliation of non-IFRS measures with the IFRS results can be found on page 34.

This report includes forward-looking statements subject to risks and uncertainties. Actual billion developments could differ materially from those described or implied. Please see “Forward-Looking Statements” (p. 175) and “Risk Factors” (p. 167).

The external auditors review the quarterly interim reports, perform audits of the Annual Report and report their findings to the Board and its Audit Committee.

The terms “Ericsson”, “the Group”, and unless the context reasonably requires otherwise also “the Company”, all refer to Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson and its subsidiaries. The “Parent Company” solely refers to Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson. Unless otherwise noted, numbers in parentheses 0 refer to the previous year (i.e. 2009).

VISION

Ericsson’s vision is to be the prime driver in an all-communicating world. The vision of an all-communicating world is rapidly becoming a reality as there are more than 5.3 billion subscriptions today for mobile telecommunications. Ericsson envisions a continued evolution, from having connected 5 billion people to connecting 50 billion “things”. The Company envisions that anything that can benefit from being connected will be connected, mainly via mobile broadband.

26

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

STRATEGY

By leveraging global presence and scale as well as technology and services leadership, Ericsson will continue to be the prime driver in the telecom industry.

Global presence and scale

Ericsson has today business in more than 180 countries. The Company is the largest provider of operator equipment and with 45,000 service professionals, the Company has secured scale advantages.

Going forward, Ericsson intends to increase its market share in the solution areas: Communication Services, Consumer and Business Applications, Fixed Broadband and Convergence, Managed Services, Mobile Broadband, Operations and Business Support Systems and Television and Media Management.

With its strong financial position, the Company intends to grow also through acquisitions, targeting small and medium-sized companies.

Ericsson sees opportunities to increase its footprint, i.e. installed equipment base, mainly in Europe, where its market share is lower than the overall global position. By outperforming its competitors, there is an opportunity for the Company to grow footprint by achieving a larger part of a roll-out project than initially assigned by the customer.

Market indicators

In understanding where the market is heading, Ericsson follows different drivers.

For segment Networks the Company monitors the traffic development in the networks and the evolution of the installed equipment. These parameters vary between countries and regions. Operators’ total capital expenditure is not a key indicator since only around 50 percent of the cost is related to telecom. Of the telecom part, about 10-15 percent is designated for telecom equipment. Accordingly, operator capital expenditure can therefore decrease without necessarily impacting Ericsson sales.

For segment Global Services, it is relevant to study operators’ operating expenses, since Ericsson offers services and solutions to reduce their operating cost.

Multimedia is more fragmented, with a number of parameters for different parts of the business.

Business mix

Ericsson’s Group margins depend to a high degree on the business mix with the proportion of services, software and hardware content as well as type of projects. Rolling out a new network, increasing coverage, or modernizing a network, means deploying hardware, i.e. radio base stations (RBSs) and controllers, on a large scale. These projects are often won in open tenders in a highly competitive environment. Later, after deployment, the hardware will be regularly upgraded with software to enable for example higher data speeds and new functionality/features. These upgrades normally provide the Company with more even revenue streams. The initial large projects are a necessary first step to secure future software and services business when upgrades and/or expansions of the networks take place.

Technology leadership

By continuing to invest in research and development (R&D), the Company will secure its technology leadership. The objectives are to deliver superior performance and to be the thought leader in the industry.

Ericsson has one of the industry’s largest organizations for R&D.

27

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Research and development

The Company’s total spend on R&D was SEK 29.9 (27.0) billion excluding restructuring charges. More than 20,000 people work in developing products and solutions. With approximately 600 research engineers, research accounts for about three percent of the overall investment in R&D.

All research is closely connected to future solutions and products. The applied research usually targets products that will reach the market within three to five years. Research performed in the areas of multimedia and user services target products and solutions which are closer in time. An increasing part of the solutions are software based which requires a different mode of operation in R&D. During the last years, developing the Company’s software capabilities has been important and a key part of this has been to implement new ways of working. An agile engineering method has been implemented, allowing quick response to market changes. The new ways of working as well as product packaging, enable online delivery of software, and new customization possibilities. The strategy to develop software-based solutions also means new business models in the customer engagement, such as software subscription or software-as-a-service.

The research activities are performed in-house as well as in collaboration with research institutes and universities. An essential part of the research work is performed in parallel with standardization work. Standardization is performed together with peers in different industry bodies. Open standards are a foundation for the industry in order to secure ecosystems and interoperability.

To speed up the transfer of knowledge and research concepts into product development, research engineers responsible for the initial project usually move along to the product development units. To fill the gap in the research organization, Ericsson continuously recruits talented research engineers with the task to take on new projects.

When developing new technologies such as 3G/WCDMA or 4G/LTE, the project cycles have normally been longer, up to ten years. However, when developing new services or applications other project models have been created with shorter lead-times, sometimes only a few months. In order to shorten the time from idea to product, Ericsson has introduced beta tests with up to 1,000 users trying out new services and applications. A focus area for Ericsson is now how to support the commercialization of these ideas into new solutions.

Every quarter, the executive team in Ericsson reviews the project portfolio in R&D. Return on investment is calculated as net present value for the different projects.

Read more about Ericsson’s R&D in 2010 on page 31.

Intellectual property rights and licensing

The intellectual property rights (IPR) are licensed to other companies (infrastructure equipment suppliers, embedded module suppliers, handset suppliers and mobile application developers) in return for royalty payments and/or access to their IPRs. The Company is of the opinion that it has access to all essential patents that are material to the business in part or in whole. The net revenue from IPRs was about SEK 4.6 (4.5) billion in 2010.

Services leadership

With 45,000 service professionals across the world, the Company has the industry’s largest services organization. The Company provides managed services, consulting and systems integration, customer support and network rollout.

28

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

The services organization, with its broad skills and experiences, provides a competitive advantage for sales of infrastructure.

Drawing on the experiences gained in providing services related to the infrastructure business, the Company is also able to offer new, more advanced and stand-alone services, such as managing data centers. A key area is to develop new business models such as network sharing and new ways of bundling technology and services. The Company has over the years strengthened its competence in services through the insourcing of staff from telecom operators and acquiring small and medium-sized companies in the field of consulting and systems integration.

Moving into new industry segments

Ericsson has in 2010 taken the decision to increase its efforts to approach customers in new segments, such as governments, health industry, transport and utilities. These are industries with either similar business models as telecom operators and/or obvious benefits from mobile broadband.

Guiding principles

The basic principles for Ericsson’s strategy are:

• Customer intimacy; highly qualified employees working closely with the customer to create effective solutions

• Continuous process improvements and innovation in all areas

• Scale in delivery and technical solutions.

BUSINESS FOCUS

Meeting demand for mobile broadband worldwide

The business focus in 2010 has been to provide operators with mobile broadband. The most obvious driver of this development was the massive data traffic growth, especially in the US and Japan.

Recently introduced mobile devices such as smartphones and tablets drive data traffic and the need for higher speeds and enhanced capacity in the networks.

Telecom operators across the world see an increasing part of their revenues emerging from data, although voice still is the main source for sales revenues. For some operators in Japan, mobile data represents more than 50 percent of total revenues. In many countries, such as the US, operators have introduced tiered pricing for mobile data services, further spurring demand for data services. In addition, quality of service has become a differentiator for operators, driving investments for expansions and upgrades.

29

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

For Ericsson, this resulted in an increasing demand for mobile broadband and quicker than expected ramp-up of volumes of the new radio-base station RBS 6000. During the first half of 2010, Ericsson was still impacted by the cautious operator investments that started in the second half of 2009. The Company also put a lot of focus on mitigating the effects of the industry-wide component shortage that occurred mid 2010. While the supply of components has now normalized, we are still not fully meeting the increased demand on certain mobile broadband products. The total global number of mobile subscriptions is 5.3 billion. In 2010, mobile broadband subscriptions increased more than 60 percent to approximately 600 million, still only representing some 10 percent of total mobile subscriptions. Ericsson expects the strong uptake for mobile broadband to continue in 2011. Already in 2011, the number of mobile broadband subscriptions is expected to hit one billion. This development is mainly driven by the use of smartphones. Devices with embedded modules such as tablets are also expected to show continuously strong growth.

Increasing market share

In 2010, focus was also on increasing footprint in Europe and to secure footprint in the rollout of 3G networks in India. In Europe, approximately 800,000 radio-base stations are expected to be replaced. These base stations were installed before 2004 and consume 30 percent more energy than new equipment. Since energy represents a significant part of the total operating expenses of a radio site, replacement is a good business case. Ericsson has seen the initial modernization of networks in Europe and has so far managed to gain contracts in countries where the Company previously had a weaker position. However, modernization projects typically last for a couple of years, so it is still too early to conclude what the Company’s market position will be. Ericsson has in general a lower market share in Europe than in the rest of the world. This was a result of the 3G rollouts that took place in Europe approximately eight years ago. Ericsson was then in a financially turbulent situation and lost out on certain 3G deals.

In India, 3G rollouts started in 2010 and Ericsson has maintained a market share in line with its 2G position.

Ericsson also acquired companies to strengthen its market position:

• Nortel’s GSM business in North America with 350 employees

• Nortel’s share in LG-Nortel in Korea with 1,300 employees.

Ericsson also signed agreements to acquire GDNT, a Chinese R&D and services company with 1,100 employees, and the Nortel multi-service switch business. These two businesses were not consolidated in 2010.

30

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Technology

Ericsson invested SEK 29.9 (27.0) billion in R&D in 2010, excluding restructuring charges. The increase is mainly a result of consolidation of acquired companies.

Of the total cost for development of new products in 2010, the majority was spent on further enhancements of 3G/ WCDMA/HSPA as well as 4G/LTE. Resources are also spent on further adaptations of 2G/GSM although at lower levels compared to previous years.

The complexity in the industry with a number of technologies installed, new solutions and services as well as more frequencies used, requires continued efforts in R&D to secure Ericsson’s technology leadership also in coming years.

Current radio research focus is on ensuring that radio networks can handle the massive data growth that we have experienced since introducing mobile broadband technologies.

Ericsson held approximately 27,000 (25,000) granted patents globally as of December 31, 2010. The Company believes it holds approximately 25 percent of all essential patents in LTE.

The Company has a number of essential patents relating to GSM, Edge, WCDMA, HSPA, TD-SCDMA, CDMA2000, WiMAX and LTE. Ericsson also holds patents in other areas, including IMS, voice-over-IP, ATM, messaging, WAP, Bluetooth, SDH/ SONET, WDM and carrier Ethernet.

Read more about Ericsson’s R&D strategy and IPR’s on page 28.

Increasing services business

In 2010, 54 (30) managed services contracts were signed, with fixed, mobile and cable operators and for enterprise networks. 26 (9) of the contracts were extensions or expansions.

The year was also characterized by further acquisitions. The Company acquired companies in the area of consulting and systems integrations:

• Pride in Italy with 1,000 employees

• InCode, a US strategy and consulting firm with 45 employees

• Optimi, a US-Spanish network management and optimization company with 200 employees.

Competence and skills

Ericsson introduced a new go-to-market model in 2010. The Company set up ten regions, replacing the former 23 market units. The regions approach customers with solutions, covering services, software and hardware. By this, Ericsson will move from a product-led to a solutions-led sales approach, selling the full breadth of the portfolio. The Company also started up projects in the regions, developing solutions for new customer segments.

At year end, Ericsson had 90,261 (82,493) employees. In 2010, 5,250 individuals joined Ericsson through acquisitions and about 1,300 through managed services contracts. Approximately 5,000 were made redundant and 6,000 were recruited. The vast majority of recruitments took place in India, China and Brazil. These new recruitments were primarily made within the areas of R&D and service delivery.

31

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Half of the workforce, 45,000 people, are service professionals. The competence and capabilities of the Company’s employees is increasingly service and software oriented.

OPERATIONAL GOALS AND RESULTS

Ericsson’s overall goal is to create shareholder value. Management uses four metrics to monitor the Company’s overall performance: faster than market sales growth, a best-in-class margin, a strong cash conversion and growth in JV earnings.

Shareholder value creation

Grow faster than the market

The Company is the largest provider of operator equipment. In the market for 4G/LTE, the Company’s market share is higher than for earlier radio technology generations since Ericsson has managed to get a good start in the rollout of 4G/LTE. The 4G/ LTE market is still small though, since it is in its initial phase. When including CDMA in the operator equipment market, Ericsson increased its market share in 2010 due to the acquired Nortel business. In professional services, the company is estimated to have kept or slightly increased its market share. The overall market position for segment Multimedia is difficult to assess, as the market is fragmented.

Best- in-class operating margin

The operating margin for the Company, excluding joint ventures and restructuring charges, was 12 (12) percent. Based on reported results for 2010, we believe the margin remains the highest among the Company’s traditional telecom competitors that are publicly listed.

Cash conversion of over 70 percent

The cash conversion rate for 2010 was 112 (117) percent, reflecting a strong focus on cash flow and a higher net income. Cash conversion is defined as cash flow from operating activities divided by net income reconciled to cash.

Growth in JV earnings

JV earnings improved in 2010 to SEK –0.7 (–6.1) billion, excluding restructuring charges. Ericsson’s share in earnings in Sony Ericsson was SEK 0.9 (–4.8) billion, excluding restructuring charges, and in ST-Ericsson SEK –1.5 (–1.3) billion, excluding restructuring charges. Sony Ericsson’s improved results were driven by a streamlined product portfolio focused on higher-end smartphones and an improved cost structure. ST-Ericsson is on its way of completing the transition program and has new products coming.

32

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Other performance indicators

Ericsson believes that satisfied customers and motivated employees are key to success.

Customer satisfaction

Every year, an independent customer satisfaction survey is performed. In 2010, approximately 10,000 representatives, in different professions, of Ericsson customers around the world were polled to assess their satisfaction with Ericsson, compared to its main competitors. Over the past five years, Ericsson has maintained a level of excellence. The goal is to increase this level further.

Employee engagement

In 2004 Ericsson began measuring motivation among its employees. This survey is conducted by an independent company. In 2010, 87 (91) percent of all employees across the world responded to the survey. The human capital index, which measures employee contribution in adding value for customers and meeting business goals, was 72 (69). This is a high level, but as with customer satisfaction, the objective is to further increase employee engagement and motivation.

33

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

FINANCIAL RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

ABBREVIATED INCOME STATEMENT WITH RECONCILIATION IFRS—NON-IFRS MEASURES

	IFRS									Restructuring charges						Non-IFRS measures						Percent change			Non-IFRS measures
SEK billion	2010			2009			2008			2010		2009		2008		2010			2009						2008
Net sales		203.3			206.5			208.9									203.3			206.5			–2	%		208.9
Cost of sales		–129.1			–136.3			–134.6			–3.4		–4.2		–2.5		–125.7			–132.1			–5	%		–132.1
Gross income		74.3			70.2			74.3			–3.4		–4.2		–2.5		77.6			74.4			4	%		76.8
Gross margin %		36.5	%		34.0	%		35.5	%								38.2	%		36.0	%					36.8	%
Operating expenses		–58.6			–60.0			–60.6			–3.5		–7.1		–4.2		–55.2			–52.9			4	%		–56.4
Operating expenses as % of sales		28.8	%		29.0	%		29.0	%								27.1	%		25.6	%					27.0	%
Other operating income and expenses		2.0			3.1			3.0			—		—		—		2.0			3.1			–35	%		3.0
Operating income before share in earnings of JVs and associated companies		17.6			13.3			16.7			–6.8		–11.3		–6.7		24.4			24.6			–1	%		23.4
Operating margin % before share in earnings of JVs and associated companies		8.7	%		6.5	%		8.0	%								12.0	%		11.9	%					11.2	%
Share in earnings of JVs and associated companies		–1.2			–7.4			–0.4			–0.5		–1.3		–0.9		–0.7			–6.1						0.4
Operating income		16.5			5.9			16.3			–7.3		–12.6		–7.6		23.7			18.5			28	%		23.9
Operating margin %		8.1	%		2.9	%		7.8	%								11.7	%		9.0	%					11.4	%
Financial income and expense, net		–0.7			0.3			1.0
Taxes		–4.5			–2.1			–5.6
Net income		11.2			4.1			11.7
EPS diluted (SEK)		3.46			1.14			3.52

Non-IFRS measures are used in the income statement as supplemental information to the IFRS results. Since there were significant restructuring costs during 2008, 2009 and 2010 and consequently significant impact on reported results and margins, non-IFRS measures excluding restructuring charges are presented to facilitate analysis by indicating Ericsson’s underlying performance. However, these measures should not be viewed in isolation or as substitutes to the IFRS measures. For more details on the restructuring activities and corresponding charges, please see Note C5—“Expenses by Nature”.

34

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Financial results of operations

Growth of sales, operating margin and net income are the overriding targets. In 2010, sales did not increase despite the strong demand for mobile broadband in the second half of the year. However, net income improved significantly, mainly due to improvements in Sony Ericsson earnings and less restructuring charges. For 2011, the main objectives remain. To achieve these targets, an essential ingredient is a continued focus on cost and internal efficiency work.

Sales

The cautious operator investments that started to impact in the second half of 2009 continued during the first half 2010. In the second half of 2010 demand for mobile broadband started to increase. During part of the year, the Company struggled with the industry-wide component shortage. At year end, the supply of components had normalized. Despite necessary inflow of components, the Company could at year-end not fully meet the increased demand on certain mobile broadband products. In 2010, voice related sales decreased and the increase in demand for mobile broadband products and services could not fully compensate for that decline.

Sales were also negatively impacted by the strong SEK. Sales for comparable units, adjusted for currency exchange rate effects and hedging, decreased—7 percent.

In 2010, the Company saw the share of software sales decline to 24 (26) percent of sales. The portion of hardware increased to 37 (36) percent. The increase in hardware is a result of demand for mobile broadband products. In the short term, the software share might continue to decrease due to a higher portion of projects with a lot of hardware. Longer term, the software part should increase following more expansions and upgrades of networks.

Seasonality

The Company’s quarterly sales, income and cash flow from operations are seasonal in nature, generally lowest in the first quarter of the year and highest in the fourth quarter. This is mainly a result of the seasonal purchase patterns of network operators.

35

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

MOST RECENT FIVE-YEAR AVERAGE SEASONALITY

	First quarter			Second quarter			Third quarter			Fourth quarter
Sequential change		–21	%		9	%		–5	%		30	%
Share of annual sales		22	%		25	%		23	%		30	%

Gross margin

Gross margin, excluding restructuring charges, improved to 38 (36) percent due to business mix with a higher proportion of network upgrades and expansions. Cost of sales was also reduced as a result of efficiency work.

Operating expenses

To secure continued technology leadership, focus is on innovation and R&D. R&D expenses amounted to SEK 29.9 (27.0) billion. Spending on R&D as a percentage of sales was 15 (13) percent. The increase is a result of lower sales, higher investments in certain R&D areas and the acquired Nortel and LG-Ericsson operations. In 2011, R&D expenses of approximately SEK 31–33 billion is estimated, including restructuring charges. The amount might fluctuate due to currency exchange rate effects.

Selling and administrative expenses, excluding restructuring charges, was stable in relation to sales 12 (13) percent. The amount was SEK 25.3 (25.9) billion. In the year, there were positive effects from efficiency work along with the strong SEK. However, costs for the integration of acquired companies impacted negatively. The Company also conducted a growing number of LTE trials across the world which increased selling and administrative expenses.

Operating margin before JVs

Despite the improved gross margin, operating margin, before share in JV earnings and excluding restructuring charges, was flat at 12 (12) percent. This was an effect of increased R&D expenses.

Share in earnings of JVs

Sony Ericsson returned to profit in 2010, after two years of losses. The turnaround has been possible thanks to restructuring and a streamlined product portfolio focused on higher-end smartphones.

ST-Ericsson is still reporting a loss. The company is on its way of completing the transition program and has new products coming. Ericsson’s share in Sony Ericsson’s income before tax was SEK 0.9 (–4.8) billion, excluding restructuring charges. Ericsson’s share in ST-Ericsson’s income before tax, adjusted to IFRS, was SEK –1.5 (–1.3) billion, excluding restructuring charges.

Operating income

Operating income increased significantly, due to improved earnings in Sony Ericsson.

Financial net

The financial net was SEK –0.7 (0.3) billion. The difference is mainly attributable to a negative impact of around SEK 0.6 billion due to foreign exchange currency revaluation effects and lower interest net of SEK 0.3 billion compared to 2009.

36

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Taxes

The tax expense for the year was SEK 4.5 (2.1) billion or 28.8 (33.9) percent of income after financial items. The tax rate may vary between years depending on business and geographic mix. The tax rate excluding joint ventures and associated companies was 25.7 (25.7) percent due to lower tax rate from the loss-making joint venture.

Net income

Net income increased SEK 7.1 billion to SEK 11.2 (4.1) billion as a result of improved earnings in Sony Ericsson and less restructuring charges.

Earnings per share, diluted

Earnings per share increased by SEK 2.32 to SEK 3.46 (1.14), as a result of improved net income. The Board of Directors proposes a dividend of SEK 2.25 (2.00).

Restructuring charges

Total restructuring charges were SEK 6.8 (11.3) billion. Cash outlays was SEK 3.3 (4.2) billion. A cost reduction program was initiated in 2009 and completed by the second quarter 2010. Charges of SEK 4.2 billion were recognized in 2010 related to the program. In the second half of the year, an additional SEK 2.6 billion in charges were recognized. These charges primarily relate to efficiency activities in service delivery, product development and administration. At the end of the year, cash outlays of SEK 3.2 billion remain to be made. In 2011, restructuring charges of approximately SEK 2 billion are estimated.

RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT PROGRAM

	2010			2009			2008
Expenses (SEK billion)1)		29.9			27.0			30.9
As percent of Net sales		14.7	%		13.1	%		14.8	%
Employees within R&D as at December 312)		20,800			18,300			19,800
Patents2)		27,000			25,000			24,000

1) Excluding restructuring charges.

2) The number of employees and patents are approximate.

37

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

FINANCIAL POSITION

CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET (ABBREVIATED)

December 31, SEK billion	2010		2009		2008
ASSETS
Non-current assets, total		83.4		87.4		87.2
of which intangible assets		46.8		48.2		48.2
of which property, plant and equipment		9.4		9.6		10.0
of which financial assets		14.5		15.3		14.1
of which deferred tax assets		12.7		14.3		14.9
Current assets, total		198.4		182.4		198.5
of which inventory		29.9		22.7		27.8
of which trade receivables		61.1		66.4		75.9
of which other receivables/financing		20.2		16.6		19.8
of which short-term investments, cash and cash equivalents		87.2		76.7		75.0
Total assets		281.8		269.8		285.7
EQUITY AND LIABILITIES
Equity		146.8		141.0		142.1
Non-current liabilities		38.3		43.3		39.5
of which post-employment benefits		5.1		8.5		9.9
of which borrowings		27.0		30.0		24.9
of which other non-current liabilities		6.2		4.8		4.7
Current liabilities		96.8		85.5		104.1
of which provisions		9.4		12.0		14.0
of which current borrowings		3.8		2.1		5.5
of which trade payables		25.0		18.9		23.5
of which other current liabilities		58.6		52.5		61.0
Total equity and liabilities1)		281.8		269.8		285.7

1) Of which interest-bearing liabilities and post-employment benefits SEK 35.9 billion (SEK 40.7 billion in 2009).

38

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Ericsson’s strategy is to maintain a strong balance sheet including a sufficiently large cash position to ensure the financial flexibility to operate freely and to capture business opportunities. This has been particularly important during the past years’ difficult macroeconomic and financial market situation.

By maintaining a strong cash position, the Company can also maintain an active strategy for mergers and acquisitions. During 2010, Ericsson made five acquisitions and strengthened its market position in the USA and Korea along with adding competencies in consulting and systems integration.

An important focus area is the release of working capital. Major efforts have been made during the year in order to reduce days sales outstanding and inventory turnover days as well as to increase payable days. The target for inventory turnover days was not met, while the other two were achieved. The efforts to release further working capital will continue in 2011.

At year end, the strong SEK impacted net operating assets positively when translating assets denominated in foreign currencies into SEK.

The Board of Directors will propose to the Annual General Meeting 2011 a dividend of SEK 2.25 per share. In 2010, the dividend was SEK 2.00 per share. When considering the level of dividend, the Board of Directors take into account the need to secure a continued strong cash position as well as capital needed in order to secure a healthy business going forward.

Current assets

Inventory levels have been higher than expected due to the industry-wide component shortage and supply chain bottlenecks. At year end, inventory was SEK 29.9 (22.7) billion. The higher inventory level followed a higher level of work in progress in the regions. This was an effect from delayed project implementations within network rollout due to the component shortage earlier in the year. Effects from component shortage and supply

39

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

chain bottlenecks were eliminated at year end while there was still an impact of slightly higher component inventories. The target of inventory turnover days less than 65 days was not reached and improvement efforts will continue in 2011.

Trade receivables: Days sales outstanding reached high levels in parts of the year, but had improved significantly at year end, reaching 88 (106) days at year end. The improvement was mainly due to a strong collection and positive effects from a stronger SEK. The Company’s nominal credit losses have historically been low and continued to be so in 2010.

Net cash increased to SEK 51.3 (36.1) billion, mainly due to a strong operating cash flow. Read more about changes in cash on page 42.

Equity

Equity increased by SEK 5.8 billion to SEK 146.8 (141.0) billion. Net income was SEK 11.2 (4.1) billion and a dividend of SEK 6.7 (6.3) billion was paid during the year. The equity ratio was maintained at a healthy level of 52 (52) percent.

Return on equity increased to 7.8 (2.6) percent, primarily due to improved earnings in the joint venture Sony Ericsson and less restructuring charges.

Return on capital employed (ROCE) improved to 9.6 (4.3) percent. Excluding restructuring charges, ROCE would have been 13.6 (11.2) percent.

40

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Non-current liabilities

Post-employment benefits related to defined benefit plans declined to SEK 5.1 (8.5) billion. The year 2010 was characterized by a general increase in discount rates and plan assets yielded higher than expected. Consequently, the Company experienced a decrease in the net pension liability and the funded ratio (plan assets as percentage of defined benefit obligations) increased to 89 (76) percent.

Current liabilities

Provisions declined to SEK 9.4 (12.0) billion. SEK 3.2 (4.3) billion were related to restructuring. The cash outlays of provisions were SEK 7.2 billion. The lower amount of provisions is mainly a result of business mix with more upgrades and expansions. There is also an effect of improved project management as well as geographical mix. Provisions will fluctuate over time, depending on business mix, market mix and technology shifts.

Payable days increased by five days to 62 (57) days. The target of payable days of above 60 days was met.

Non-current borrowings decreased to SEK 27.0 (30.0) billion. No major changes were made in the debt maturity profile during 2010. Debt of SEK 3.4 billion is maturing in 2012 and SEK 5.4 billion in 2013. The Company also has unutilized committed credit facilities of USD 2.0 billion available, maturing in 2014.

Credit ratings at “solid investment grade”

Credit ratings were unchanged during 2010, remaining at “solid investment grade”: Moody’s at Baa1 and Standard & Poor’s at BBB+, both with stable outlook.

Off-balance sheet arrangements

There are currently no material off-balance sheet arrangements that have, or would be reasonably likely to have, a current or anticipated effect on the Company’s financial condition, revenues, expenses, result of operations, liquidity, capital expenditures or capital resources.

41

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

CASH FLOW

CASH FLOW (ABBREVIATED) JANUARY-DECEMBER

SEK billion	2010			2009			2008
Net income		11.2			4.1			11.7
Income reconciled to cash		23.7			21.0			26.0
Changes in operating net assets		2.9			3.5			–2.0
Cash flow from operating activities		26.6			24.5			24.0
Adjusted operating cash flow1)		29.8			28.7			22.1
Cash flow from investing activities		–12.5			–37.5			–8.5
of which capital expenditures, sales of PP&E, product development		–5.2			–4.9			–4.1
of which acquisitions/divestments, net		–2.8			–18.1			1.8
of which short-term investments for cash management purposes and other investing activities		–4.5			–14.5			–6.2
Cash flow before financing activities		14.0			–13.0			15.5
Cash flow from financing activities		–5.7			–1.7			–7.2
Cash conversion (Cash flow from operating activities divided by income reconciled to cash)		112	%		117	%		92	%
Gross cash (Cash, cash equivalents and short-term investments)		87.1			76.7			75.0
Net cash (Gross cash less interest-bearing liabilities and post-employment benefits)		51.3			36.1			34.7

1) Cash flow from operations excl. restructuring cash outlays that have been provided for.

At the end of the year, gross cash had increased by SEK 10.4 billion to SEK 87.2 (76.7) billion. The increase was mainly attributed to a strong cash flow from operating activities of SEK 26.6 (24.5) billion, offsetting investing activities of SEK 12.5 (37.5) billion and a dividend to shareholders of SEK 6.7 (6.3) billion.

Net cash increased to SEK 51.3 (36.1) billion.

Cash flow from operating activities

The adjusted operating cash flow was positively impacted by improved net income as well as released working capital.

Cash flow from operating activities tends to fluctuate between quarters. This is due to changes in trade receivables where there is a seasonal effect from project completion. There is also an effect from seasonal purchase patterns of network operators. The cash flow is therefore evaluated on a yearly basis.

Cash flow from investing activities

Cash outlays for recurring investing activities increased slightly to SEK –5.2 (–4.9) billion.

Acquisitions and divestments during the year were net SEK –2.8 (–18.1) billion, with the major items being the Nortel stake in the LG-Nortel joint venture and Nortel’s GSM business in North America. Divestments were SEK 0.5 (1.2) billion.

Cash outflow for short-term investments for cash management purposes and other investing activities was net SEK –4.5 (–14.5) billion, largely attributable to SEK –3.0 (–17.1) billion of short-term investments.

42

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Capital expenditures

Annual capital expenditures are normally around two percent of sales and are expected to remain at this level. This corresponds to the needs for keeping and maintaining the current capacity level, including the introduction of new technology and methods. The expenditures are largely related to test equipment in R&D units, network operations centers as well as manufacturing and repair operations.

The Board of Directors reviews the Company’s investment plans and proposals.

The Company has sufficient cash and cash generation capacity to fund expected capital expenditures as well as acquisitions without external borrowings in 2011.

We believe that the Company’s property, plant and equipment and the facilities the Company occupies are suitable for its present needs in most locations. As of December 31, 2010, no material land, buildings, machinery or equipment were pledged as collateral for outstanding indebtedness.

CAPITAL EXPENDITURES 2006–2010

SEK billion	2010			2009			2008			2007			2006
Capital expenditures		3.7			4.0			4.1			4.3			3.8
of which in Sweden		1.4			1.3			1.6			1.3			1.0
as percent of net sales		1.8	%		1.9	%		2.0	%		2.3	%		2.2	%

Cash flow from financing activities

Dividends paid in the amount of SEK –6.7 (–6.3) billion, were partly offset by increased borrowings of SEK 1.1 billion and other financing activities of SEK –0.1 billion.

Cash conversion

Cash conversion was 112 (117) percent, well above the target of 70 percent. Over the past three years, cash conversion has been above target.

The cash conversion was largely attributable to the strong improvement in net operating assets and the lower income reconciled to cash.

Restricted cash

Cash balances in certain countries with restrictions on transfers of funds to the Parent Company as cash dividends, loans or advances amounted to SEK 10.8 (8.9) billion.

43

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

BUSINESS RESULTS

Regional development

The regions are the Company’s primary sales channels. As of January 1, 2010, Ericsson has changed its geographical reporting. Instead of the five geographical areas reported in previous years, ten regions are reported, mirroring the new internal geographical organization.

44

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

SALES PER REGION AND SEGMENT 2010

SEK billion	Networks			Global Services			Multi- media			Total change			Percent
North America		30.5			17.7			1.3			49.5			107	%
Latin America		9.2			7.7			0.9			17.9			–11	%
Northern Europe & Central Asia		7.2			4.3			0.6			12.2			2	%
Western & Central Europe		8.3			10.5			1.0			19.9			–12	%
Mediterranean		10.6			10.6			1.4			22.6			–10	%
Middle East		7.2			6.6			1.4			15.1			–17	%
Sub-Saharan Africa		3.6			4.6			1.0			9.2			–40	%
India		5.1			2.8			0.7			8.6			–43	%
China & North East Asia		17.1			8.3			0.5			26.0			0	%
South East Asia & Oceania		7.8			6.5			0.6			14.9			–29	%
Other*		6.0			0.5			1.1			7.4			4	%
Total		112.7			80.1			10.5			203.3			–2	%
Share of total		56	%		39	%		5	%		100	%
Percent change		–1	%		1	%		–21	%		–2	%

* Other—This includes sales of e.g. mobile broadband modules, cables, power modules as well as licensing and IPR. Mobile broadband modules are sold directly by business unit Networks to PC/netbook manufacturers. A central IPR unit manages sales of licenses to equipment vendors or others who wish to use Ericsson’s patented technology. TV solutions are sold both through other equipment vendors as resellers and directly by business unit Multimedia to cable-TV operators.

North America

Sales was positively impacted by the acquired Nortel businesses and negatively affected by the strong SEK. Ericsson became the largest player in the region, driven by organic growth as well as acquisitions. The main growth drivers were the managed services agreement with Sprint, data traffic driven network expansions and the initial build out of LTE networks. Ericsson is a leading supplier of WCDMA/CDMA and LTE to Verizon, AT&T and MetroPCS. MetroPCS and Verizon commercially launched their LTE networks in 2010. North America is Ericsson’s largest market measured in sales and its second largest after Sweden measured in number of employees.

Sprint announced Ericsson as key partner in their network evolution strategy “Network vision” program.

Latin America

The region was characterized by major mergers between regional operators. Lower cost smartphones have created continuous growth in mobile broadband usage, driving operators to invest in networks and services. The services business developed favorably, especially managed services. LTE trials are ongoing in the region.

The world’s first solution to connect public buses to mobile broadband was provided by Dataprom and Ericsson in Brazil. Ericsson was also selected to manage Telefonica’s network operation center in São Paulo with core, transmission and fixed-access equipment.

45

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

The contracts mentioned are a selection of deals signed by Ericsson in 2010. Ericsson normally publicly announces only a part of its wins. Typically only agreements that have some kind of significance in terms of strategy or value are announced via a press release. Ericsson also always seeks for customer approval for any contract release.

46

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

47

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Northern Europe and Central Asia

In the eastern part of the region, both 2G expansions and mobile broadband buildouts are taking place. In Scandinavia, focus is on 4G/LTE deployments. 4G/ LTE trials are planned or ongoing across the region. Operators have operational efficiency high on the agenda, which creates good demand for managed services. Denmark’s leading operator TDC is about to upgrade to 4G/LTE and has chosen Ericsson to supply and manage its nationwide network. Ericsson was also chosen to provide the broadband access network based on VDSL2 technology to TeliaSonera.

Western and Central Europe

Mobile broadband usage continues to increase in the region. Following conclusions of auctions for 4G/LTE in several markets, Ericsson has been selected for a number of 4G/LTE trials now being implemented with major operators. Ericsson is also supporting operators in connection with data capacity and modernization projects. Operators’ focus on efficiency continued to drive strong interest for managed services, network sharing and network transformation leading to opportunities in both services and networks. The UK is at the forefront of network sharing. Ericsson has completed the consolidation of shared sites (over 12,000) for Mobile Broadband Network Ltd (MBNL). Ericsson also extended the managed services business through extensions of existing contracts. This includes a three-year extension with Netia Poland, as well as a renewed and expanded multi-country managed services contract with TeliaSonera International Carrier for field operation services for voice and data networks, built on multi-vendor equipment. Ericsson also signed a five-year managed field service contract for Vodafone in Germany.

Mediterranean

Operator investments especially in Spain and Greece were cautious due to the overall economic environment and price competition among operators. In order to meet demand for mobile broadband services, operators continued to focus on network modernization. Operational efficiency continues to be high on the agenda, creating good momentum for managed services and consulting in networks as well as in all ICT areas.

Ericsson signed a seven-year managed services contract with 3 Italia for data center consolidation and modernization of IT infrastructure.

The largest utility company in Spain, Endesa, selected Ericsson to operate its corporate telecommunication network.

Middle East

The sales drop was caused by cautious operator investments in parts of the region. Development in the region showed large variations where the Gulf countries continued to show good momentum, while most other parts of the region were slow. Services continues to be a large part of the business, representing 43 percent of total sales. Operators are starting to show interest in 4G/LTE with several trials going on throughout the region. Mobile subscriptions in the region are developing positively with net additions for both voice and broadband services.

To offer innovative services to its customers, the Qtel Group chose Ericsson’s Service Delivery Platform. Its customers across the Middle East, North Africa and South East Asia get access to new multimedia services such as social networking and mobile music.

48

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Sub-Saharan Africa

The region was impacted by the global economic downturn with a tight credit environment as well as operator consolidation. The region is predominately a market where 2G rollouts are in focus. However, demand for mobile broadband is emerging throughout the region, although at a low pace. Services sales increased and now represents 50 percent of total sales.

India

India sales were impacted by 3G auctions and security clearance in the first half of the year. In the middle of the year, Ericsson got security clearance for deliveries of equipment. In the fall, contracts for 3G deployments were signed. Ericsson has a market share for 3G which is in line with its 2G position. Throughout the year, the recurring services business maintained good development. Radius Infratel signed a fiber-to-the-home contract with Ericsson, providing more than half a million subscribers with fixed broadband.

China and North-East Asia

While operators on mainland China are still focused on successful 3G launches, operators across the region also now have 4G/LTE on the agenda. In Japan, demand for mobile broadband had a positive effect on sales.

Ericsson won a managed services contract with China Unicom for field maintenance of radio base station sites, fixed network and transmission as well as a contract with China Mobile for field maintenance of radio base station sites. Leading Japanese operator SoftBank Mobile invested in capacity by upgrading its HSPA radio access network with Ericsson’s RBS 6000. Increased use of smartphones and advanced mobile applications boost data traffic and in order to ensure continued user quality, EMOBILE has enhanced its network with 3G/HSPA 42 Mbps supplied by Ericsson.

On June 30, the acquisition of Nortel’s part of LG-Nortel was completed. This positions Ericsson as a leading vendor in Korea. Another milestone was the showcase of the first complete TD-LTE solution with end-to-end-capabilities, together with ST-Ericsson in China.

South-East Asia and Oceania

Sales of network equipment were weaker overall due to cautious investment in a number of markets. Investment highlights include network expansions in Bangladesh and Indonesia. Access to spectrum for 3G and 4G/LTE remains a limitation in several markets. Overall there is an increasing interest for managed services among operators in several countries.

The region includes a mix of markets focused on long-term government-sponsored fiber deployments as well as operator investment in 3G/HSPA upgrades and 4G/LTE trials. Other markets in the region are continuing to expand in 2G and mobile broadband.

Indonesian GSM and 3G operator AXIS extended its managed services contract with Ericsson. Ericsson will be responsible for AXIS’ network operations, field maintenance, support services and spare parts management in Greater Jakarta and Northern Sumatra. Indosat has commissioned Ericsson to modernize its network and launched Asia’s fastest mobile network, based on Ericsson’s 3G/ HSPA 42 Mbps.

49

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Networks

Network sales declined –1 percent to SEK 112.7 (114.0) billion. Sales were positively impacted by the acquisition of Nortel businesses. There was a negative impact from the industry-wide component shortage during the year.

In November 2009, Nortel’s CDMA and LTE business were consolidated in Networks. Nortel’s GSM business was consolidated on March 31, 2010. On June 30, 2010, the former LG-Nortel business, now named LG-Ericsson, was consolidated in Networks.

50

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Mobile broadband sales increased during the year, especially driven by demand in North America and Japan. The increased demand related to radio, backhaul and packet core. Voice-related sales, i.e. 2G radio and core, was slow in the year and could not be compensated for by the increase in mobile broadband.

The operating margin was 15 (14) percent. The improvement is due to cost reductions as well as business mix in the first half of the year with a higher proportion of network upgrades and expansions.

Sales to network operators are normally based on multi-year frame agreements after an initial tender. During the frame agreement, software, equipment, services and spare parts are called off according to price lists.

The value of the market for operator equipment was approximately USD 100 billion in 2009. Market data shows that Ericsson has a market share of approximately 40 percent in GSM/WCDMA radio base stations.

To grow market share organically Ericsson is striving to increase footprint, especially in Europe where the Company has a lower market share than elsewhere. Network modernization projects, along with the 3G rollouts in India, puts initial pressure on gross margin. However, these projects are essential parts of the Company’s strategy to build a good platform for continued long-term growth and profitability.

Ericsson has focus on operational excellence and cost efficiencies. For hardware, cost efficiencies can be gained by using more standardized components, merging platforms and using more land transportation etc. In software development and implementation, efficient programming, project execution and re-use of platforms are key to keeping costs down. Measures to secure these cost efficiencies are an element of every operation.

In 2010, Ericsson commercially launched its multi-standard radio base station RBS 6000 which is now shipping in large volumes. A number of commercial 4G/ LTE launches took place in the US and Sweden, with Ericsson as a supplier. Operators have launched 4G/LTE covering more than 140 million people, of whom 60 percent are served by Ericsson 4G/LTE equipment. The Company could thus secure early volume deliveries of 4G/LTE. These activities should give the Company competitive scale advantages.

An industry-wide component shortage hit the Company in 2010, making it difficult for the Company to meet the increased demand for mobile broadband related products. Ericsson ramped up production of its new radio base station RBS 6000 much quicker and with less quality issues than expected. To mitigate the effects of the industry-wide component shortage, internal measures were taken to re-design products and to secure a reduced degree of customized components. In the fourth quarter, the supply of components had normalized.

In the Networks segment, Ericsson competes mainly with large and well-established telecommunication equipment suppliers. The most significant competitors include Alcatel-Lucent, Huawei, Nokia Siemens Networks, Cisco, ZTE and Juniper. The Company also competes with local and regional manufacturers and providers of telecommunications equipment.

Global Services

Global Services sales increased 1 percent to SEK 80.1 (79.2) billion. Operating margin was 11 (11) percent. Global Services includes Professional Services and Network Rollout.

Professional Services consists of managed services, consulting and systems integration, customer support and education. Professional Services increased 4 percent to SEK 58.5 (56.1) billion and in local currencies 9 percent, in line with previous years’ growth pace. Managed Services increased 21 percent to SEK 21.1 (17.4) billion. The increase was primarily driven by the contract with the US-based operator Sprint, which started in September 2009. The contract value was USD 5.5 billion for seven years at the time of the announcement.

51

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Two thirds of Professional Services’ revenues are recurring, mainly managed services and customer support. Contracts are often long, five to seven years, and payments are made in advance. Consulting and systems integration deals are by nature shorter and paid after fulfillment of contract.

Network Rollout decreased -7 percent to SEK 21.6 (23.1) billion. Network rollout includes turnkey projects with a large part of third party sourcing, making it a lower-margin business.

Ericsson’s services offering covers all areas within an operator’s operational scope. Ericsson can be provided the opportunity to design, plan, build and manage a core network or operate all field operations for an operator’s business support system, service, core, transmission and access network. Most often however, operators turn to Ericsson for support in a certain part of its operation. Ericsson has three assignments where the Company is responsible for everything within an operator’s operational scope. Those agreements are with Sprint in the US, 3 in the UK and 3 in Italy. Ericsson manages networks, or parts of networks, with 450 million subscribers. If also field operations and spare parts management contracts are included, the figure is 750 million subscribers.

Over the past years, Ericsson has seen a growing interest from operators for sharing the access networks. Through this, operators can reduce cost for the so called passive equipment at a site, like rental costs for towers, power and cooling. Execution of a sharing plan requires complex integration of multi-vendor systems, which is one of Ericsson’s key competencies.

The total global telecom services market was valued at USD 239-249 billion in 2009 (see graph on next page). Roughly two thirds is operator-internal operating spending. Services handled by suppliers represented a third of the total market. Over the years 2005-2009 the total services market grew in average by about 11 percent annually.

Ericsson estimates its market share in telecom services at over 10 percent. Due to the fragmented market, Ericsson is by far the largest player. The Company has 45,000 professionals across the world. Over the years, the Company has insourced more than 20,000 employees from operators.

Services is a local business and all competitors therefore basically have the same cost structure. In order to gain synergies and cost efficiencies, global methods, processes and tools are a prerequisite. Over the past years, Ericsson has invested USD 1 billion in developing methods, processes and tools, securing efficiencies and cost advantages. As telecom is becoming more and more of a software industry, monitoring and maintenance of networks as well as upgrading of software can be done remotely. Ericsson today has four global network operations service centers in Mexico, Romania, India and China. The Company secures the operation of networks around the clock, throughout the year, for 2 billion subscribers.

In managed services, Ericsson can insource employees from the customer. In the transition period, restructuring costs are taken, for e.g. replacement of IS/IT-systems, migration of employees into new systems and premises. All this to transform operations to standardized processes, methods and tools. In this process, management’s leadership and communication skills are of utmost importance. Ericsson has a culture of putting individuals in focus, showing respect and giving employees the opportunities to develop. In the transformation phase, following the transition, scale synergies are carried through.

52

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

53

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Of operators’ internal operating expenditures a large part relates to IS/IT. With solutions for Operations Support Systems (OSS) and Business Support Systems (BSS), Ericsson targets also this IS/IT-oriented part of the market. OSS/BSS are software-based solutions, but require a lot of integration work on the customer’s site, both for IS/IT and telecom systems. Systems integration business is also important to the Business Support System’s (BSS) area within segment Multimedia.

Competition in the Global Services segment includes many of the traditional telecommunication equipment suppliers. Since a lot of business in Global Services is about moving up the value chain, the Company competes with large companies from other industry sectors, such as Accenture, HP, IBM, Oracle and India-based off-shore companies, e.g. Tata Consultancy Services and Tech Mahindra. Among competition is also a large number of smaller but specialized companies operating on a local or regional basis.

Multimedia

Multimedia sales declined –21 percent to SEK 10.5 (13.3) billion. Operating margin was –4 (8) percent. The segment showed a strong recovery in the last quarter, mainly as a result of increased operator investments in revenue management as well as continued good development for TV solutions.

In 2010, a program for return to profitability was initiated. The program includes phase-out of products, reduction of sourcing and supply costs and decoupling of software and hardware using commercial off-the-shelf hardware. Increased volumes at the end of the year resulted in a recovery in the last quarter.

54

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Operations within Multimedia are divided into three areas with their specific market drivers.

Business Support Systems is the segment’s largest market with a total value of about USD 35 billion in 2009. Within this market, the revenue management market is the largest. The Company is the market leader and more than 1.2 billion subscribers are charged and billed via Ericsson’s solutions.

The decline in Multimedia’s total sales 2010 was mainly related to revenue management. Segment Multimedia in general and revenue management in particular has a large exposure to markets such as India, Middle East and Sub-Saharan Africa where operators postponed investments mainly due to operator consolidation. Going forward, there is growth potential as operators want to modernize their business support systems to capture the full revenue potential of mobile broadband and to merge billing and charging systems into one solution.

The second largest operation in Multimedia is Television and Media Management which developed well in 2010. The compression business continues to grow. Ericsson is the leading player with a market share of 25 percent in compression and 40 percent in IPTV head-ends. The worldwide digital TV market showed strong growth, with digital TV homes expected to double in the next five years.

The third operation is Consumer and Business Applications. A key aim is to support operators in modernizing their legacy value-added services environment, by providing for example messaging systems and service delivery systems. With a market share of 40 percent in mobile positioning and more than 10 percent in service delivery platforms, Ericsson holds a leading position. The Business Communication Suite targets the enterprise market. It combines unified communication with mobility, providing business communities with a collaboration and multimedia solution.

Multimedia is mainly a software business. The solutions often require local adaptations in customers’ networks. Therefore Multimedia sales also drive sales of systems integration services.

The market for the Multimedia segment is rather fragmented. Competitors vary widely depending on the solution being offered. They include many of the traditional telecommunication equipment and IT suppliers, such as Amdocs and Comverse, as well as companies from other industries, such as Harmonic, Oracle and Thompson.

55

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Joint Ventures

Sony Ericsson

Sony Ericsson is a 50/50 joint venture between Sony Corporation and Ericsson, established in 2001. Sony Ericsson is accounted for according to the equity method.

The global handset market is believed to have increased slightly in volume to almost 1.2 billion units. Sony Ericsson’s market share in the total global handset market 2010 was approximately 4 percent in units and 6 percent in value. Sony Ericsson focuses on the smartphone segment and the Android operating system.

56

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Units shipped declined by –25 percent to 43.1 (57.1) million while the average selling price increased by 23 percent to EUR 146 (119). Sales decreased by –7 percent to EUR 6.3 (6.8) billion. Gross margin improved during the year to 29 (15) percent as benefits of cost reductions and new smartphones materialized.

Income before taxes, excluding restructuring charges, was EUR 0.2 (–0.9) billion. Income increased during the year thanks to improved gross margin and reduced operating expenses. Ericsson’s share in Sony Ericsson’s income before taxes was SEK 0.7 (–5.7) billion.

Sony Ericsson’s primary competitors include Apple, HTC, LG, Motorola, Nokia, RIM and Samsung.

ST-Ericsson

ST-Ericsson is a 50/50 joint venture between STMicroelectronics and Ericsson, which started in February, 2009. ST-Ericsson is accounted for according to the equity method. It has one of the industry’s strongest product offering in semiconductors and platforms for mobile devices. ST-Ericsson is a key supplier to top handset manufacturers. In 2010, ST-Ericsson continued its transition, merging three operations. Its focus today is to deliver new products to the market.

Sales declined –9 percent to USD 2.3 (2.5) billion. The operating loss for the year, adjusted for restructuring costs, was USD –0.4 (–0.4) billion.

ST-Ericsson is reporting in US-GAAP. Ericsson’s share in ST-Ericsson’s income before taxes, adjusted to IFRS, was SEK –1.8 (–1.8) billion. Adjustments for IFRS-compliance mainly consist of capitalization of R&D expenses for hardware development.

The Company’s net financial position was USD –82 (229) million at year-end. In the fourth quarter 2010, a short-term credit facility of USD 150 million made available on a 50:50 basis by parent companies was utilized.

During 2010, two restructuring plans of USD 345 million were finalized. The first one of USD 230 million gave full impact from third quarter and the second plan of USD 115 million was completed by year end.

57

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

ST-Ericsson’s largest competitor is Qualcomm. The market is growing in complexity as several new operating systems for handsets and other devices have been launched, e.g. Google’s Android, Microsoft’s Windows and Samsung’s Bada.

LEGAL AND TAX PROCEEDINGS

Together with most of the mobile communications industry, Ericsson has been named a defendant in two class action lawsuits in the US, in which plaintiffs allege that adverse health effects could be associated with mobile phone usage:

In Pennsylvania: In September 2008, the federal court in Pennsylvania dismissed the plaintiffs’ claims as preempted by federal law. The Third Circuit Court of Appeals subsequently affirmed this ruling. In February 2011, the Public Citizen Litigation Group filed an appeal with US Supreme Court.

In the District of Columbia: In July 2010, the District of Columbia Superior Court granted in part and denied in part the defendants’ motion to dismiss. In September 2010, the plaintiff filed a third amended complaint. In October 2010, the defendants moved to dismiss the District of Columbia case. In February, 2011, the Supreme Court for the District of Columbia dismissed with prejudice Ericsson from the case.

In April 2007, an Australian company, QPSX Developments Pty Ltd., filed a patent infringement lawsuit against Ericsson and other defendants in the US, alleging that Ericsson infringed a patent related to Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) technology. The lawsuit was stayed in August 2009 pending the resolution of a reexamination proceeding in the US Patent and Trademark Office (PTO). The stay was lifted in November 2010 after all the asserted patent claims were confirmed as valid by the PTO. The trial is scheduled for September 2011.

Swedish fiscal authorities have disallowed deductions for sales commission payments via external service companies to sales agents in certain countries. Most of the taxes have already been paid. The decision covering the fiscal year 1999 was appealed. In December 2006, the County Administrative Court in Stockholm rendered a judgment in favor of the fiscal authorities. The Administrative Court of Appeal in Stockholm affirmed the County Administrative Court’s judgment. The judgment has been appealed to the Administrative Supreme Court. For more information on risks related to litigations, see chapter Risk Factors.

58

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

In January 2011, a US company SynQor filed a patent infringement lawsuit against Ericsson Inc. in the Eastern District of Texas alleging that Ericsson infringes five U.S. patents related to bus converters. In February 2011, SynQor filed a motion for preliminary injunction seeking to prevent Ericsson from manufacturing, using, selling, and offering for sale in the U.S. and/or importing into the U.S. certain unregulated and semi-regulated bus converters and any Ericsson products that contain those bus converters. SynQor also seeks to prevent Ericsson from selling the accused bus converters to companies that in-turn sell products incorporating the bus converters in or into the U.S.

MATERIAL CONTRACTS

Material contractual obligations are outlined in Note C32 “Contractual obligations”. These are primarily related to operating leases for office and production facilities, purchase contracts for outsourced manufacturing, R&D and IT operations, and the purchase of components for the Company’s own manufacturing.

Ericsson is party to certain agreements, which include provisions that may take effect or be altered or invalidated by a change in control of the Company as a result of a public takeover offer. However, none of the agreements currently in effect would entail any material consequence to Ericsson due to a change in control of the Company.

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

In accordance with the Annual Accounts Act (1995:1554 Chapter 6, Section 6), a separate Corporate Governance Report, including an Internal Control section, has been prepared.

Continued Compliance with the Swedish Corporate Governance Code

The Company applies the Swedish Corporate Governance Code. The Company is committed to complying with best-practice corporate governance standards on a global level wherever possible. This includes continued compliance with the corporate governance provisions expressed by this Code without deviations.

An ethical business

Ericsson’s Code of Business Ethics summarizes the Group’s fundamental policies and directives governing its relationships internally, with its stakeholders and with others. It also sets out how the Group works to achieve and maintain its high standards. There have been no amendments or waivers to Ericsson’s Code of Business Ethics for any Director, member of management or other employee.

Board of Directors 2010/2011

The Annual General Meeting on April 13, 2010, re-elected Michael Treschow as Chairman of the Board and Roxanne S. Austin, Sir Peter L. Bonfield, Börje Ekholm, Ulf J. Johansson, Sverker Martin-Löf, Nancy McKinstry, Anders Nyrén, Carl-Henric Svanberg and Marcus Wallenberg as Directors of the Board. The Annual General Meeting elected Hans Vestberg and Michelangelo Volpi as new members of the Board. Anna Guldstrand, Jan Hedlund and Karin Åberg were appointed as union representatives with Pehr Claesson, Kristina Davidsson and Karin Lennartsson as deputies.

Management

Hans Vestberg was appointed President and CEO, succeeding Carl-Henric Svanberg, as of January 1, 2010. The President and CEO is supported by the Executive Leadership Team which, in addition to the President and

59

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

CEO, consists of heads of Group Functions, heads of business units, two heads of region and the Chief Brand Officer. A management system is implemented to ensure that the business is well controlled and able to fulfill the objectives of major stakeholders within established risk limits. The system also monitors internal control and compliance with applicable laws, listing requirements and governance codes.

Remuneration

Fees to the members of the Board of Directors and the remuneration of Group management as well as the 2010 guidelines for remuneration to senior management are reported in Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements – Note C29, “Information Regarding Members of the Board of Directors, the Group management and Employees”.

As of December 31, 2010, there were no loans outstanding from and no guarantees issued to or assumed by Ericsson for the benefit of any member of the Board of Directors or senior management.

All relevant information regarding remuneration can be found in chapter Remuneration Report.

The Board of Directors’ proposal for guidelines for remuneration to senior management

The Board of Directors proposes that the current guidelines for remuneration and other employment terms for the senior management (Remuneration Policy) remain unchanged for the period up to the 2012 Annual General Meeting.

Details of how Ericsson delivers on these principles and policy, including information on previously decided long-term variable remuneration that has not yet become due for payment, can be found Note C29, “Information regarding Members of the Board of Directors, the Group management and Employees”.

RISK MANAGEMENT

Risks are broadly categorized into operational and financial risks. Ericsson’s risk management is based on the following principles, which apply universally across all business activities and risk types:

• Risk management is an integrated part of the Ericsson Group Management System

• Each operational unit is accountable for owning and managing its risks according to policies, directives and process tools. Decisions are made or escalated according to defined delegation of authority. Financial risks are coordinated through Group Function Finance

• Risks are dealt with during the strategy process, the annual planning and target setting, the continuous monitoring through monthly and quarterly steering group meetings and during operational processes by transaction (customer bid/ contract, acquisition, investment and product development projects). They are subject to various controls such as decision tollgates and approvals.

A central security unit coordinates management of certain risks, such as business interruption, information security and physical security. A Crisis Management Council deals with ad hoc events of serious nature.

For information of risks that could impact the fulfillment of the targets and form the basis for mitigating activities, see the other sections of the Board of Directors’ Report, Notes C14, “Trade receivables and customer finance”, C19, “Interest-bearing liabilities”, C20, “Financial risk management and financial instruments” and chapter Risk Factors on page 167.

60

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

SOURCING AND SUPPLY

Ericsson’s hardware largely consists of electronics, such as circuit boards, radio frequency (RF) modules, antennas etc. For manufacturing, the Company purchases customized and standardized components, services etc. from several global providers as well as from numerous local and regional suppliers. Certain types of components, such as power modules and cables, are produced in-house.

The production of electronic modules and sub-assemblies is mostly outsourced to manufacturing services companies, of which the vast majority is in low-cost countries. Node production is largely done in-house and on-demand. This consists of assembly, testing of modules and integrating them into complete radio base stations, mobile switching centers etc.

Where possible Ericsson relies on alternative supply sources. When selecting a new supplier, the supplier code of conduct should be met. Variations in market prices for raw materials generally have a limited effect on total cost of goods sold.

SUSTAINABILITY AND CORPORATE RESPONSIBILITY

The Company has implemented strong social, environmental and ethical standards supporting risk management and value creation. This commitment generates positive business impacts that benefit society.

Ericsson’s approach to Sustainability and Corporate Responsibility (CR) is integrated into its core business operations and in its relationships with stakeholders. The Board of Directors considers these aspects in governance decision-making. Group level policies and directives ensure consistency across global operations.

Ericsson publishes an annual Sustainability and CR Report which provides additional information.

Minimizing risk

Responsible business practices

Ericsson supports the UN Global Compact and endorses its ten principles regarding human and labor rights, anti-corruption and environmental protection. The Ericsson Group Management System includes policies and directives that cover responsible business practices, such as the Code of Business Ethics, Code of Conduct (CoC), anti-corruption and environmental management. It is reinforced by training, workshops and monitoring, including a global assessment program run by an external assurance provider in which CR criteria represent approximately 20 percent of the total areas assessed. During 2010, Ericsson launched a new Sustainability Policy and an e-learning program on Sustainability and CR for all employees.

Supply chain

Suppliers must comply with Ericsson’s CoC. Some 150 employees, covering all regions, are trained as supplier CoC auditors and the Company performs regular audits and works with suppliers to ensure measurable and continuous improvements. Findings are followed up to ensure that lasting improvements are made. As a complement to the audits, a free web-based CoC training is now available for all suppliers in 13 languages. To effectively address the issue of conflict minerals, Ericsson participates in the Global e-Sustainability Initiative (GeSI) work group for conflict minerals.

Design for environment

Processes and controls are in place to ensure compliance with relevant product related environmental, customer and regulatory requirements. The areas covered are energy efficiency and materials management. To

61

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

better meet the rapidly changing legal requirements on materials management a new materials declarations tool was released in 2010.

Take-back

Ericsson Ecology Management and Product Take-back is a global initiative to take responsibility of products at the end of their life. More than 95 percent of decommissioned equipment is recycled, exceeding the EU Waste Electronic Electrical Equipment Directive (WEEE) stipulation of 75 percent. During 2010 more than 2,500 tonnes of e-waste were collected. This is less than 2009 due to there being a fewer number of operator change-outs of equipment. During 2010, Ericsson has continued to improve its capabilities to handle WEEE in Latin America and the Middle East as well as in production facilities in Sweden, India and China. Alignment of the process in order to comply with the Indian WEEE Directive has also begun.

Ericsson received recognition and a number of prestigious awards for its sustainability and corporate responsibility achievements. Vodafone presented Ericsson with its Corporate Responsibility supplier award.

62

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Greenpeace named Ericsson one of the best ICT companies in its Cool lT Leaderboard. Ericsson’s focus and accomplishment on sustainability and life-cycle management was awarded the InfoWorld Green Award. Gartner has also recognized Ericsson for its sustainability leadership.

Ericsson is a partner in the Ghana E-waste project. Its goal is to establish local recycling capabilities and transform informal e-waste recycling into a formal business and thereby help to alleviate poverty. This is being coordinated by the Raw Materials Group in cooperation with the Ghana Environmental Protection Agency and financed by the Nordic Development Fund.

Radio waves and health

Ericsson provides public information on radio waves and health, and supports independent research to further increase knowledge in this area. Ericsson has co-sponsored over 90 studies related to electromagnetic fields, radio waves and health since 1996. Independent expert groups and public health authorities, including the World Health Organization, have reviewed the total amount of research and consistently concluded that the balance of evidence does not demonstrate any health effects associated with radio wave exposure from either mobile phones or radio base stations.

Creating value

The environmental opportunity

Information and Communication Technology (ICT) represents about two percent of global CO₂ emissions, but can potentially offset a significant portion of the remaining 98 percent from other sectors. Ericsson takes active measures to ensure that its own carbon footprint will be continuously reduced. A carbon footprint reduction target was set in 2008, to reduce emissions relative to products sold by 40 percent over five years, from in-house activities and the life-cycle impacts of products. In 2010, Ericsson met the annual 10 percent reduction target:

• There was a slight increase in direct emissions from Ericsson’s in-house activities. Component shortages have led to an increase in shipping by air, and business travel has increased somewhat due to increased number of employees

• A 14 percent reduction was achieved in indirect emissions from products in operation per capacity, resulting in 26 percent total from 2008. This improvement was mainly due to the introduction of the radio base station RBS 6000 family. In addition, part of Ericsson’s sustainability strategy is to focus on the role that broadband can play in helping to offset global CO₂ emissions. Ericsson focused on sustainable city solutions, and has actively engaged in global climate policy, including the Guadalajara ICT Declaration and Global e-Sustainability Initiative publication “Evaluating the Carbon-Reducing Impacts of ICT”.

Meeting the millennium development goals

Mobile connectivity fuels economic growth, which is particularly vital for the billions of people living at the base of the economic pyramid—the markets of the future. Ericsson is committed to using its technology and competence to help achieve the UN Millennium Development Goals (MDGs), and customer engagement is part of its strategy to meet this aim.

63

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

In 2010, Ericsson and its partners, The Earth Institute, Columbia University and Millennium Promise, launched a global education initiative, Connect To Learn, as an extension of its commitment to the MDGs.

Ericsson response

Ericsson Response is a global employee volunteer initiative with the aim to rapidly roll out communication solutions and provide telecommunications experts to assist disaster relief operations. Ericsson Response cooperates with the UN Office for the Coordination of Humanitarian Affairs (UNOCHA), the UN World Food Programme (WFP), the UN Children’s fund (UNICEF) and other International Organizations and Non-Governmental Organizations (NGO) like the International Federation of Red Cross and Red Crescent Societies (IFRC) and Save the Children.

In 2010, support was provided to WFP and UNICEF working in Haiti, Port-au-Prince, during six months of on-site work by 19 volunteers. This is one of the longest disaster response deployments of Ericsson Response’s history. This year also marked the tenth anniversary and a decade of relief work provided by Ericsson Response.

PARENT COMPANY

The Parent Company business consists mainly of corporate management, holding company functions and internal banking activities. It also handles customer credit management, performed on a commission basis by Ericsson Credit AB. The Parent Company is the owner of a substantial part of Ericsson’s intellectual property rights. It manages the patent portfolio, including patent applications, licensing and crosslicensing of patents and defending of patents in litigations. The Parent Company has 6 (6) branch offices. In total, the Group has 68 (65) branch and representative offices.

64

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Financial information

Net sales for the year amounted to SEK 0.0 (0.3) billion and income after financial items was SEK 6.8 (8.1) billion. Exports accounted for 100 (100) percent of net sales. The Parent Company had no sales in 2010 or 2009 to subsidiaries, while 45 (45) percent of total purchases of goods and services were from such companies.

Major changes in the Parent Company’s financial position for the year included:

• Investments in LG-Ericsson of SEK 1.9 billion

• Decreased current and non-current receivables from subsidiaries of SEK 8.3 billion

• Increased other current receivables of SEK 1.6 billion

• Increased cash, cash equivalents and short-term investments of SEK 9.2 billion

• Increased current and non-current liabilities to subsidiaries of SEK 4.7 billion

• Decreased other current liabilities of SEK 0.2 billion.

At year end, cash, cash equivalents and short-term investments amounted to SEK 71.6 (62.4) billion.

Share information

As per December 31, 2010, the total number of shares was 3,273,351,735, of which 261,755,983 were Class A shares, each carrying one vote, and 3,011,595,752 Class B shares, each carrying one tenth of one vote. The two largest shareholders at year end were Investor and Industrivärden holding 19.33 and 13.80 percent respectively of the voting rights in the Parent Company.

Both classes of shares have the same rights of participation in the net assets and earnings.

In accordance with the conditions of the Long-Term Variable Remuneration Program (LTV) for Ericsson employees, 5,890,018 treasury shares were sold or distributed to employees in 2010. The quotient value of these shares was SEK 29.4 million, representing less than 1 percent of capital stock, and compensation received amounted to SEK 59.8 million. The holding of treasury stock at December 31, 2010 was 73,088,515 Class B shares. The quotient value of these shares is SEK 365.4 million, representing 2.2 percent of capital stock, and the related acquisition cost amounts to SEK 622.2 million.

Proposed disposition of earnings

The Board of Directors proposes that a dividend of SEK 2.25 (2.00) per share be paid to shareholders duly registered on the record date April 18, 2011, and that the Parent Company shall retain the remaining part of non-restricted equity.

The Class B treasury shares held by the Parent Company are not entitled to receive a dividend. Assuming that no treasury shares remain on the record date, the Board of Directors proposes that earnings be distributed as follows:

Amount to be paid to the shareholders	SEK	7,365,041,404
Amount to be retained by the Parent Company	SEK	35,608,440,926
Total non-restricted equity of the Parent Company	SEK	42,973,482,330

As a basis for its dividend proposal, the Board of Directors has made an assessment in accordance with Chapter 18, Section 4 of the Swedish Companies Act of the Parent Company’s and the Group’s need for financial

65

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

resources as well as the Parent Company’s and the Group’s liquidity, financial position in other respects and long-term ability to meet their commitments. The Group reports an equity ratio of 52 (52) percent and a net cash amount of SEK 51.3 (36.1) billion.

The Board of Directors has also considered the Parent Company’s result and financial position and the Group’s position in general. In this respect, the Board of Directors has taken into account known commitments that may have an impact on the financial positions of the Parent Company and its subsidiaries.

The proposed dividend does not limit the Group’s ability to make investments or raise funds, and it is our assessment that the proposed dividend is well-balanced considering the nature, scope and risks of the business activities as well as the capital requirements for the Parent Company and the Group.

POST-CLOSING EVENTS

On March 16, 2011, Ericsson made a statement regarding the situation in Japan following the earthquake on March 11.

The Company focuses on supporting customers in securing functionality of vital telecommunication services. Ericsson states that, as Japan is a large supplier to the global market for semiconductors and other components, it is reasonable to expect an effect on supply but it is too early to say to what extent. The situation in Japan is not expected to have material impact on Ericsson’s Q1 2011 sales.

BOARD ASSURANCE

The Board of Directors and the President declare that the consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with IFRS, as adopted by the EU, and give a fair view of the Group’s financial position and results of operations. The financial statements of the Parent Company have been prepared in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles in Sweden and give a fair view of the Parent Company’s financial position and results of operations.

The Board of Directors’ Report for the Ericsson Group and the Parent Company provides a fair view of the development of the Group’s and the Parent Company’s operations, financial position and results of operations and describes material risks and uncertainties facing the Parent Company and the companies included in the Group.

66

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

To the Shareholders of Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ)

In our opinion, the accompanying consolidated balance sheets and the related consolidated statements of income, comprehensive income, shareholders equity and cash flows present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson and its subsidiaries at December 31, 2010 and December 31, 2009, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2010, in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board and in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the European Union. Also in our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2010, based on criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. The Company’s management is responsible for these financial statements, for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, which can be found herein, under “Management’s Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting”. Our responsibility is to express opinions on these financial statements and on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting based on our integrated audits. We conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) and International Standards on Auditing. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audits to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement and whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audits of the financial statements included examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. Our audit of internal control over financial reporting included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, and testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk. Our audits also included performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (i) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (ii) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (iii) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

Stockholm, March 30, 2011

PricewaterhouseCoopers AB

67

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENTS AND STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENTS

Years ended December 31, SEK million	Notes		2010			2009			2008
Net sales		C3, C4		203,348			206,477			208,930
Cost of sales				–129,094			–136,278			–134,661
Gross income				74,254			70,199			74,269
Gross margin (%)				36.5	%		34.0	%		35.5	%
Research and development expenses				–31,558			–33,055			–33,584
Selling and administrative expenses				–27,072			–26,908			–26,974
Operating expenses				–58,630			–59,963			–60,558
Other operating income and expenses		C6		2,003			3,082			2,977
Operating income before shares in earnings of joint ventures and associated companies				17,627			13,318			16,688
Operating margin before shares in earnings of joint ventures and associated companies (%)				8.7	%		6.5	%		8.0	%
Share in earnings of joint ventures and associated companies		C12		–1,172			–7,400			–436
Operating income				16,455			5,918			16,252
Financial income		C7		1,047			1,874			3,458
Financial expenses		C7		–1,719			–1,549			–2,484
Income after financial items				15,783			6,243			17,226
Taxes		C8		–4,548			–2,116			–5,559
Net income				11,235			4,127			11,667
Net income attributable to:
Stockholders of the Parent Company				11,146			3,672			11,273
Non-controlling interest				89			455			394
Other information
Average number of shares, basic (million)		C9		3,197			3,190			3,183
Earnings per share attributable to stockholders of the Parent Company, basic (SEK)1)		C9		3.49			1.15			3.54
Earnings per share attributable to stockholders of the Parent Company, diluted (SEK)1)		C9		3.46			1.14			3.52

1) Based on Net income attributable to stockholders of the Parent Company.

68

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

Years ended December 31, SEK million	Notes		2010		2009		2008
Net income				11,235		4,127		11,667
Other comprehensive income
Actuarial gains and losses, and the effect of the asset ceiling, related to pensions		C16		3,892		–633		–4,019
Revaluation of other investments in shares and participations
Fair value remeasurement		C16		7		–2		–6
Cash Flow hedges
Gains/losses arising during the period		C16		966		665		–5,116
Reclassification adjustments for gains/losses included in profit or loss		C16		–238		3,850		1,192
Adjustments for amounts transferred to initial carrying amount of hedged items		C16		–136		–1,029		—
Changes in cumulative translation adjustments		C16		–3,259		–1,067		7,314
Share of other comprehensive income on joint ventures and associated companies		C16		–434		–259		1,253
Tax on items relating to components of Other comprehensive income		C16		–1,120		–1,040		2,330
Total other comprehensive income				–322		485		2,948
Total comprehensive income				10,913		4,612		14,615
Total Comprehensive Income attributable to:
Stockholders of the Parent Company				10,814		4,211		13,988
Non-controlling interest				99		401		627

69

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS

December 31, SEK million	Notes		2010		2009
ASSETS
Non-current assets
Intangible assets		C10
Capitalized development expenses				3,010		2,079
Goodwill				27,151		27,375
Intellectual property rights, brands and other intangible assets				16,658		18,739
Property, plant and equipment		C11, C26, C27		9,434		9,606
Financial assets
Equity in joint ventures and associated companies		C12		9,803		11,578
Other investments in shares and participations		C12		219		256
Customer finance, non-current		C12		1,281		830
Other financial assets, non-current		C12		3,079		2,577
Deferred tax assets		C8		12,737		14,327
				83,372		87,367
Current assets
Inventories		C13		29,897		22,718
Trade receivables		C14		61,127		66,410
Customer finance, current		C14		3,123		1,444
Other current receivables		C15		17,146		15,146
Short-term investments		C20		56,286		53,926
Cash and cash equivalents		C25		30,864		22,798
				198,443		182,442
TOTAL ASSETS				281,815		269,809
EQUITY AND LIABILITIES
Equity
Stockholders’ equity		C16		145,106		139,870
Non-controlling interest in equity of subsidiaries		C16		1,679		1,157
				146,785		141,027
Non-current liabilities
Post-employment benefits		C17		5,092		8,533
Provisions, non-current		C18		353		461
Deferred tax liabilities		C8		2,571		2,270
Borrowings, non-current		C19, C20		26,955		29,996
Other non-current liabilities				3,296		2,035
				38,267		43,295
Current liabilities
Provisions, current		C18		9,391		11,970
Borrowings, current		C19, C20		3,808		2,124
Trade payables		C22		24,959		18,864
Other current liabilities		C21		58,605		52,529
				96,763		85,487
TOTAL EQUITY AND LIABILITIES1)				281,815		269,809

1) Of which interest-bearing liabilities and post-employment benefits SEK 35,855 million (SEK 40,653 million in 2009).

70

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOW

January–December, SEK million	Notes		2010		2009		2008
Operating activities
Net income				11,235		4,127		11,667
Adjustments to reconcile net income to cash		C25		12,490		16,856		14,318
				23,725		20,983		25,985
Changes in operating net assets
Inventories				–7,917		5,207		–3,927
Customer finance, current and non-current				–2,125		598		549
Trade receivables				4,406		7,668		–11,434
Trade payables				5,964		–3,522		4,794
Provisions and post-employment benefits				–2,739		–2,950		3,830
Other operating assets and liabilities, net				5,269		–3,508		4,203
				2,858		3,493		–1,985
Cash flow from operating activities				26,583		24,476		24,000
Investing activities
Investments in property, plant and equipment		C11		–3,686		–4,006		–4,133
Sales of property, plant and equipment				124		534		1,373
Acquisitions of subsidiaries and other operations		C25, C26		–3,286		–19,321		–74
Divestments of subsidiaries and other operations		C25, C26		454		1,239		1,910
Product development		C10		–1,644		–1,443		–1,409
Other investing activities				–1,487		2,606		944
Short-term investments				–3,016		–17,071		–7,155
Cash flow from investing activities				–12,541		–37,462		–8,544
Cash flow before financing activities				14,042		–12,986		15,456
Financing activities
Proceeds from issuance of borrowings				2,580		14,153		5,245
Repayment of borrowings				–1,449		–9,804		–4,216
Sale of own stock and options exercised				51		69		3
Dividends paid				–6,677		–6,318		–8,240
Other financing activities				–175		199		—
Cash flow from financing activities				–5,670		–1,701		–7,208
Effect of exchange rate changes on cash				–306		–328		1,255
Net change in cash				8,066		–15,015		9,503
Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of period				22,798		37,813		28,310
Cash and cash equivalents, end of period		C25		30,864		22,798		37,813

71

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN EQUITY

	Notes		Capital stock		Additional paid in capital		Revaluation of other investments in shares and participations		Cash flow hedges		Cumulative translation adjustments		Retained earnings		Stockholders’ equity		Non-controlling interest (NCI)		Total equity
January 1, 2010				16,367		24,731		–4		78		663		98,035		139,870		1,157		141,027
Total comprehensive income		C16		—		—		4		440		–3,808		14,178		10,814		99		10,913
Transactions with owners
Stock issue				—		—		—		—		—		—		—		—		—
Sale of own shares				—		—		—		—		—		52		52		—		52
Stock Purchase Plans				—		—		—		—		—		762		762		—		762
Dividends paid				—		—		—		—		—		–6,391		–6,391		–286		–6,677
Business combinations				—		—		—		—		—		—		—		708		708
December 31, 2010				16,367		24,731		—		518		–3,145		106,636		145,106		1,679		146,785
January 1, 2009				16,232		24,731		–1		–2,356		2,124		100,093		140,823		1,261		142,084
Total comprehensive income		C16		—		—		–3		2,434		–1,461		3,241		4,211		401		4,612
Transactions with owners
Stock issue				135		—		—		—		—		—		135		—		135
Sale of own shares				—		—		—		—		—		75		75		—		75
Repurchase of own shares				—		—		—		—		—		–135		–135		—		–135
Stock Purchase and Stock Option Plans				—		—		—		—		—		658		658		—		658
Dividends paid				—		—		—		—		—		–5,897		–5,897		–421		–6,318
Business combinations				—		—		—		—		—		—		—		–84		–84
December 31, 2009				16,367		24,731		–4		78		663		98,035		139,870		1,157		141,027
January 1, 2008				16,132		24,731		5		307		–6,345		99,282		134,112		940		135,052
Total comprehensive income		C16		—		—		–6		–2,663		8,469		8,188		13,988		627		14,615
Transactions with owners
Stock issue				100		—		—		—		—		—		100		—		100
Sale of own shares				—		—		—		—		—		88		88		—		88
Repurchase of own shares				—		—		—		—		—		–100		–100		—		–100
Stock Purchase and Stock Option Plans				—		—		—		—		—		589		589		—		589
Dividends paid				—		—		—		—		—		–7,954		–7,954		–286		–8,240
Business combinations				—		—		—		—		—		—		—		–20		–20
December 31, 2008				16,232		24,731		–1		–2,356		2,124		100,093		140,823		1,261		142,084

72

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

CONTENTS

C1	SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES	73
C2	CRITICAL ACCOUNTING ESTIMATES AND JUDGMENTS	91
C3	SEGMENT INFORMATION	95
C4	NET SALES	102
C5	EXPENSES BY NATURE	102
C6	OTHER OPERATING INCOME AND EXPENSES	103
C7	FINANCIAL INCOME AND EXPENSES	103
C8	TAXES	104
C9	EARNINGS PER SHARE	107
C10	INTANGIBLE ASSETS	107
C11	PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT	110
C12	FINANCIAL ASSETS, NON-CURRENT	112
C13	INVENTORIES	114
C14	TRADE RECEIVABLES AND CUSTOMER FINANCE	115
C15	OTHER CURRENT RECEIVABLES	118
C16	EQUITY AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME	119
C17	POST-EMPLOYMENT BENEFITS	124
C18	PROVISIONS	131
C19	INTEREST-BEARING LIABILITIES	132
C20	FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT AND FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS	133
C21	OTHER CURRENT LIABILITIES	142
C22	TRADE PAYABLES	142
C23	ASSETS PLEDGED AS COLLATERAL	143
C24	CONTINGENT LIABILITIES	143
C25	STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS	143
C26	BUSINESS COMBINATIONS	145
C27	LEASING	149
C28	TAX ASSESSMENT VALUES IN SWEDEN	150
C29	INFORMATION REGARDING MEMBERS OF THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS, THE GROUP MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEES	151
C30	RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS	162
C31	FEES TO AUDITORS	165
C32	CONTRACTUAL OBLIGATIONS	166
C33	EVENTS AFTER THE BALANCE SHEET DATE	166

C1    SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES

The consolidated financial statements comprise Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson, the Parent Company, and its subsidiaries (“the Company”) and the Company’s interests in joint ventures and associated companies. The Parent Company is domiciled in Sweden at Torshamnsgatan 23, SE-164 83 Stockholm.

The consolidated financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2010, have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as endorsed by the EU and RFR 1 “Additional rules for Group Accounting”, related interpretations issued by the Swedish Financial Reporting Board (Rådet för finansiell rapportering), and the Swedish Annual Accounts Act. For the financial reporting of 2010, the Company has applied IFRS as issued by the IASB (IFRS effective as per December 31, 2010) and

73

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

without any early application. There is no difference between IFRS effective as per December 31, 2010, and IFRS as endorsed by the EU, nor is RFR 1 related interpretations issued by the Swedish Financial Reporting Board (Rådet för Finansiell Rapportering) or the Swedish Annual Accounts Act in conflict with IFRS.

The financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors on February 21, 2011. The balance sheets and income statements are subject to approval by the annual meeting of shareholders.

New standards, amendments of standards and interpretations, effective as from January 1, 2010, changing presentation or disclosure:

• IFRS 3 Business Combinations (revised with prospective application) The revised standard continues to apply the acquisition method to business combinations, with some significant changes. For example, the definition of a business and a business combination has been expanded, all payments to purchase a business are to be recorded at fair value at the acquisition date, with contingent cash payments classified as debt subsequently re-measured through the income statement. There is a choice on an acquisition-by-acquisition basis to measure the non-controlling interest in the acquiree either at fair value or at the non-controlling interest’s proportionate share of the acquiree’s net assets. All acquisition related costs shall be expensed as incurred.

• IAS 27 Consolidated and separate financial statements (revised with prospective application). The revised standard requires the effects of all transactions with non-controlling interests to be recorded in equity if there is no change in control and these transactions will no longer result in goodwill or gains or losses. The standard also specifies the accounting when control is lost. Any remaining interest in the entity is re-measured to fair value, and a gain or loss is recognized in income statement.

The following new or amended standards and interpretations have also been adopted:

• IFRIC 17, Distributions of Non-Cash Assets to Owners (Issued November 27, 2008)

• IFRS 2, amendment, Group Cash-settled Share-based Payment Transactions (issued June 18, 2009)

• Improvements to IFRSs (Issued April 16, 2009).

None of the new or amended standards and interpretations has had any significant impact on the financial result or position of the Company. However, the impact on business combination accounting due to the revised IFRS 3 Business Combinations is dependent on type and size of any future arrangement involving a business combination.

For information on “New standards and interpretations not yet adopted” please see page 90.

Changes in financial reporting structure

Change in segments

As of January 1, 2010, Ericsson reports the following segments: Networks, Global Services, Multimedia, Sony Ericsson and ST-Ericsson.

The only change compared to previous years is that Network Rollout is now included in Global Services instead of Networks. All other segments are unchanged. With this change the external reporting is aligned with the new internal reporting structure.

74

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Segments as of January 1, 2010:

• Networks

• Global Services

• Of which Professional Services

• Of which Managed Services

• Of which Network Rollout

• Multimedia

• Sony Ericsson

• ST-Ericsson

Change in geographical break down

As of January 1, 2010, the geographical reporting structure is changed. Instead of five geographical areas, ten regions are reported, mirroring the new internal geographical organization. A part called “Other” is also reported, consisting of business not reported in the geographical structure, e.g. embedded modules, cables, power modules as well as intellectual property rights and licenses.

Regions as of January 1, 2010:

• North America

• Latin America

• Northern Europe and Central Asia

• Western and Central Europe

• Mediterranean

• Middle East

• Sub-Saharan Africa

• India

• China and Northeast Asia

• South East Asia and Oceania

• Other

In 2008 and 2009 Ericsson reported top 15 countries in sales. As of January 1, 2010, top five countries are reported.

Basis of presentation

The financial statements are presented in millions of Swedish Krona (SEK). They are prepared on a historical cost basis, except for certain financial assets and liabilities that are stated at fair value: derivative financial instruments, financial instruments held for trading, financial instruments classified as available-for-sale and plan assets related to defined benefit pension plans.

75

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Basis of consolidation

The consolidated financial statements are prepared in accordance with the purchase method. Accordingly, consolidated stockholders’ equity includes equity in subsidiaries, joint ventures and associated companies earned only after their acquisition.

Subsidiaries are all companies in which Ericsson has an ownership interest, directly or indirectly, including effective potential voting rights, has the power to govern the financial and operating policies generally associated with ownership of more than one half of the voting rights or in which Ericsson by agreement has control. The financial statements of subsidiaries are included in the consolidated financial statements from the date that control commences until the date that control ceases.

Intra -group balances and any unrealized income and expense arising from intra-group transactions are fully eliminated in preparing the consolidated financial statements. Unrealized losses are eliminated in the same way as unrealized gains, but only to the extent that there is no evidence of impairment.

Business combinations

Business combinations from January 1, 2010

At the acquisition of a business, the cost of the acquisition, being the purchase price, is measured as the fair value of the assets given, and liabilities incurred or assumed at the date of exchange, including any cost related to contingent consideration. Transaction costs attributable to the acquisition are expensed as incurred. The acquisition cost is allocated to acquired assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities based upon appraisals made, including assets and liabilities that were not recognized on the acquired entity’s balance sheet, for example intangible assets such as customer relations, brands, patents and financial liabilities. Goodwill arises when the purchase price exceeds the fair value of recognizable acquired net assets. Final amounts are established within one year after the transaction date at the latest.

In case there is a put option for non-controlling interest in a subsidiary a corresponding financial liability is recognized.

Business combinations before January 1, 2010

At the acquisition of a business, the cost of the acquisition, being the purchase price, was measured as the fair value of assets acquired, and liabilities incurred or assumed at the date of exchange, plus costs directly attributable to the acquisition. The acquisition cost was allocated to acquired assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities based upon appraisals made, including assets that were not recognized on the acquired entity’s balance sheet, for example intangible assets such as customer relations, brands and patents. Goodwill arose when the purchase price exceeded the fair value of recognizable acquired net assets. Final amounts had to be established within one year after the transaction date.

Non-controlling interest

Acquisitions from January 1, 2010

The Company treats transactions with non-controlling interests as transactions with equity owners of the Company. For purchases from non-controlling interests, the difference between any consideration paid and the relevant share acquired of the carrying value of net assets of the subsidiary is recorded in equity. Gains or losses on disposals to non-controlling interests are also recorded in equity.

76

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

When the Company ceases to have control or significant influence, any retained interest in the entity is remeasured to its fair value, with the change in carrying amount recognized in profit or loss. The fair value is the initial carrying amount for the purposes of subsequently accounting for the retained interest in an associate, joint venture or financial asset. In addition, any amounts previously recognized in other comprehensive income in respect of that entity are accounted for as if the Company had directly disposed of the related assets or liabilities. This may mean that amounts previously recognized in other comprehensive income are reclassified to profit or loss.

At acquisition, there is a choice on an acquisition-by-acquisition basis to measure the non-controlling interest in the acquiree either at fair value or at the non-controlling interest’s proportionate share of the acquiree’s net assets.

Acquisitions before January 1, 2010

The Company treated transactions with non-controlling interests (formerly minority interests) as transactions with external parties. Disposals of minority interests were recognized as gains and losses in the income statement. Purchases from non-controlling interests resulted in goodwill if there were differences between any consideration paid and the relevant share acquired of the carrying value of net assets of the subsidiary. The non-controlling interest in the acquiree was measured at the non-controlling interests proportionate share of the acquiree’s net assets.

Joint ventures and associated companies

Investments in joint ventures and associated companies, i.e. where voting stock interest, including effective potential voting rights, is at least 20 percent but not more than 50 percent, or where a corresponding influence is obtained through agreement, are accounted for in accordance with the equity method. Under the equity method, the investment in an associate is initially recognized at cost and the carrying amount is increased or decreased to recognize the investor’s share of the profit or loss of the investee after the date of acquisition.

Ericsson’s share of income before taxes is reported in item “Share in earnings of joint ventures and associated companies”, included in Operating Income. This is due to that these interests are held for operating rather than investing or financial purposes. Ericsson’s share of income taxes related to joint ventures and associated companies is reported under the line item Taxes in the income statement.

Unrealized gains on transactions between the Company and its associated companies and joint ventures are eliminated to the extent of the Company’s interest in these entities. Unrealized losses are also eliminated unless the transaction provides evidence of an impairment of the asset transferred.

Shares in earnings of joint ventures and associated companies included in consolidated equity which are undistributed are reported in Retained earnings in the balance sheet.

Impairment testing as well as recognition or reversal of impairment of investments in each joint venture is performed in the same manner as for intangible assets other than goodwill. The entire carrying amount of each investment, including goodwill, is tested as a single asset. See also description under “Intangible assets other than goodwill” below.

If the ownership interest in an associate is reduced but significant influence is retained, only a proportionate share of the amounts previously recognized in other comprehensive income are reclassified to profit or loss where appropriate.

77

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Foreign currency remeasurement and translation

Items included in the financial statements of each entity of the Company are measured using the currency of the primary economic environment in which the entity operates (‘the functional currency’). The consolidated financial statements are presented in Swedish Krona (SEK), which is the Parent Company’s functional and presentation currency.

Transactions and balances

Foreign currency transactions are translated into the functional currency using the exchange rates prevailing at the dates of the transactions. Foreign exchange gains and losses resulting from the settlement of such transactions and from the translation at period-end exchange rates of monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are recognized in the income statement, unless deferred in Other Comprehensive Income (OCI) under the hedge accounting practices as described below.

Changes in the fair value of monetary securities denominated in foreign currency classified as available-for-sale are analyzed between translation differences resulting from changes in the amortized cost of the security and other changes in the carrying amount of the security. Translation differences related to changes in the amortized cost are recognized in profit or loss, and other changes in the carrying amount are recognized in OCI.

Translation differences on non-monetary financial assets and liabilities are reported as part of the fair value gain or loss.

Group companies

The results and financial position of all the group entities that have a functional currency different from the presentation currency are translated into the presentation currency as follows:

• assets and liabilities for each balance sheet presented are translated at the closing rate at the date of that balance sheet;

• income and expenses for each income statement are translated at average exchange rates; and

• all resulting net exchange differences are recognized as a separate component of OCI.

On consolidation, exchange differences arising from the translation of the net investment in foreign operations, and of borrowings and other currency instruments designated as hedges of such investments, are accounted for in OCI. When a foreign operation is partially disposed of or sold, exchange differences that were recorded in OCI are recognized in the income statement as part of the gain or loss on sale.

Goodwill and fair value adjustments arising on the acquisition of a foreign entity are treated as assets and liabilities of the foreign entity and translated at the closing rate.

There is no significant impact due to a currency of a hyperinflationary economy.

Statement of cash flows

The statement of cash flow is prepared in accordance with the indirect method. Cash flows in foreign subsidiaries are translated at the average exchange rate during the period. Payments for subsidiaries acquired or divested are reported as cash flow from investing activities, net of cash and cash equivalents acquired or disposed of, respectively.

78

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Cash and cash equivalents consist of cash, bank, and short-term investments that are highly liquid monetary financial instruments with a remaining maturity of three months or less at the date of acquisition.

Revenue recognition

The Company offers a comprehensive portfolio of telecommunication and data communication systems, multimedia solutions and professional services, covering a range of technologies.

The contracts are of four main types:

• delivery-type.

• contracts for various types of services, for example multi-year managed services contracts.

• license agreements for the use of the Company’s technology or intellectual property rights, not being a part of another product.

• construction-type.

The majority of the Company’s products and services are sold under delivery-type contracts including multiple elements, such as base stations, base station controllers, mobile switching centers, routers, microwave transmission links, various software products and related installation and integration services. Such contract elements generally have individual item prices in agreed price lists per customer.

Sales are recorded net of value added taxes, goods returned, trade discounts and rebates. Revenue is recognized with reference to all significant contractual terms when the product or service has been delivered, when the revenue amount is fixed or determinable, and when collection is reasonably assured. Specific contractual performance and acceptance criteria may impact the timing and amounts of revenue recognized.

The profitability of contracts is periodically assessed, and provisions for any estimated losses are made immediately when losses are probable.

For sales between consolidated companies, associated companies, joint ventures and segments, the Company applies arm’s length pricing.

Definitions of contract types and related more specific revenue recognition criteria

Different revenue recognition methods, based on either IAS 18 “Revenue” or IAS 11 “Construction contracts”, are applied based on the solutions provided to customers, the nature and sophistication of the technology involved and the contract conditions in each case.

The contract types that are accounted for in accordance with IAS 18 are:

• Delivery-type contracts, i.e. contracts for delivery of a product or a combination of products to form a whole or a part of a network as well as delivery of stand-alone products. Medium-size and large delivery type contracts generally include multiple elements. Such elements are normally standardized types of equipment or software as well as services, such as network rollout.

Revenue is recognized when risks and rewards have been transferred to the customer, normally stipulated in the contractual terms of trade. For delivery-type contracts with multiple elements, revenue, including the impact of any discount or rebate, is allocated to each element based on relative fair values. If there are undelivered elements essential to the functionality of delivered elements, the Company defers recognition of revenue until all elements essential to the functionality have been delivered.

79

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

• Contracts for services include various types of services such as: training, consulting, engineering, installation, multi-year managed services and hosting. Revenue is generally recognized when the services have been provided. Revenue for managed service contracts and other services contracts covering longer periods is recognized pro rata over the contract period.

• Contracts generating license fees from third parties for the use of the Company’s technology or intellectual property rights. Revenue is normally recognized based on sales of products sold to the customer/licensee.

The contract type that is accounted for in accordance with IAS 11 is:

• Construction-type contracts. In general, a construction-type contract is a contract where the Company supplies to a customer, a complete network, which to a large extent is based upon new technology or includes major components which are specifically designed for the customer. Revenues from construction-type contracts are recognized according to stage of completion, generally using the milestone output method.

Earnings per share

Basic earnings per share are calculated by dividing net income attributable to stockholders of the Parent Company by the weighted average number of shares outstanding (total number of shares less treasury stock) during the year.

Diluted earnings per share are calculated by dividing net income attributable to stockholders of the Parent Company, when appropriate adjusted by the sum of the weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding and dilutive potential ordinary shares. Potential ordinary shares are treated as dilutive when, and only when, their conversion to ordinary shares would decrease earnings per share.

Stock options and rights to matching shares are considered dilutive when the actual fulfillment of any performance conditions as of the reporting date would give a right to ordinary shares. Furthermore, stock options are considered dilutive only when the exercise price is lower than the period’s average share price.

Financial assets

Financial assets are recognized when the Company becomes a party to the contractual provisions of the instrument. Regular purchases and sales of financial assets are recognized on the settlement date.

Financial assets are derecognized when the rights to receive cash flows from the investments have expired or have been transferred and the Company has transferred substantially all risks and rewards of ownership. Separate assets or liabilities are recognized if any rights and obligations are created or retained in the transfer.

The Company classifies its financial assets in the following categories: at fair value through profit or loss, loans and receivables, and available for sale. The classification depends on the purpose for which the financial assets were acquired. Management determines the classification of its financial assets at initial recognition.

Financial assets are initially recognized at fair value plus transaction costs for all financial assets not carried at fair value through profit or loss. Financial assets carried at fair value through profit or loss are initially recognized at fair value, and transaction costs are expensed in the income statement.

80

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

The fair values of quoted financial investments and derivatives are based on quoted market prices or rates. If official rates or market prices are not available, fair values are calculated by discounting the expected future cash flows at prevailing interest rates. Valuations of FX options and Interest Rate Guarantees (IRG) are made by using a Black-Scholes formula. Inputs to the valuations are market prices for implied volatility, foreign exchange and interest rates.

Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss

Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss are financial assets held for trading. A financial asset is classified in this category if acquired principally for the purpose of selling or repurchasing in the near term.

Derivatives are classified as held for trading, unless they are designated as hedges. Assets in this category are classified as current assets.

Gains or losses arising from changes in the fair values of the “financial assets at fair value through profit or loss”-category (excluding derivatives) are presented in the income statement within Financial income in the period in which they arise. Derivatives are presented in the income statement either as cost of sales, other operating income, financial income or financial expense, depending on the intent with the transaction.

Loans and receivables

Receivables are subsequently measured at amortized cost using the effective interest rate method, less allowances for impairment charges. Trade receivables include amounts due from customers. The balance represents amounts billed to customer as well as amounts where risk and rewards have been transferred to the customer but the invoice has not yet been issued.

Collectability of the receivables is assessed for purposes of initial revenue recognition.

Available-for-sale financial assets

Available-for-sale financial assets are non-derivatives that are either designated in this category or not classified in any of the other categories. They are included in non-current assets unless management intends to dispose of the investment within 12 months of the balance sheet date.

Dividends on available-for-sale equity instruments are recognized in the income statement as part of financial income when the Company’s right to receive payments is established.

Changes in the fair value of monetary securities denominated in a foreign currency and classified as available-for-sale are analyzed between translation differences resulting from changes in amortized cost of the security and other changes in the carrying amount of the security. The translation differences on monetary securities are recognized in profit or loss; translation differences on non-monetary securities are recognized in OCI. Changes in the fair value of monetary and non-monetary securities classified as available-for-sale are recognized in OCI. When securities classified as available-for-sale are sold or impaired, the accumulated fair value adjustments previously recognized in OCI are included in the income statement.

Impairment

At each balance sheet date, the Company assesses whether there is objective evidence that a financial asset or a group of financial assets is impaired. In the case of equity securities classified as available-for-sale, a significant or prolonged decline in the fair value of the security below its cost is considered as an evidence that

81

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

the security is impaired. If any such evidence exists for available-for-sale financial assets, the cumulative loss—measured as the difference between the acquisition cost and the current fair value, less any impairment loss on that financial asset previously recognized in profit or loss—is removed from OCI and recognized in the income statement. Impairment losses recognized in the income statement on equity instruments are not reversed through the income statement.

An assessment of impairment of receivables is performed when there is objective evidence that the Company will not be able to collect all amounts due according to the original terms of the receivable. Significant financial difficulties of the debtor, probability that the debtor will enter bankruptcy or financial reorganization, and default or delinquency in payments are considered indicators that the trade receivable is impaired. The amount of the allowance is the difference between the asset’s carrying amount and the present value of estimated future cash flows, discounted at the original effective interest rate. The carrying amount of the asset is reduced through the use of an allowance account, and the amount of the loss is recognized in the income statement within selling expenses. When a trade receivable is finally established as uncollectible, it is written off against the allowance account for trade receivables. Subsequent recoveries of amounts previously written off are credited to selling expenses in the income statement.

Financial Liabilities

Financial liabilities are recognized when the Company becomes bound to the contractual obligations of the instrument.

Financial liabilities are derecognized when they are extinguished, i.e. when the obligation specified in the contract is discharged, cancelled or expires.

Borrowings

Borrowings are initially recognized at fair value, net of transaction costs incurred. Borrowings are subsequently stated at amortized cost; any difference between the proceeds (net of transaction costs) and the redemption value is recognized in the income statement over the period of the borrowings using the effective interest method.

Borrowings are classified as current liabilities unless the Company has an unconditional right to defer settlement of the liability for at least 12 months after the balance sheet date.

Trade payables

Trade payables are recognized initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortized cost using the effective interest method.

Derivatives at fair value through profit or loss

Certain derivative instruments do not qualify for hedge accounting and are accounted for at fair value through profit or loss. Changes in the fair value of these derivative instruments that do not qualify for hedge accounting are recognized immediately in the income statement either as cost of sales, other operating income, financial income or financial expense, depending on the intent of the transaction.

82

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Derivative financial instruments and hedging activities

Derivatives are initially recognized at fair value at trade date and subsequently re-measured at fair value. The method of recognizing the resulting gain or loss depends on whether the derivative is designated as a hedging instrument, and if so, the nature of the item being hedged. The Company designates certain derivatives as either:

a) fair value hedge: a hedge of the fair value of recognized liabilities;

b) cash flow hedge: a hedge of a particular risk associated with a highly probable forecast transaction; or

c) net investment hedge: a hedge of a net investment in a foreign operation.

At the inception of the hedge, the Company documents the relationship between hedging instruments and hedged items, as well as its risk management objectives and strategy for undertaking various hedging transactions. The Company also documents its assessment, both at hedge inception and on an ongoing basis, of whether the derivatives that are used in hedging transactions are highly effective in offsetting changes in fair values or cash flows of the hedged items.

The fair values of various derivative instruments used for hedging purposes are disclosed in Note C20, “Financial Risk Management and Financial Instruments”. Movements in the hedging reserve in OCI are shown in Note C16, “Equity and OCI”.

The fair value of a hedging derivative is classified as a non-current asset or liability when the remaining maturity of the hedged item is more than 12 months, and as a current asset or liability when the remaining maturity of the hedged item is less than 12 months. Trading derivatives are classified as current assets or liabilities.

Fair value hedges

Changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as fair value hedges are recorded in the income statement, together with any changes in the fair value of the hedged asset or liability that are attributable to the hedged risk. The Company only applies fair value hedge accounting for hedging fixed interest risk on borrowings. Both gains and losses relating to the interest rate swaps hedging fixed rate borrowings and the changes in the fair value of the hedged fixed rate borrowings attributable to interest rate risk are recognized in the income statement within Financial expenses. If the hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, the adjustment to the carrying amount of a hedged item for which the effective interest method is used is amortized to profit or loss over the remaining period to maturity.

Cash flow hedges

The effective portion of changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as cash flow hedges is recognized in OCI. The gain or loss relating to an ineffective portion is recognized immediately in the income statement within financial income or expense.

Amounts deferred in OCI are recycled in the income statement in the periods when the hedged item affects profit or loss (for example, when the forecast sale that is hedged takes place), either in Net Sales or Cost of Sales. When the forecast transaction that is hedged results in the recognition of a non-financial asset (for example, inventory or fixed assets), the gains and losses previously deferred in OCI are transferred from OCI and included in the initial measurement of the cost of the asset. The deferred amounts are ultimately recognized in Cost of

83

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Sales in case of inventory or in Depreciation in case of fixed assets. When a hedging instrument expires or is sold, or when a hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, any cumulative gain or loss which at that time remains in OCI is recognized in the income statement when the forecast transaction is ultimately recognized. When a forecast transaction is no longer expected to occur, the cumulative gain or loss that was reported in OCI is immediately transferred to the income statement within financial income or expense.

Net investment hedges

Hedges of net investments in foreign operations are accounted for similarly to cash flow hedges. Any gain or loss on the hedging instrument relating to the effective portion of the hedge is recognized in OCI. A gain or loss relating to an ineffective portion is recognized immediately in the income statement within financial income or expense. Gains and losses deferred in OCI are included in the income statement when the foreign operation is partially disposed of or sold.

Financial guarantees

Financial guarantee contracts are initially recognized at fair value (i.e. usually the fee received). Subsequently, these contracts are measured at the higher of:

• the amount determined as the best estimate of the net expenditure required to settle the obligation according to the guarantee contract, and

• the recognized contractual fee less cumulative amortization when amortized over the guarantee period, using the straight-line-method.

The best estimate of the net expenditure comprises future fees and cash flows from subrogation rights.

Inventories

Inventories are measured at the lower of cost or net realizable value on a first-in, first-out (FIFO) basis.

Risks of obsolescence have been measured by estimating market value based on future customer demand and changes in technology and customer acceptance of new products.

Intangible assets

Intangible assets other than goodwill

Intangible assets other than goodwill comprise capitalized development expenses and acquired intangible assets, such as patents, customer relations, trademarks and software. At initial recognition, capitalized development expenses are stated at cost while acquired intangible assets related to business combinations are stated at fair value. Subsequent to initial recognition, both capitalized development expenses and acquired intangible assets are stated at initially recognized amounts less accumulated amortization and any impairment. Amortization and any impairment losses are included in Research and development expenses, mainly for capitalized development expenses and patents, in Selling and administrative expenses, mainly for customer relations and brands, and in Cost of sales.

Costs incurred for development of products to be sold, leased or otherwise marketed or intended for internal use are capitalized as from when technological and economical feasibility has been established until the product is available for sale or use. These capitalized expenses are mainly generated internally and include direct labor and directly attributable overhead. Amortization of capitalized development expenses begins when the product is available for general release. Amortization is made on a product or platform basis according to the straight-line

84

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

method over periods not exceeding five years. Research and development expenses directly related to orders from customers are accounted for as a part of Cost of sales. Other research and development expenses are charged to income as incurred.

Amortization of acquired intangible assets, such as patents, customer relations, brands and software, is made according to the straight-line method over their estimated useful lives, not exceeding ten years. However, if the economic benefit related to an item of intangible assets is front-end loaded the amortization method reflects this. Thus, the amortization for such an item is amortized on a digressive curve basis and the asset value decreases with higher amounts in the beginning of the useful life compared to the end.

The Company has not recognized any intangible assets with indefinite useful life other than goodwill.

Impairment tests are performed whenever there is an indication of possible impairment. However, intangible assets not yet available for use are tested annually. An impairment loss is recognized if the carrying amount of an asset or its cash-generating unit exceeds its recoverable amount. The recoverable amount is the higher of the value in use and the fair value less costs to sell. In assessing value in use, the estimated future cash flows after tax are discounted to their present value using an after-tax discount rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the asset. Application of after tax amounts in calculation, both in relation to cash flows and discount rate is applied due to that available models for calculating discount rate include a tax component. The after tax discounting, applied by the Company is not materially different from a discounting based on before-tax future cash flows and before-tax discount rates, as required by IFRS.

Corporate assets have been allocated to cash-generating units in relation to each unit’s proportion of total net sales. The amount related to corporate assets is not significant. Impairment losses recognized in prior periods are assessed at each reporting date for any indications that the loss has decreased or no longer exists. An impairment loss is reversed if there has been a change in the estimates used to determine the recoverable amounts and if the recoverable amount is higher than the carrying value. An impairment loss is reversed only to the extent that the asset’s carrying amount after reversal does not exceed the carrying amount, net of amortization, which would have been reported if no impairment loss had been recognized.

Goodwill

As from the acquisition date, goodwill acquired in a business combination is allocated to each cash-generating unit (CGU) of the Company expected to benefit from the synergies of the combination. Ericsson’s five operating segments have been identified as CGUs. Goodwill is assigned to four of them, Networks, Professional Services, Multimedia and ST-Ericsson.

An annual impairment test for the CGUs to which goodwill has been allocated is performed in the fourth quarter, or when there is an indication of impairment. Impairment testing as well as recognition of impairment of goodwill is performed in the same manner as for intangible assets other than goodwill, see description under “Intangible assets other than goodwill” above. An impairment loss in respect of goodwill is not reversed.

Additional disclosure is required in relation to goodwill impairment testing, see Note C2, “Critical Accounting Estimates and Judgments” below and in Note C10, “Intangible Assets”.

85

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Property, plant and equipment

Property, plant and equipment are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation and any impairment losses.

Depreciation is charged to income, generally on a straight-line basis, over the estimated useful life of each component of an item of property, plant and equipment, including buildings. Estimated useful lives are, in general, 25–50 years for real estate and 3–10 years for machinery and equipment. Depreciation and any impairment charges are included in Cost of sales, Research and development or Selling and administrative expenses.

The Company recognizes in the carrying amount of an item of property, plant and equipment the cost of replacing a component and derecognizes the residual value of the replaced component.

Impairment testing as well as recognition or reversal of impairment of property, plant and equipment is performed in the same manner as for intangible assets other than goodwill, see description under “Intangible assets other than goodwill” above.

Gains and losses on disposals are determined by comparing the proceeds less cost to sell with the carrying amount and are recognized within Other operating income and expenses in the income statement.

Leasing

Leasing when the company is the lessee

Leases on terms in which the Company assumes substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership are classified as finance leases. Upon initial recognition, the leased asset is measured at an amount equal to the lower of its fair value and the present value of the minimum lease payments. Subsequent to initial recognition, the asset is accounted for in accordance with the accounting policy applicable to that type of asset, although the depreciation period must not exceed the lease term.

Other leases are operating leases, and the leased assets under such contracts are not recognized on the balance sheet. Costs under operating leases are recognized in the income statement on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease. Lease incentives received are recognized as an integral part of the total lease expense, over the term of the lease.

Leasing when the company is the lessor

Leasing contracts with the Company as lessor are classified as finance leases when the majority of risks and rewards are transferred to the lessee, and otherwise as operating leases. Under a finance lease, a receivable is recognized at an amount equal to the net investment in the lease and revenue is recognized in accordance with the revenue recognition principles.

Under operating leases the equipment is recorded as property, plant and equipment and revenue as well as depreciation is recognized on a straight-line basis over the lease term.

Income taxes

Income taxes in the consolidated financial statements include both current and deferred taxes. Income taxes are reported in the income statement unless the underlying item is reported directly in equity or OCI. For those items, the related income tax is also reported directly in equity or OCI. A current tax liability or asset is recognized for the estimated taxes payable or refundable for the current year or prior years.

86

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Deferred tax is recognized for temporary differences between the book values of assets and liabilities and their tax values and for tax loss carry forwards. A deferred tax asset is recognized only to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profits will be available against which the deductible temporary differences and tax loss carry forwards can be utilized. Deferred tax is not recognized for the following temporary differences: goodwill not deductible for tax purposes, for the initial recognition of assets or liabilities that affect neither accounting nor taxable profit, and for differences related to investments in subsidiaries when It is probable that the temporary difference will not reverse in the foreseeable future.

Deferred tax is measured at the tax rate that is expected to be applied to the temporary differences when they reverse, based on the tax laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the reporting date. An adjustment of deferred tax asset/liability balances due to a change in the tax rate is recognized in the income statement, unless it relates to a temporary difference earlier recognized directly in equity or OCI, in which case the adjustment is also recognized in equity or OCI.

The measurement of deferred tax assets involves judgment regarding the deductibility of costs not yet subject to taxation and estimates regarding sufficient future taxable income to enable utilization of unused tax losses in different tax jurisdictions. All deferred tax assets are subject to annual review of probable utilization. The largest amounts of tax loss carry forwards relate to Sweden, with indefinite period of utilization.

Provisions

Provisions are made when there are legal or constructive obligations as a result of past events and when it is probable that an outflow of resources will be required to settle the obligations and the amounts can be reliably estimated. When the effect of the time value of money is material, discounting is made of estimated outflows. However, the actual outflows as a result of the obligations may differ from such estimates.

The provisions are mainly related to warranty commitments, restructuring, customer projects and other obligations, such as unresolved income tax and value added tax issues, claims or obligations as a result of patent infringement and other litigations, supplier claims and customer finance guarantees.

Product warranty commitments consider probabilities of all material quality issues based on historical performance for established products and expected performance for new products, estimates of repair cost per unit, and volumes sold still under warranty up to the reporting date.

A restructuring obligation is considered to have arisen when the Company has a detailed formal plan for the restructuring (approved by management), which has been communicated in such a way that a valid expectation has been raised among those affected.

Project related provisions include estimated losses on onerous contracts, contractual penalties and undertakings. For losses on customer contracts, a provision equal to the total estimated loss is recorded when a loss from a contract is anticipated and possible to estimate reliably. These contract loss estimates include any probable penalties to a customer under a loss contract.

Other provisions include provisions for unresolved tax issues, litigations, supplier claims, customer finance and other provisions. The Company provides for estimated future settlements related to patent infringements based on the probable outcome of each infringement. The ultimate outcome or actual cost of settling an individual infringement may vary from the Company’s estimate.

87

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

The Company estimates the outcome of any potential patent infringement made known to the Company through assertion and through the Company’s own monitoring of patent-related cases in the relevant legal systems. To the extent that the Company makes the judgment that an identified potential infringement will more likely than not result in an outflow of resources, the Company records a provision based on the Company’s best estimate of the expenditure required to settle with the counterpart.

In the ordinary course of business, the Company is subject to proceedings, lawsuits and other unresolved claims, including proceedings under laws and government regulations and other matters. These matters are often resolved over a long period of time. The Company regularly assesses the likelihood of any adverse judgments in or outcomes of these matters, as well as potential ranges of possible losses. Provisions are recognized when it is probable that an obligation has arisen and the amount can be reasonably estimated based on a detailed analysis of each individual issue.

Certain present obligations are not recognized as provisions as it is not probable that an economic outflow will be required to settle the obligation or the amount of the obligation cannot be measured with sufficient reliability. Such obligations are reported as contingent liabilities. For further detailed information, see Note C24, “Contingent liabilities”.

Post-employment benefits

Pensions and other post-employment benefits are classified as either defined contribution plans or defined benefit plans. Under a defined contribution plan, the Company’s only obligation is to pay a fixed amount to a separate entity (a pension trust fund) with no obligation to pay further contributions if the fund does not hold sufficient assets to pay all employee benefits. The related actuarial and investment risks fall on the employee. The expenditures for defined contribution plans are recognized as expenses during the period when the employee provides service. Under a defined benefit plan, it is the Company’s obligation to provide agreed benefits to current and former employees. The related actuarial and investment risks fall on the Company.

The present value of the defined benefit obligations for current and former employees is calculated using the Projected Unit Credit Method. The discount rate for each country is determined by reference to market yields on high-quality corporate bonds that have maturity dates approximating the terms of the Company’s obligations. In countries where there is no deep market in such bonds, the market yields on government bonds are used. The calculations are based upon actuarial assumptions, assessed on a quarterly basis, and are as a minimum prepared annually. Actuarial assumptions are the Company’s best estimate of the variables that determine the cost of providing the benefits. When using actuarial assumptions, it is possible that the actual results will differ from the estimated results or that the actuarial assumptions will change from one period to another. These differences are reported as actuarial gains and losses. They are for example caused by unexpectedly high or low rates of employee turnover, changed life expectancy, salary changes, changes in the discount rate and differences between actual and expected return on plan assets. Actuarial gains and losses are recognized in OCI in the period in which they occur. The Company’s net liability for each defined benefit plan consists of the present value of pension commitments less the fair value of plan assets and is recognized net on the balance sheet. When the result is a net benefit to the Company, the recognized asset is limited to the total of any cumulative past service cost and the present value of any future refunds from the plan or reductions in future contributions to the plan.

The net of return on plan assets and interest on pension liabilities is reported as financial income or expense, while the current service cost and any other items in the annual pension cost are reported as operating income or expense.

Payroll taxes related to actuarial gains and losses are included in determining actuarial gains and losses.

88

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Share-based compensation to employees and the Board of Directors

Share-based compensation is related to remuneration to all employees, including key management personnel and the Board of Directors.

Under IFRS, a company shall recognize compensation costs for share-based compensation programs based on a measure of the value to the company of services received under the plans.

This value is based on the fair value of, for example free shares at grant date, measured as stock price as per each investment date. The value at grant date is charged to the income statement as any other remuneration over the service period. For example, value at grant date is 90. Given the normal service period of three years within Ericsson, 30 are charged per year during the service period.

The amount charged to the income statement is reversed in equity each time of the income statement charge.

The reason for this accounting principle of IFRS is that compensation cost is a cost with no direct cash flow impact. The purpose of share-based accounting according to IFRS (IFRS 2) is to present an impact of share based programs, being part of the total remuneration, in the income statement.

Compensation to employees

Stock purchase plans

For stock purchase plans, compensation costs are recognized during the vesting period, based on the fair value of the Ericsson share at the employee’s investment date. The fair value is based upon the share price at investment date, adjusted for the fact that no dividends will be received on matching shares prior to matching and other features that are non-vesting conditions. The employee pays a price equal to the share price at investment date for the investment shares. The investment date is considered as the grant date. In the balance sheet, the corresponding amounts are accounted for as equity. Vesting conditions are non-market based and affect the number of shares that Ericsson will match. Other features of a share-based payment are not vesting conditions. These features would need to be included in the grant date fair value for transactions with employees and others providing similar services. In the period when an employee takes a refund of previously made contributions (and stops making further contributions) all remaining compensation expense is recognized. Non-vesting conditions would not impact the number of awards expected to vest or valuation thereof subsequent to grant date. When calculating the compensation costs for shares under performance-based matching programs, the Parent Company at each reporting date assesses the probability that the performance targets are met. Compensation expenses are based on estimates of the number of shares that will match at the end of the vesting period. When shares are matched, social security charges are to be paid in certain countries on the value of the employee benefit. The employee benefit is generally based on the market value of the shares at the matching date. During the vesting period, estimated amounts for such social security charges are accrued.

Compensation to the board of directors

During 2008, the Parent Company introduced a share-based compensation program as a part of the remuneration to the Board of Directors. The program gives non-employed Directors elected by the General Meeting of Shareholders a right to receive part of their remuneration as a future payment of an amount which corresponds to the market value of a share of class B in the Parent Company at the time of payment, as further disclosed in Note C29, “Information Regarding Members of the Board of Directors, the Group Management and Employees”. The cost for cash settlements is measured and recognized based on the estimated costs for the program on a pro rata basis during the service period, being one year. The estimated costs are remeasured during and at the end of the service period.

89

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Segment reporting

An operating segment is a component of a company whose operating results are regularly reviewed by the Company’s chief operating decision maker, (CODM), to make decisions about resources to be allocated to the segment and assess its performance. Within the Company, the Group Management Team is defined as the CODM function.

The segment presentation, as per each segment is based on the accounting policies as disclosed in this note. The arm’s length principle is applied in transactions between the segments.

The Company’s segment disclosure about geographical areas is based on in which country transfer of risks and rewards occur.

Borrowing costs

The Company capitalizes borrowing costs in relation to qualifying assets, for the Company normally being internally generated intangible assets as capitalized development expenses. All other borrowing costs are expensed as incurred.

Government grants

Government grants are recognized when there is a reasonable assurance of compliance with conditions attached to the grants and that the grants will be received.

For the Company, government grants are linked to performance of research or development work or to capital expenditures that are subsidized as governmental stimulus to employment or investments in a certain country or region. Government grants linked to research and development are normally deducted in reporting the related expense, whereas grants related to assets are accounted for deducting the grant when establishing the acquisition cost of the asset.

New standards and interpretations not yet adopted

A number of issued new standards, amendments to standards and interpretations are not yet effective for the year ended December 31, 2010, and have not been applied in preparing these consolidated financial statements:

Below is a list of standards/interpretations that have been issued, except for amendments related to IFRS 1, ‘First time adoption of International Financial Reporting Standards’ and are effective for the periods starting as from January 1, 2011.

• Amendment to IAS 32, ‘Financial instruments: Presentation—Classification of rights issues’

The IASB amended IAS 32 to allow rights, options or warrants to acquire a fixed number of the entity’s own equity instruments for a fixed amount of any currency to be classified as equity instruments provided the entity offers the rights, options or warrants pro rata to all of its existing owners of the same class of its own non-derivative equity instruments.

• IFRIC 19, ‘Extinguishing financial liabilities with equity instruments’

Clarifies the requirements of IFRSs when an entity renegotiates the terms of a financial liability with its creditor and the creditor agrees to accept the entity’s shares or other equity instruments to settle the financial liability fully or partially.

90

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

• IAS 24, ‘Related party disclosures’ (revised 2009)

Amends the definition of a related party and modifies certain related party disclosure requirements for government-related entities, associated companies and joint ventures.

• Amendments to IFRS 7

Amends disclosures in relation to transfers of financial assets.

• Amendment to IFRIC 14, IAS 19—‘The limit on a defined benefit asset, minimum funding requirements and their interaction’

Removes unintended consequences arising from the treatment of prepayments where there is a minimum funding requirement. This results in prepayments of contributions in certain circumstances being recognized as an asset rather than an expense.

• IFRS 9, ‘Financial instruments’

IFRS 9 is the first standard issued as part of a wider project to replace IAS 39. IFRS 9 retains but simplifies the mixed measurement model and establishes two primary measurement categories for financial assets: amortized cost and fair value. The basis of classification depends on the entity’s business model and the contractual cash flow characteristics of the financial asset. The guidance in IAS 39 on impairment of financial assets and hedge accounting continues to apply.

• Improvements to IFRSs 2010.

The amendments are generally applicable for annual periods beginning at January 1, 2011, except for Amendments to IFRS 7 that is applicable as from January 1, 2012, and IFRS 9 that is applicable as from January 1, 2013. The EU has not endorsed Amendments to IFRS 7, IFRS 9 or Improvements to IFRSs.

None of the amendments effective as from January 1, 2011, are expected to have a significant impact on the Company’s financial result or position. The impact of amendments to IFRS 7 and IFRS 9 have not yet been evaluated.

C2    CRITICAL ACCOUNTING ESTIMATES AND JUDGMENTS

The preparation of financial statements and application of accounting standards often involve management’s judgment and the use of estimates and assumptions deemed to be reasonable at the time they are made. However, other results may be derived with different judgments or using different assumptions or estimates, and events may occur that could require a material adjustment to the carrying amount of the asset or liability affected. Following are the accounting policies subject to such judgments and the key sources of estimation uncertainty that the Company believes could have the most significant impact on the reported results and financial position.

The information in this note is grouped as per:

• Key sources of estimation uncertainty.

• Judgments management has made in the process of applying the Company’s accounting policies.

Revenue recognition

Key sources of estimation uncertainty

Estimates are necessary in evaluation of contractual performance and estimated total contract costs for assessing whether any loss provisions are to be made or if customers will reach conditional purchase volumes triggering contractual discounts to be given.

91

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Judgments made in relation to accounting policies applied

Parts of the Company’s sales are generated from large and complex customer contracts. Managerial judgment is applied regarding, among other aspects, conformance with acceptance criteria and if transfer of risks and rewards to the buyer has taken place to determine if revenue and costs should be recognized in the current period, degree of completion and the customer credit standing to assess whether payment is likely or not to justify revenue recognition.

Trade and customer finance receivables

Key sources of estimation uncertainty

The Company monitors the financial stability of its customers and the environment in which they operate to make estimates regarding the likelihood that the individual receivables will be paid. Total allowances for estimated losses as of December 31, 2010, were SEK 1.1 (1.7) billion or 1.6 (2.4) percent of gross trade and customer finance receivables.

Credit risks for outstanding customer finance credits are regularly assessed as well, and allowances are recorded for estimated losses.

Inventory valuation

Key sources of estimation uncertainty

Inventories are valued at the lower of cost and net realizable value. Estimates are required in relation to forecasted sales volumes and inventory balances. In situations where excess inventory balances are identified, estimates of net realizable values for the excess volumes are made. Inventory allowances for estimated losses as of December 31, 2010, amounted to SEK 3.1 (3.0) billion or 10 (12) percent of gross inventory.

Investments in joint ventures and associated companies

Key sources of estimation uncertainty

Impairment testing is performed after initial recognition whenever there is an indication of impairment.

At December 31, 2010, the amount of joint ventures and associated companies amounted to SEK 9.8 (11.6) billion.

Deferred taxes

Key sources of estimation uncertainty

Deferred tax assets are recognized for temporary differences between the carrying amounts for financial reporting purposes of assets and liabilities and the amounts used for taxation purposes and for tax loss carry-forwards. The largest amounts of tax loss carry-forwards are reported in Sweden, with an indefinite period of utilization (i.e. with no expiry date). The valuation of tax loss carry-forwards, deferred tax assets and the Company’s ability to utilize tax losses is based upon management’s estimates of future taxable income in different tax jurisdictions. For further detailed information, please refer to Note C8, “Taxes”.

At December 31, 2010, the value of deferred tax assets amounted to SEK 12.7 (14.3) billion. The deferred tax assets related to loss carryforwards are reported as non-current assets.

92

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Accounting for income-, value added- and other taxes

Key sources of estimation uncertainty

Accounting for these items is based upon evaluation of income-, value added- and other tax rules in all jurisdictions where we perform activities. The total complexity of rules related to taxes and the accounting for these require management’s involvement in judgments regarding classification of transactions and in estimates of probable outcomes of claimed deductions and/or disputes.

Capitalized development expenses

Key sources of estimation uncertainty

Impairment testing is performed after initial recognition whenever there is an indication of impairment. Intangible assets not yet available for use are tested annually. The impairment testing amounts are based on estimates of future cash flows for the respective products.

At December 31, 2010, the capitalized development expenses amounted to SEK 3.0 (2.1) billion. An impairment charge of SEK 0 (0.2) billion was recognized as a part of the restructuring program. Under this program decisions were taken to phase out certain products. The impairment charge relates to balances for these products.

Judgments made in relation to accounting policies applied

Development costs that meet IFRS’ intangible asset recognition criteria for products that will be sold, leased or otherwise marketed as well as those intended for internal use are capitalized. The starting point for capitalization is based upon management’s judgment that technological and economical feasibility is confirmed, usually when a product development project has reached a defined milestone according to the Company’s established project management model. Capitalization ceases and amortization of capitalized development costs begin when the product is available for general release.

The definition of amortization periods and the evaluation of impairment indicators also require management’s judgment.

Acquired intellectual property rights and other intangible assets, including goodwill

Key sources of estimation uncertainty

At initial recognition, future cash flows are estimated, to ensure that the initial carrying values do not exceed the expected discounted cash flows for the items of this type of assets. After initial recognition impairment testing is performed whenever there is an indication of impairment, except for goodwill for which impairment testing is performed at least once per year. Negative deviations in actual cash flows compared to estimated cash flows as well as new estimates that indicate lower future cash flows might result in recognition of impairment charges. One source of uncertainty related to future cash flows is long-term movements in exchange rates.

The market capitalization of the Company as per year-end 2010 well exceeded the value of the Company’s net assets.

For further discussion on goodwill, see Note C1, “Significant Accounting Policies” and C10, “Intangible Assets”. Estimates related to acquired intangible assets are based on similar assumptions and risks as for goodwill.

93

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

At December 31, 2010, the amount of acquired intellectual property rights and other intangible assets amounted to SEK 43.8 (46.1) billion, including goodwill of SEK 27.2 (27.4) billion. The Company has also recognized goodwill in ST-Ericsson of SEK 1.4 (1.3) billion, as disclosed in note C12, “Financial Assets, Non-Current”. An impairment charge of SEK 0.9 (4.3) billion was recognized as a part of the restructuring program. Under this program decisions were taken to phase out certain products. The impairment charge relates to balances for these products.

Judgments made in relation to accounting policies applied

At initial recognition and subsequent remeasurement, management judgments are made, both for key assumptions and regarding impairment indicators. In the purchase price allocation made for each acquisition, the purchase price shall be assigned to the identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities based on fair values for these assets. Any remaining excess value is reported as goodwill. This allocation requires management judgment as well as the definition of cash generating units for impairment testing purposes. Other judgments might result in significantly different results and financial position in the future.

Provisions

Warranty provisions

Key sources of estimation uncertainty

Provisions for product warranties are based on current volumes of products sold still under warranty and on historic quality rates for mature products as well as estimates and assumptions on future quality rates for new products and estimates of costs to remedy the various qualitative issues that might occur. Total provisions for product warranties as of December 31, 2010, amounted to SEK 2.5 (2.5) billion.

Provisions other than warranty provisions

Key sources of estimation uncertainty

Provisions, other than warranty provisions, mainly comprise amounts related to contractual obligations and penalties to customers and estimated losses on customer contracts, restructuring, risks associated with patent and other litigations, supplier or subcontractor claims and/or disputes, as well as provisions for unresolved income tax and value added tax issues. The estimates related to the amounts of provisions for penalties, claims or losses receive special attention from the management. At December 31, 2010, provisions other than warranty commitments amounted to SEK 7.3 (9.9) billion. For further detailed information, see Note C18, “Provisions”.

Judgments made in relation to accounting policies applied

Whether a present obligation is probable or not requires judgment. The nature and type of risks for these provisions differ and management’s judgment is applied regarding the nature and extent of obligations in deciding if an outflow of resources is probable or not.

Pension and other post-employment benefits

Key sources of estimation uncertainty

Accounting for the costs of defined benefit pension plans and other applicable post-employment benefits is based on actuarial valuations, relying on key estimates for discount rates, expected return on plan assets, future salary increases, employee turnover rates and mortality tables. The discount rate assumptions are based on rates

94

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

for high-quality fixed-income investments with durations as close as possible to the Company’s pension plans. Expected returns on plan assets consider long-term historical returns, allocation of assets and estimates of future long-term investment returns. At December 31, 2010, defined benefit obligations for pensions and other post-employment benefits amounted to SEK 28.7 (30.7) billion and fair value of plan assets to SEK 25.4 (23.2) billion. For more information on estimates and assumptions, see Note C17, “Post-Employment Benefits”.

Financial instruments, hedge accounting and foreign exchange risks

Key sources of estimation uncertainty

Foreign exchange risk in highly probable sales and purchases in future periods are hedged using foreign exchange derivative instruments designated as cash-flow hedges. Forecasts are based on estimations of future transactions, a forecast is therefore per definition uncertain to some degree.

Judgments made in relation to accounting policies applied

Establishing highly probable sales and purchases volumes involve gathering and evaluating sales and purchases estimates for future periods as well as analyzing actual outcome versus estimates on a regular basis in order to fulfill effectiveness testing requirements for hedge accounting. Changes in estimates of sales and purchases might result in that hedge accounting is discontinued.

For further information regarding risks in financial instruments, see Note C20, “Financial Risk Management and Financial Instruments”.

C3    SEGMENT INFORMATION

Operating segments

When determining our operating segments, we have looked at which markets and what type of customers our products and services aim to attract as well as what distribution channels they are sold through. We have also considered commonality regarding technology, research and development. To best reflect our business focus and to facilitate comparability with peers, we report five operating segments:

• Networks

• Professional Services

• Multimedia

• Sony Ericsson

• ST-Ericsson

Networks delivers products and solutions for mobile and fixed broadband access, core networks, and transmission. The offering includes:

• Radio access solutions that interconnect with devices such as mobile phones, notebooks and PCs, supporting all major standardized mobile technologies.

• Fixed access solutions for both fiber and copper, such as GPON and DSL, increase the customers’ ability to modernize fixed networks to enable IP-based services with high bandwidth.

• IP core network solutions (switching, routing and control) include softswitches, IP infrastructure for edge- and core routing, IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) and media gateways.

95

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

• Transmission/backhaul; microwave (MINI-LINK) and optical transmission solutions for mobile and fixed networks.

• Network management tools; supporting operators’ management of existing networks as well as introduction of new network architectures, technologies and services. This includes tools for configuration, performance monitoring, security management, inventory management and software upgrades.

Global Services delivers managed services, consulting and systems integration, customer support and network rollout services. The offering includes:

• Managed services comprise solutions for network design and planning, network operations (the management of day-to-day operations of customer networks), field operations and site maintenance and shared solutions such as hosting of platforms and applications.

• Consulting and Systems integration; technology and operational consulting, integration of multi-vendor equipment, design and integration of new solutions and handling of technology change and transformation programs, learning services and optimization services ensuring the best possible user experience. Industry-specific solutions for vertical industries are also included.

• Customer support; staff world-wide provide around-the-clock support and advice to ensure network uptime and performance.

• Network rollout services, deploying new networks, modernizing and expanding existing networks.

Multimedia provides enablers and applications for operators. The offering includes:

• TV solutions; a suite of open, standards-based digital TV solutions in HD, 3G or standard quality (real-time and on-demand), combined with interactive services. The offering includes IPTV solutions, video compression, on-demand solutions, content management systems, advertising and interactive TV applications for operators, service providers, advertisers and content providers.

• Consumer and business applications; solutions for the consumer include service delivery platforms, Rich Communication Suite (RCS), messaging, a social media portal, and location-based services. Enterprise market solutions include converged business communication solutions such as Ericsson Business Communication Suite (BCS), Brokering solutions facilitate payment and distribution of content.

• Business Support Systems includes Revenue Management (Pre-paid, Post-paid, convergent Charging and Billing), Customer Care, Provisioning, Device Management and Analytics.

Sony Ericsson, the joint venture delivers innovative and feature-rich mobile phones and accessories. The JV forms an essential part of our end-to-end capability for mobile multimedia services.

ST-Ericsson, the joint venture develops semiconductors and wireless platforms for GSM, EDGE, WCDMA, HSPA, TD-SCDMA and LTE to handset manufacturers, as well as to mobile operators and device manufacturers.

Sony Ericsson’s and ST-Ericsson’s results are reported according to the equity method under “Share in earnings of joint ventures and associated companies” in the income statement.

96

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Unallocated

Some revenues, costs, assets and liabilities are not identified as part of any operating segment and are therefore not allocated. Examples of such items are costs for corporate staff, IT costs and general marketing costs.

Regions

Our Regions are our primary sales channel. The Company operates world-wide and reports its operations divided into ten regions. Other includes sales of for example embedded modules, cables, power modules as well as licensing and IPR.

• North America

• Latin America

• Northern Europe & Central Asia

• Western and Central Europe

• Mediterranean

• Middle East

• Sub-Saharan Africa

• India

• China & North East Asia

• South East Asia & Oceania

• Other

Major customers

The Company does not have any customer for which revenues from transactions have exceeded 10 percent of the Company’s total revenues for the years 2010, 2009 or 2008.

We derive most of our sales from large, multi-year agreements with a limited number of significant customers. Out of a customer base of approximately 400, mainly network operators, the 10 largest customers account for 46 (42) percent of our net sales. Our largest customer accounted for approximately 8 (5) percent of sales in 2010. For more information, see Risk Factors, “Market, Technology and Business Risks”.

97

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Operating segments

2010	Networks			Global Services			Multi- media			Sony Ericsson			ST- Ericsson			Total Segments			Unallocated		Eliminations1)		Group
Segment sales		111,459			80,117			10,504			60,118			13,116			275,314			—		–73,234		202,080
Inter-segment sales		1,249			6			13			60			3,403			4,731			—		–3,463		1,268
Net sales		112,708			80,123			10,517			60,178			16,519			280,045			—		–76,697		203,348
Operating income		12,481			6,513			–643			1,523			–3,527			16,347			–805		913		16,455
Operating margin (%)		11	%		8	%		–6	%		3	%		–21	%		6	%		—		—		8	%
Financial income																								1,047
Financial expenses																								–1,719
Income after financial items																								15,783
Taxes																								–4,548
Net income																								11,235
Other segment items
Share in earnings of joint ventures and associated companies		–64			–17			–2			664			–1,763			–1,182			10		—		–1,172
Amortization		–4,554			–303			–806			–25			–930			–6,618			—		955		–5,663
Depreciation		–2,600			–555			–144			–731			–1,022			–5,052			—		1,753		–3,299
Impairment losses		–675			–276			–52			—			–61			–1,064			—		61		–1,003
Reversals of impairment losses		9			2			1			—			—			12			—		—		12
Restructuring expenses		–3,915			–2,675			–207			–402			–536			–7,735			–17		469		–7,283
Gains/losses from divestments		154			53			92			—			—			299			59		—		358

1) Sony Ericsson and ST-Ericsson are accounted for in accordance with the equity method. The difference between what is reported to the CODM and externally is eliminated in the Eliminations column.

98

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Regions

2010	Net sales		Non-current assets3)
North America		49,473		7,251
Of which the United States		46,104		6,977
Latin America		17,882		1,998
Northern Europe & Central Asia1)2)		12,171		42,112
Western & Central Europe2)		19,868		8,629
Mediterranean		22,628		1,523
Middle East		15,099		84
Sub-Saharan Africa		9,194		51
India		8,626		262
China & North East Asia		25,965		3,795
Of which China		14,633		1,013
South East Asia & Oceania		14,902		351
Other1)2)		7,540		—
Total		203,348		66,056
1) Of which Sweden		4,237		41,683
2) Of which EU		43,707		46,563

3) Total non-current assets excluding financial instruments, deferred tax assets, and post-employment benefit assets.

For employee information, see Note C29, “Information Regarding Members of the Board of Directors, the Group Management and Employees”.

Operating segments

2009	Networks1)			Global Services1)			Multi- media			Sony Ericsson			ST- Ericsson			Total Segments			Unallo- cated		Elimi- nations2)		Group
Segment sales		113,339			79,038			12,996			71,984			13,535			290,892			—		–85,519		205,373
Inter-segment sales		746			82			276			164			5,731			6,999			—		–5,895		1,104
Net sales		114,085			79,120			13,272			72,148			19,266			297,891			—		–91,414		206,477
Operating income		7,598	3)		6,271	4)		655			–10,820			–2,615			1,089			–855		5,684		5,918
Operating margin (%)		7	%		8	%		5	%		–15	%		–14	%		0	%		—		—		3	%
Financial income																								1,874
Financial expenses																								–1,549
Income after financial items																								6,243
Taxes																								–2,116
Net income																								4,127
Other segment items
Share in earnings of joint ventures and associated companies		37			33			–1			–5,693			–1,762			–7,386			–14		—		–7,400
Amortization		–2,673			–574			–910			–165			–828			–5,150			—		941		–4,209
Depreciation		–2,768			–627			–155			–1,124			–997			–5,671			—		2,121		–3,550
Impairment losses		–4,333	3)		—			–80			—			–46			–4,459			—		46		–4,413
Reversals of impairment losses		38			9			2			—			—			49			—		—		49
Restructuring expenses		–8,358	3)		–2,434			–385			–1,754			–890			–13,821			–82		1,322		–12,581
Gains/losses from divestments		10			777	4)		41			—			47			875			–32		—		843

99

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

1) Amounts for 2009 and 2008 have been restated to be consistent with the segment allocation method applied as from 2010.

2) Sony Ericsson and ST-Ericsson are accounted for in accordance with the equity method. The difference between what is reported to the CODM and externally is eliminated in the Eliminations column.

3) Including impairment losses related to restructuring activities of SEK 4.3 billion.

4) In Q2 2009, the TEMS business was divested, resulting in a capital gain of SEK 0.8 billion.

Regions

2009	Net sales		Non-current assets3)
North America		23,912		8,359
Of which the United States		21,538		8,100
Latin America		20,025		2,066
Northern Europe & Central Asia1)2)		11,981		44,091
Western & Central Europe2)		22,459		11,713
Mediterranean		25,161		1,352
Middle East		18,250		115
Sub-Saharan Africa		15,341		49
India		15,262		225
China & North East Asia		25,960		988
Of which China		18,455		903
South East Asia & Oceania		20,849		417
Other1)2)		7,277		—
Total		206,477		69,375
1)Of which Sweden		4,096		43,574
2)Of which EU		49,313		49,158

3) Total non-current assets excluding financial instruments, deferred tax assets, and post-employment benefit assets.

For employee information, see Note C29, “Information Regarding Members of the Board of Directors, the Group Management and Employees”.

100

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Operating segments

2008	Networks1)			Global Services1)			Multimedia2)			Sony Ericsson			Total Segments			Unallocated		Elimi- nations3)		Group
Segment sales		120,504			70,467			12,614			108,492			312,077			—		–108,492		203,585
Inter-segment sales		16			41			5,288			261			5,606			—		–261		5,345
Net sales		120,520			70,508			17,902			108,753			317,683			—		–108,753		208,930
Operating income		12,540			4,951			–118			–1,094			16,279			–618		591		16,252
Operating margin (%)		10	%		7	%		–1	%		0	%		5	%		—		—		8	%
Financial income																					3,458
Financial expenses																					–2,484
Income after financial items																					17,226
Taxes																					–5,559
Net income																					11,667
Other Segment Items
Share in earnings of joint ventures and associated companies		–25			91			1			–503			–436			—		—		–436
Amortization		–3,210			–368			–1,429			–53			–5,060			1		53		–5,006
Depreciation		–2,347			–532			–228			–1,138			–4,245			–1		1,138		–3,108
Impairment losses		–547			—			–19			—			–566			—		—		–566
Reversals of impairment losses		6			1			—			—			7			—		—		7
Restructuring expenses		–4,870			–1,533			–337			–1,692			–8,432			–20		846		–7,606
Gains/losses from divestments		9			–16			992			—			985			113		—		1,098

1) Amounts for 2009 and 2008 have been restated to be consistent with the segment allocation method applied as from 2010.

2) Multimedia figures include the Mobile Platforms business which from 2009 is part of ST-Ericsson.

3) Sony Ericsson is accounted for in accordance with the equity method. The difference between what is reported to the CODM and externally is eliminated in the Eliminations column.

Regions

2008	Net sales		Non-current assets3)
North America		15,538		8,917
Of which the United States		14,132		8,829
Latin America		22,897		1,676
Northern Europe & Central Asia1) 2)		14,854		47,037
Western & Central Europe2)		21,502		5,537
Mediterranean		29,559		1,499
Middle East		17,844		70
Sub-Saharan Africa		15,339		54
India		15,204		156
China & North East Asia		22,081		816
Of which China		15,068		688
South East Asia & Oceania		20,978		464
Other1) 2)		13,134		—
Total		208,930		66,226
1) Of which Sweden		8,876		46,458
2) Of which EU		57,601		52,945

3) Total non-current assets excluding financial instruments, deferred tax assets, and post-employment benefit assets.

101

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

For employee information, see Note C29, “Information Regarding Members of the Board of Directors, the Group Management and Employees”.

C4    NET SALES

Net sales

	2010		2009		2008
Sales of products and network rollout services		140,222		145,873		150,846
Of which:
Delivery-type contracts		140,156		144,908		148,358
Construction-type contracts		66		965		2,488
Professional Services sales		58,529		56,123		48,978
License revenues1)		4,597		4,481		9,106
Net sales		203,348		206,477		208,930
Export sales from Sweden		100,070		94,829		109,254

1) The ST-Ericsson joint venture was formed in February 2009, figures for 2008 include licenses revenues from Mobile Platforms.

C5    EXPENSES BY NATURE

Expenses by nature

	2010		2009		2008
Goods and services		130,725		124,627		138,298
Amortization and depreciation		8,962		7,759		8,114
Impairments and obsolescence allowances, net of reversals		966		5,637		2,680
Employee remunerations		57,183		54,877		51,297
Interest expenses		1,719		1,549		2,484
Taxes		4,548		2,116		5,559
Expenses incurred		204,103		196,565		208,432
Less:
Inventory changes1)		8,465		–4,784		3,761
Additions to Capitalized development		1,647		1,443		1,409
Expenses charged to the Income
Statement		193,991		199,906		203,262

1) The inventory changes are based on changes of gross inventory values prior to obsolescence allowances.

The cost reduction program, initiated in first quarter 2009, has been completed by the second quarter 2010. Total restructuring charges in 2010 were SEK 6.8 (11.3) b. Cost and capital efficiency remain high on the company agenda and efficiency work will continue also in 2011. This primarily relates to service delivery, product development and administration. Restructuring charges are included in the expenses presented above.

102

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Restructuring charges by function

	2010		2009		2008
Cost of sales		3,354		4,180		2,540
R&D expenses		1,682		6,045		2,648
Selling and administrative expenses		1,778		1,034		1,572
Total restructuring charges		6,814		11,259		6,760

C6    OTHER OPERATING INCOME AND EXPENSES

Other operating income and expenses

	2010		2009		2008
Gains on sales of intangible assets and PP&E		301		193		302
Losses on sales of intangible assets and PP&E		–422		–126		–190
Gains on sales of investments and operations		577		962		1,236
Losses on sales of investments and operations		–219		–119		–138
Capital gains/losses, net		237		910		1,210
Other operating revenues		1,766		2,172		1,767
Total other operating income and expenses		2,003		3,082		2,977

C7    FINANCIAL INCOME AND EXPENSES

Financial income and expenses

	2010				2009				2008
	Financial income		Financial expenses		Financial income		Financial expenses		Financial income		Financial expenses
Contractual interest on financial assets		811		—		1,287		—		2,938		—
Of which on financial assets at fair value through profit or loss		304		—		814		—		2,282		—
Contractual interest on financial liabilities		—		–1,315		—		–1,616		—		–2,023
Of which on financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss		—		—		—		—		—		—
Net gain/loss on:
Instruments at fair value through profit or loss1)		295		–206		635		155		322		280
Of which included in fair value hedge relationships		—		151		—		155		—		–32
Available for sale		—		—		—		—		—		—
Loans and receivables		–68		—		–53		—		191		—
Liabilities at amortized cost		—		–4		—		–2		—		–656
Other financial income and expenses		9		–194		5		–86		7		–85
Total		1,047		–1,719		1,874		–1,549		3,458		–2,484

1) Excluding net gain from operating assets and liabilities, SEK 1,528 million (net gain of SEK 2,247 million in 2009, net loss of SEK 4,234 million in 2008), reported as Cost of Sales.

103

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

C8    TAXES

The Company’s expense for 2010 was SEK 4,548 (2,116) million or 28.8 (33.9) percent of the income after financial items. The tax rate may vary between years depending on business and geography mix. The tax rate excluding joint ventures and associated companies was 25.7 (25.7) percent mainly due to a lower tax rate on losses made by the joint venture.

Income taxes recognized in the income statement

	2010		2009		2008
Current income taxes for the year		–4,635		–4,605		–5,574
Current income taxes related to previous years		–35		441		167
Deferred tax income/expense (–)		307		661		–297
Sub total		–4,363		–3,503		–5,704
Share of taxes in joint ventures and associated companies		–185		1,387		145
Taxes		–4,548		–2,116		–5,559

A reconciliation between actual tax expense for the year and the theoretical tax expense that would arise when applying statutory tax rate in Sweden, 26.3 percent, on income before taxes is shown in the table below.

Reconciliation of swedish income tax to the actual income tax

	2010		2009		2008
Tax rate in Sweden (26.3%)		–4,150		–1,643		–4,823
Effect of foreign tax rates		–405		–812		22
Of which joint ventures and associated companies		–467		–550		1
Current income taxes related to previous years		–35		441		167
Recognition/remeasurement of tax losses related to previous years		–257		8		–169
Recognition/remeasurement of deductible temporary differences related to previous years		172		267		62
Tax effect of non-deductible expenses		–830		–1,155		–986
Tax effect of non-taxable income		880		630		327
Tax effect of changes in tax rates		77		148		–159
Taxes		–4,548		–2,116		–5,559

104

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Deferred tax balances

Tax effects of temporary differences and tax loss carryforwards are attributable as shown in the table below:

Tax effects of temporary differences and tax loss carryforwards

	2010						2009
	Deferred tax assets		Deferred tax liabilities		Net balance		Deferred tax assets		Deferred tax liabilities		Net balance
Intangible assets and property, plant and equipment		543		3,725				359		3,096
Current assets		3,398		110				2,481		53
Post-employment benefits		976		636				852		472
Provisions		2,019		12				2,240		—
Equity		781		—				1,901		—
Other		3,395		—				4,343		459
Loss carryforwards		3,537		—				3,961		—
Deferred tax assets/liabilities		14,649		4,483				16,137		4,080
Netting of assets/liabilities		–1,912		–1,912				–1,810		–1,810
Net deferred tax balances		12,737		2,571		10,166		14,327		2,270		12,057

Changes in deferred taxes, net

	2010		2009
Opening balance, net		12,057		12,120
Recognized in income statement		307		661
Recognized in OCI		–1,120		–1,040
Acquisitions/disposals of subsidiaries		–606		186
Translation differences		–472		130
Closing balance, net		10,166		12,057

Tax effects reported directly in Other Comprehensive Income amount to SEK –1,120 (–1,040) million, of which actuarial gains and losses related to pensions SEK –836 (173) million, cash flow hedges SEK –183 (–1,059) million and deferred tax on gains/losses on hedges on investments in foreign entities SEK –101 (–154) million.

Deferred tax assets are only recognized in countries where the Company expects to be able to generate corresponding taxable income in the future to benefit from tax reductions.

Significant tax loss carryforwards are related to countries with long or indefinite periods of utilization, mainly Sweden and the US. Of the total deferred tax assets for tax loss carryforwards, SEK 3,537 million, SEK 2,222 million relate to Sweden with indefinite time of utilization. Due to the Company’s strong current financial position and taxable income during 2010, Ericsson has been able to utilize part of its tax loss carryforwards during the year. The assessment is that Ericsson will be able to generate sufficient income in the coming years to also utilize the remaining parts.

105

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Deferred tax assets for Sony Ericsson and ST-Ericsson are not included, as they are accounted for in accordance with the equity method. Sony Ericsson has in its annual report deferred tax assets of EUR 574 million. The major part of the tax assets relates to the Swedish company.

Investments in subsidiaries

Due to losses in certain subsidiary companies, the book value of certain investments in those subsidiaries are less than the tax value of these investments. Since deferred tax assets have been reported with respect also to losses in these companies, and due to the uncertainty as to which deductions can be realized in the future, no additional deferred tax assets are reported.

Tax loss carryforwards

Deferred tax assets regarding tax loss carryforwards are reported to the extent that realization of the related tax benefit through future taxable profits is probable also when considering the period during which these can be utilized, as described below.

At December 31, 2010, the available tax loss carryforwards amounted to SEK 13,030 (14,493) million. The tax effect of these tax loss carryforwards are reported as an asset.

The final years in which these loss carryforwards can be utilized are shown in the following table:

Tax loss carryforwards year of expiration

Year of expiration	Tax loss carryforwards		Tax effect
2011		0		0
2012		32		7
2013		299		80
2014		898		244
2015		498		119
2016 or later		11,303		3,087
Total		13,030		3,537

Tax loss carryforwards for Sony Ericsson and ST-Ericsson are not included, as they are accounted for in accordance with the equity method.

106

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

C9    EARNINGS PER SHARE

Earnings per share 2008–2010

	2010		2009		2008
Basic
Net income attributable to stockholders of the Parent Company (SEK million)		11,146		3,672		11,273
Average number of shares outstanding, basic (millions)		3,197		3,190		3,183
Earnings per share, basic (SEK)		3.49		1.15		3.54
Diluted
Net income attributable to stockholders of the Parent Company (SEK million)		11,146		3,672		11,273
Average number of shares outstanding, basic (millions)		3,197		3,190		3,183
Dilutive effect for stock option plans		—		—		1
Dilutive effect for stock purchase plans		29		22		18
Average number of shares outstanding, diluted (millions)		3,226		3,212		3,202
Earnings per share, diluted (SEK)		3.46		1.14		3.52

C10    INTANGIBLE ASSETS

Intangible assets 2010

	Capitalized development expenses								Goodwill		Intellectual property rights (IPR),     trade-marks and other intangible assets
	To be marketed		For internal use				Total		Total		Trademarks, customer relationships and similar rights		Patents and acquired R&D		Total
			Acquired costs		Internal costs
Accumulated acquisition costs
Opening balance		5,221		2,060		1,376		8,657		27,375		10,624		24,898		35,522
Acquisitions/capitalization		1,389		153		102		1,644		—		521		—		521
Balances regarding acquired businesses1)		—		—		—		—		1,256		2,800		1,025		3,825
Sales/disposals		—		—		—		—		—		—		–55		–55
Contribution to joint ventures		—		—		—		—		—		—		—		—
Translation difference		—		—		—		—		–1,480		–363		–538		–901
Closing balance		6,610		2,213		1,478		10,301		27,151		13,582		25,330		38,912
Accumulated amortization
Opening balance		–2,104		–1,630		–1,087		–4,821		—		–2,639		–9,875		–12,514
Amortization		–422		–145		–97		–664		—		–1,450		–3,549		–4,999
Sales/disposals		—		—		—		—		—		—		27		27
Translation difference		—		—		—		—		—		152		294		446
Closing balance		–2,526		–1,775		–1,184		–5,485		—		–3,937		–13,103		–17,040
Accumulated impairment losses
Opening balance		–1,665		–55		–37		–1,757		—		—		–4,269		–4,269
Impairment losses2)		–49		—		—		–49		—		—		–945		–945
Closing balance		–1,714		–55		–37		–1,806		—		—		–5,214		–5,214
Net carrying value		2,370		383		257		3,010		27,151		9,645		7,013		16,658

1) For more information on acquired businesses, see Note C26 “Business Combinations”.

2) The write-down (impairment charge) of SEK 0.9 billion is a consequence of the restructuring program decision to phase out certain products.

107

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

The goodwill is allocated to the operating segments Networks SEK 16.5 (16.5) billion, Global Services SEK 4.1 (3.7) billion and Multimedia SEK 6.6 (7.2) billion.

The recoverable amounts for cash-generating units are established as the present value of expected future cash flows. Estimation of future cash flows includes assumptions mainly for the following key financial parameters:

• Sales growth

• Development of operating income (based on operating margin or cost of goods sold and operating expenses relative to sales)

• Development of working capital and capital expenditure requirements.

The assumptions regarding revenue growth, approved by group management and each operating segment’s management, are based on industry sources and projections made within the Company for the development 2011–2015 for key industry parameters:

• The number of global mobile subscriptions is estimated to grow from 5.3 billion by the end of 2010 (6 billion by the end of 2011) to approximately 8 billion by the end of 2015. Of these, some hundred millions (approximately 450 million 2015) will have mobile PC connections, while more than 3 billion 2015 will have a mobile broadband connection.

Mobile PC includes USB dongles and embedded modules for CDMA2000 EV-DO, HSPA, LTE, Mobile WiMax and TDSCDMA and can also be used for fixed applications.

Mobile Broadband includes CDMA2000 EV-DO, HSPA, LTE, Mobile WiMax and TDSCDMA. It includes handsets, USB dongles and embedded modules. The vast majority is handsets.

• Fixed broadband subscriptions will grow from around 500 million (470 in 2010 and 510 in 2011) to around 600 million in the same time perspective. Fixed broadband includes Fiber, Cable and xDSL

• Mobile traffic volume is estimated to increase (around 15 times 2010–2015, around 8 times 2011–2015), while the fixed Internet traffic is estimated to increase (around 6 times 2010–2015, around 4 times 2011–2015), however from a much larger base.

The demand for multimedia solutions is driven by the opportunities for new types of service offerings enabled by IP technology and high-speed broadband. There is strong IPTV subscriber growth, rapid growth in digital viewing and on-demand services. The development and build out of Mobile Broadband networks and increasing number of mobile broadband subscriptions drives growth in service introduction and traffic. This puts high demand on charging and payment systems. The Business Support Systems’ growth is driven by introduction of new services, new business models and price plans.

The demand for professional services is also driven by an increasing business and technology complexity. Therefore, operators review their business models and look for vendor partners that can take on a broader responsibility, including outsourcing of network operations.

The assumptions are also based upon information gathered in the Company’s long-term strategy process, including assessments of new technology, the Company’s competitive position and new types of business and customers, driven by the continued integration of telecom, data and media industries.

The impairment testing is based on specific estimates for the first five years and with a reduction of nominal annual growth rate to an average GDP growth of 3 (3) percent per year thereafter. The impairment tests for goodwill did not result in any impairment.

108

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

A number of sensitivity tests have been made, for example applying lower levels of revenue and operating income. Also when applying these estimates no goodwill impairment is indicated.

As per year end 2010, the market capitalization of the Company well exceeded the value of the Company’s net assets.

An after-tax discount rate of 8 (12) percent has for all cash generating units been applied for the discounting of projected after-tax cash flows. The assumptions for 2009 are disclosed in note C10 in the Annual Report of 2009.

The Company´s discounting is based on after-tax future cash flows and after-tax discount rates. This discounting is not materially different from a discounting based on before-tax future cash flows and before-tax discount rates, as required by IFRS.

In Note C1, “Significant Accounting Policies”, and Note C2, “Critical Accounting Estimates and Judgments”, further disclosures are given regarding goodwill impairment testing.

Intangible assets 2009

			Capitalized development expenses						Goodwill		Intellectual property rights (IPR), trade-marks and other intangible assets
	To be marketed		For internal use				Total		Total		Trademarks, customer relationships and similar rights		Patents and acquired R&D		Total
			Acquired costs		Internal costs
Accumulated acquisition costs
Opening balance		5,518		1,821		1,217		8,556		24,877		9,429		20,450		29,879
Acquisitions/capitalization		1,045		239		159		1,443		—		602		2		604
Balances regarding divested/acquired businesses1)		—		—		—		—		3,534		811		5,021		5,832
Sales/disposals		—		—		—		—		–21		–142		—		–142
Contribution to joint ventures		–1,342		—		—		–1,342		—		—		—		—
Translation difference		—		—		—		—		–1,015		–76		–575		–651
Closing balance		5,221		2,060		1,376		8,657		27,375		10,624		24,898		35,522
Accumulated amortization
Opening balance		–1,570		–1,562		–1,042		–4,174		—		–2,425		–6,853		–9,278
Amortization		–534		–68		–45		–647		—		–360		–3,202		–3,562
Sales/disposals		—		—		—		—		—		131		—		131
Translation difference		—		—		—		—		—		15		180		195
Closing balance		–2,104		–1,630		–1,087		–4,821		—		–2,639		–9,875		–12,514
Accumulated impairment losses
Opening balance		–1,508		–55		–37		–1,600		—		—		–14		–14
Impairment losses2)		–157		—		—		–157		—		—		–4,255		–4,255
Closing balance		–1,665		–55		–37		–1,757		—		—		–4,269		–4,269
Net carrying value		1,452		375		252		2,079		27,375		7,985		10,754		18,739

1) During 2009, Ericsson acquired Nortel SEK 8.7 billion.

2) The write-down (impairment charge) of SEK 4.3 billion is a consequence of the restructuring program decision to phase out certain products.

109

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

C11    PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

Property, plant and equipment 2010

	Real estate		Machinery and other technical assets		Other equipment, tools and installations		Construction in process and advance payments		Total
Accumulated acquisition costs
Opening balance		4,217		5,298		18,087		578		28,180
Additions		283		411		1,480		1,512		3,686
Balances regarding divested/acquired businesses		14		4		473		–5		486
Sales/disposals		–102		–543		–1,449		–148		–2,242
Reclassifications		87		190		817		–1,094		—
Translation difference		–261		–356		–832		–29		–1,478
Closing balance		4,238		5,004		18,576		814		28,632
Accumulated depreciation
Opening balance		–1,692		–3,557		–13,058		—		–18,307
Depreciation		–361		–629		–2,309		—		–3,299
Balances regarding divested businesses		–2		–3		–297		—		–302
Sales/disposals		60		553		1,384		—		1,997
Reclassifications		4		9		–13		—		—
Translation difference		122		250		598		—		970
Closing balance		–1,869		–3,377		–13,695		—		–18,941
Accumulated impairment losses
Opening balance		–45		–91		–131		—		–267
Impairment losses		—		–6		–3		—		–9
Reversals of impairment losses		—		—		12		—		12
Sales/disposals		—		—		—		—		—
Translation difference		2		2		3		—		7
Closing balance		–43		–95		–119		—		–257
Net carrying value		2,326		1,532		4,762		814		9,434

Contractual commitments for the acquisition of property, plant and equipment as per December 31, 2010, amounted to SEK 303 (236) million.

The reversal of impairment losses have been reported under Cost of sales.

110

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Property, plant and equipment 2009

	Real estate		Machinery and other technical assets		Other equipment, tools and installations		Construction in process and advance payments		Total
Accumulated acquisition costs
Opening balance		4,054		6,131		18,058		795		29,038
Additions		362		657		1,699		1,288		4,006
Balances regarding divested/acquired businesses		—		–183		–95		–1		–279
Sales/disposals		–282		–1,241		–2,184		–148		–3,855
Reclassifications		240		151		947		–1,338		—
Translation difference		–157		–217		–338		–18		–730
Closing balance		4,217		5,298		18,087		578		28,180
Accumulated depreciation
Opening balance		–1,545		–4,211		–12,967		—		–18,723
Depreciation		–303		–735		–2,512		—		–3,550
Balances regarding divested businesses		—		112		191		—		303
Sales/disposals		174		1,188		1,873		—		3,235
Reclassifications		–75		–51		126		—		—
Translation difference		57		140		231		—		428
Closing balance		–1,692		–3,557		–13,058		—		–18,307
Accumulated impairment losses
Opening balance		–47		–125		–148		—		–320
Impairment losses		—		—		–1		—		–1
Reversals of impairment losses		—		33		16		—		49
Sales/disposals		—		—		—		—		—
Translation difference		2		1		2		—		5
Closing balance		–45		–91		–131		—		–267
Net carrying value		2,480		1,650		4,898		578		9,606

Contractual commitments for the acquisition of property, plant and equipment as per December 31, 2009, amounted to SEK 236 (229) million.

The reversal of impairment losses have been reported under Cost of sales.

111

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

C12    FINANCIAL ASSETS, NON-CURRENT

Equity in joint ventures and associated companies

	Joint ventures						Associated companies					Total		Total
	2010			2009			2010			2009		2010		2009
Opening balance		10,317			6,694			1,261			1,294		11,578		7,988
Share in earnings		–1,099			–7,455			–73			55		–1,172		–7,400
Taxes		–181			1,388			–4			–1		–185		1,387
Translation difference		–391			–277			–47			–17		–438		–294
Change in hedge reserve		22			6			—			—		22		6
Pensions		–20			21			—			—		–20		21
Dividends		—			—			–119			–70		–119		–70
Contributions to joint ventures and associated companies		—			9,941	1)		138			2		138		9,943
Reclassification		—			–1			–1			–2		–1		–3
Closing balance		8,648	2)		10,317	2)		1,155	3)		1,261		9,803		11,578

1) Including contribution of SEK 5.0 billion paid to STMicroelectronics.

2) Including goodwill for ST-Ericsson of SEK 1.381 million (SEK 1,341 million in 2009).

3) Goodwill, net, amounts to SEK 16 million (SEK 16 million in 2009).

Ericsson’s share of assets, liabilities and income in joint venture sony ericsson mobile communications

	2010		2009		2008
Non-current assets		3,622		4,003		3,228
Current assets		9,904		12,790		21,190
Non-current liabilities		592		130		157
Current liabilities		10,533		14,675		17,593
Net assets		2,401		1,988		6,668
Net sales		30,089		36,074		54,377
Income after financial items		705		–5,540		–400
Income taxes		–231		1,252		151
Net income		474		–4,288		–249
Net income attributable to:
Stockholders of the Parent Company		433		–4,441		–353
Non-controlling interest		41		153		104
Assets pledged as collateral		—		182		—
Contingent liabilities		16		17		20

112

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Ericsson’s share of assets, liabilities and income in associated company ericsson nikola tesla d.d.¹⁾

	2010		2009		2008
Non-current assets		92		311		394
Current assets		749		754		695
Non-current liabilities		2		3		6
Current liabilities		209		240		253
Net assets		630		822		830
Net sales		784		994		1,182
Income after financial items		17		90		139
Income taxes		–1		1		–5
Net income		16		91		134
Net income attributable to:
Stockholders of the Parent Company		16		91		134
Non-controlling interest		—		—		—
Assets pledged as collateral		4		5		5
Contingent liabilities		43		151		172

1) Ericsson’s share is 49.07 percent.

All three companies apply IFRS in the reporting to Ericsson.

Ericsson’s share of assets, liabilities and income in joint venture st-ericsson

	2010		2009
Non-current assets		6,673		7,238
Current assets		2,249		3,856
Non-current liabilities		214		129
Current liabilities		2,519		2,691
Net assets		6,189		8,274
Net sales		8,260		9,633
Income after financial items		–1,762		–1,762
Income taxes		50		136
Net income		–1,712		–1,626
Net income attributable to:
Stockholders of the Parent Company		–1,713		–1,626
Non-controlling interest		1		—
Assets pledged as collateral		3		—
Contingent liabilities		—		6

113

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Other financial assets, non-current

	Other investments in shares and participations				Customer finance, non-current				Derivatives, non-current				Other financial assets, non-current
	2010		2009		2010		2009		2010		2009		2010		2009
Accumulated acquisition costs
Opening balance		1,660		1,783		1,232		1,082		843		2,814		3,197		3,557
Additions		114		1		3,562		408		—		—		683		389
Business combinations		–33		—		—		—		—		—		—		—
Disposals/repayments/deductions		—		–36		–3,322		–258		—		—		–35		–244
Change in value in funded pension plans1)		—		—		—		—		—		—		726		–521
Reclassifications		—		–1		—		—		—		—		—		—
Revaluation		—		—		—		—		–843		–1,971		—		—
Translation difference		–134		–87		2		—		—		—		–189		16
Closing balance		1,607		1,660		1,474		1,232		—		843		4,382		3,197
Accumulated impairment losses/allowances
Opening balance		–1,404		–1,474		–402		–236		—		—		–1,463		–1,454
Impairment losses/allowance		–75		–3		2		–222		—		—		–7		–74
Business combinations		—		—		—		—		—		—		—		—
Disposals/repayments/deductions		–26		—		206		56		—		—		—		—
Translation difference		117		73		1		—		—		—		167		65
Closing balance		–1,388		–1,404		–193		–402		—		—		–1,303		–1,463
Net carrying value		219		256		1,281		830		—		843		3,079		1,734

1) This amount includes asset ceiling. For further information, see Note C17, “Post-employment benefits”.

C13    INVENTORIES

Inventories

	2010		2009
Raw materials, components, consumables and manufacturing work in progress		8,509		6,190
Finished products and goods for resale		11,894		6,621
Contract work in progress		9,494		9,907
Inventories, net		29,897		22,718

Contract work in progress includes amounts related to delivery-type contracts, service contracts and construction-type contracts with ongoing work in progress.

Reported amounts are net of obsolescence allowances of SEK 3,090 (2,961) million.

The increase in inventories during 2010 is due to higher level of working progress in the regions. During the year it has been industry component shortages and supply chain bottlenecks.

114

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Movements in obsolescence allowances

	2010		2009		2008
Opening balance		2,961		3,493		2,752
Additions, net		250		562		1,553
Utilization		–165		–1,297		–1,039
Translation difference		–46		2		250
Balances regarding acquired/divested businesses		90		201		–23
Closing balance		3,090		2,961		3,493

The amount of inventories recognized as expense and included in Cost of sales was SEK 47,415 (52,255) million.

C14    TRADE RECEIVABLES AND CUSTOMER FINANCE

Trade receivables and customer finance

	2010		2009
Trade receivables excluding associated companies and joint ventures		61,609		67,133
Allowances for impairment		–766		–924
Trade receivables, net		60,843		66,209
Trade receivables related to associated companies and joint ventures		284		201
Trade receivables, total		61,127		66,410
Customer finance		4,725		3,046
Allowances for impairment		–321		–772
Customer finance, net		4,404		2,274
Of which short term		3,123		1,444
Credit commitments for customer finance		3,282		3,027

Days Sales Outstanding were 88 (106) in December, 2010.

Movements in allowances for impairment

	Trade receivables						Customer finance
	2010		2009		2008		2010		2009		2008
Opening balance		924		1,471		1,351		772		326		275
Additions		282		388		651		25		595		90
Utilization		–285		–583		–492		–87		–67		–3
Reversal of excess amounts		–169		–312		–81		–359		–37		–74
Reclassification		33		10		–69		—		—		—
Translation difference		–19		–43		115		–30		–45		38
Balances regarding acquired/divested business		—		–7		–4		—		—		—
Closing balance		766		924		1,471		321		772		326

115

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Aging analysis as per December 31, 2010

	Amount		of which neither impaired nor past due		of which impaired, not past due		of which past due in the following time intervals				of which past due and impaired in the following time intervals
							less than 90 days		90 days or more		less than 90 days		90 days or more
Trade receivables excluding associated companies and joint ventures		61,609		54,510		52		2,227		1,500		418		2,902
Allowances for impairment of receivables		–766		—		–16		—		—		–90		–660
Customer finance		4,725		3,804		528		62		85		18		228
Allowances for impairment of customer finance		–321		—		–75		—		—		–18		–228

Aging analysis as per December 31, 2009

	Amount		of which neither impaired nor past due		of which impaired, not past due		of which past due in the following time intervals				of which past due and impaired in the following time intervals
							less than 90 days		90 days or more		less than 90 days		90 days or more
Trade receivables excluding associated companies and joint ventures		67,133		58,727		43		2,962		2,081		774		2,546
Allowances for impairment of receivables		–924		—		–8		—		—		–180		–736
Customer finance		3,046		1,292		1,314		9		1		145		285
Allowances for impairment of customer finance		–772		—		–342		—		—		–145		–285

Credit risk

Credit risk is divided into three categories: credit risk in trade receivables, customer finance risk and financial credit risk (see C20, Financial Risk Management and Financial Instruments).

Credit risk in trade receivables

Credit risk in trade receivables is governed by a policy applicable for all legal entities in Ericsson. The purpose of the policy is to:

• Avoid credit losses through establishing internal standard credit approval routines in all Ericsson legal entities

• Ensure monitoring and risk mitigation of defaulting accounts, i.e. events of non-payment and/or delayed payments from customers

• Ensure efficient credit management within the Company and thereby improve Days Sales Outstanding and Cash Flow

• Ensure payment terms are commercially justifiable

• Define escalation path and approval process for payment terms and customer credit limits.

116

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

The credit worthiness of all customers is regularly assessed and a credit limit is set. Through credit management system functionality, credit checks are performed every time a sales order or an invoice is generated in the source system. This is based on the credit risk set on the customer. Credit blocks appear if the credit limit set on customer is exceeded or if past due receivables are higher than permitted levels. Release of a credit block requires authorization.

Letters of credits are used as a method for securing payments from customers operating in emerging markets, in particular in markets with unstable political and/or economic environment. By having banks confirming the letters of credit, the political and commercial credit risk exposures to Ericsson are mitigated.

Trade receivables amounted to SEK 61,609 (67,133) million as of December 31, 2010. Provisions for expected losses are regularly assessed and amounted to SEK 766 (924) million as of December 31, 2010. Ericsson’s nominal credit losses have, however, historically been low. The amounts of trade receivables closely follow the distribution of Ericsson’s sales and do not include any major concentrations of credit risk by customer or by geography. The five largest customers represent 29 (26) percent of the total trade receivables.

Customer finance credit risk

All major commitments to finance customers are made only after the approval by the Finance Committee of the Board of Directors according to the established credit approval process.

Prior to the approval of new facilities reported as customer finance, an internal credit risk assessment is conducted in order to assess the credit rating of each transaction (for political and commercial risk). The credit risk analysis is made by using an assessment tool, where the political risk rating is identical to the rating used by all Export Credit Agencies within the OECD. The commercial risk is assessed by analyzing a large number of parameters, which may affect the level of the future commercial credit risk exposure. The output from the assessment tool for the credit rating also include an internal pricing of the risk. This is expressed as a risk margin per annum over funding cost. The reference pricing for political and commercial risk, on which the tool is based, is reviewed using information from Export Credit Agencies and prevailing pricing in the bank loan market for structured financed deals. The objective is that the internally set risk margin shall reflect the assessed risk and that the pricing is as close as possible to the current market pricing. A reassessment of the credit rating for each customer finance facility is made on a regular basis.

Risk provisions related to customer finance risk exposures are only made upon events which occur after the financing arrangement has become effective and which are expected to have a significant adverse impact on the borrower’s ability and/or willingness to service the outstanding debt. These events can be political (normally outside the control of the borrower) or commercial, e.g. a borrower’s deteriorated creditworthiness.

As of December 31, 2010, Ericsson’s total outstanding exposure related to customer finance was SEK 4,725 (3,046) million. As of December 31, 2010, Ericsson also had unutilized customer finance commitments of SEK 3,282 (3,027) million. During 2010 Ericsson transferred certain customer finance assets to third parties, and continues to recognize a part of such assets corresponding to the extent of its continuing involvement. The total carrying amount of the original assets transferred is SEK 3,808 (560) million, the amount of the assets that Ericsson continues to recognize is SEK 190 (28) million, and the carrying amount of the associated liabilities is SEK 190 (28) million. Customer finance is arranged for infrastructure projects in different geographic markets and for a large number of customers. As of December 31, 2010, there were a total of 74 (68) customer finance arrangements originated by or guaranteed by Ericsson. The five largest facilities represented 44 (43) percent of the total credit exposure.

117

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Of Ericsson’s total outstanding customer finance exposure as of December 31, 2010, 66 (57) percent was related to Central and Eastern Europe, Middle East and Africa, 11 (15) percent to the Americas, 9 (14) percent to Western Europe, and 14 (14) percent to Asia Pacific.

The effect of risk provisions and reversals for customer finance affecting the income statement amounted to a net positive impact of SEK 331 million compared to a negative impact of SEK 480 million in 2009. Credit losses amounted to SEK 87 (67) million. A credit loss reported in 2005 was partly recovered in 2010 for the amount of SEK 136 million.

Security arrangements for customer finance facilities normally include pledges of equipment, pledges of certain assets belonging to the borrower and pledges of shares in the operating company. Restructuring efforts for cases of troubled debt may lead to temporary holdings of equity interests. If available, third-party risk coverage is as a rule arranged. “Third-party risk coverage” means that a financial payment guarantee covering the credit risk has been issued by a bank, an export credit agency or other financial institution. A credit risk transfer under a sub participation arrangement with a bank can also be arranged. In this case the entire credit risk and the funding is taken care of by the bank for the part that they cover. A credit risk cover from a third party may also be issued by an insurance company. During 2010, Ericsson has not taken possession of any collateral it holds as security or called on any other credit enhancement.

Information about guarantees related to customer finance is included in note C24, “Contingent Liabilities”.

The table below summarizes Ericsson’s outstanding customer finance as of December 31, 2010 and 2009.

Outstanding customer finance

	2010		2009
Total customer finance		4,725		3,046
Accrued interest		69		57
Less third-party risk coverage		–1,409		–382
Ericsson’s risk exposure		3,385		2,721

C15    OTHER CURRENT RECEIVABLES

Other current receivables

	2010		2009
Prepaid expenses		2,369		2,403
Accrued revenues		1,850		1,538
Advance payments to suppliers		881		776
Derivatives with a positive value1)		3,042		1,760
Taxes		5,439		4,830
Other		3,565		3,839
Total		17,146		15,146

1) Also see Note C20 “Financial Risk Management and Financial Instruments”

118

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

C16    EQUITY AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

Capital stock 2010

Capital stock at December 31, 2010, consisted of the following:

Capital stock

Parent Company	Number of shares		Capital stock
Class A shares		261,755,983		1,309
Class B shares		3,011,595,752		15,058
Total		3,273,351,735		16,367

The capital stock of the Parent Company is divided into two classes: Class A shares (quota value SEK 5.00) and Class B shares (quota value SEK 5.00). Both classes have the same rights of participation in the net assets and earnings. Class A shares, however, are entitled to one vote per share while Class B shares are entitled to one tenth of one vote per share.

At December 31, 2010, the total number of treasury shares was 73,088,516 (78,978,533 in 2009 and 61,066,097 in 2008) Class B shares. Ericsson did not repurchase shares in 2010, in relation to the Stock Purchase Plan.

Reconciliation of number of shares

	Number of shares		Capital stock
Number of shares Jan 1, 2010		3,273,351,735		16,367
Number of shares Dec 31, 2010		3,273,351,735		16,367

For further information about number of shares, see chapter Share information.

Dividend proposal

The Board of Directors will propose to the Annual General Meeting 2011 a dividend of SEK 2.25 per share (2.00 in 2010 and 1.85 in 2009).

Additional paid in capital

Relates to payments made by owners and includes share premiums paid.

Revaluation of other investments in shares and participations

The fair value reserve comprises the cumulative net change in the fair value of available-for-sale financial assets until the investments are derecognized or impaired.

Cash flow hedges

The cash flow hedge reserve comprises the effective portion of the cumulative net change in the fair value of cash-flow-hedging instruments related to hedged transactions that have not yet occurred.

119

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Cumulative translation adjustments

The cumulative translation adjustments comprises all foreign currency differences arising from the translation of the financial statements of foreign operations, changes regarding revaluation of goodwill in local currency as well as from the translation of liabilities that hedge the Company’s net investment in foreign subsidiaries.

Retained earnings

Retained earnings, including net income for the year, comprise the earned profits of the Parent Company and its share of net income in subsidiaries, joint ventures and associated companies. Actuarial gains and losses related to pensions are included in retained earnings.

120

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Equity and other comprehensive income 2010

2010	Capital stock		Additional paid in capital		Revaluation of other investments in shares and participations		Cash flow hedges			Cumulative translation adjustments			Retained earnings		Stock- holders’ equity			Non- controlling interest (NCI)		Total equity
January 1, 2010		16,367		24,731		–4		78			663			98,035		139,870			1,157		141,027
Net income
Group		—		—		—		—			—			12,503		12,503			89		12,592
Joint ventures and associated companies		—		—		—		—			—			–1,357		–1,357			—		–1,357
Other comprehensive income
Actuarial gains and losses, and the effect of the asset ceiling, related to pensions
Group		—		—		—		—			—			3,892		3,892			—		3,892
Joint ventures and associated companies		—		—		—		—			—			–27		–27			—		–27
Revaluation of other investments in shares and participations
Fair value remeasurement
Group		—		—		7		—			—			—		7			—		7
Joint ventures and associated companies		—		—		—		—			—			—		—			—		—
Cash flow hedges
Gains/losses arising during the year
Group		—		—		—		966			—			—		966			—		966
Joint ventures and associated companies		—		—		—		31			—			—		31			—		31
Reclassification adjustments for gains/losses included in profit or loss		—		—		—		–238	1)		—			—		–238			—		–238
Adjustments for amounts transferred to initial carrying amount of hedged items		—		—		—		–136			—			—		–136			—		–136
Changes in cumulative translation adjustments
Group		—		—		—		—			–3,269	2)		—		–3,269			10		–3,259
Joint ventures and associated companies		—		—		—		—			–438			—		–438			—		–438
Tax on items relating to components of OCI3)		—		—		–3		–183			–101	4)		–833		–1,120			—		–1,120
Total other comprehensive income		—		—		4		440			–3,808			3,032		–332			10		–322
Total comprehensive income		—		—		4		440			–3,808			14,178		10,814			99		10,913
Transactions with owners
Stock issue		—		—		—		—			—			—		—			—		—
Sale of own shares		—		—		—		—			—			52		52			—		52
Stock Purchase Plan
Group		—		—		—		—			—			762		762			—		762
Joint ventures and associated companies		—		—		—		—			—			—		—			—		—
Dividends paid		—		—		—		—			—			–6,391		–6,391	5)		–286		–6,677
Business combinations		—		—		—		—			—			—		—			708		708
December 31, 2010		16,367		24,731		—		518			–3,145			106,636		145,106			1,679		146,785

1) SEK 1,139 million is recognized in Net Sales, SEK –586 million is recognized in Cost of Sales and SEK –315 million is recognized in R&D expenses.

2) Changes in cumulative translation adjustments include changes regarding revaluation of goodwill in local currency of SEK –1,480 million (SEK –1,015 million in 2009, SEK 2,993 million in 2008), gain/loss from hedging activities of foreign entities, SEK 385 million (SEK 586 in 2009, SEK –660 million in 2008) and SEK 140 million (SEK 10 million in 2009, SEK 13 million in 2008) of realized gain/losses net from sold/liquidated companies.

3) For further disclosures, see note C8 “Taxes”.

4) Deferred tax on gains/losses on hedges on investments in foreign entities.

5) Dividends paid per share amounted to SEK 2.25 (SEK 2.00 in 2009 and SEK 1.85 in 2008).

121

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Equity and other comprehensive income 2009

	Capital stock		Additional paid in capital		Revaluation of other investments in shares and participations		Cash flow hedges		Cumulative translation adjustments		Retained earnings		Stock- holders’ equity		Non- controlling interest (NCI)		Total equity
January 1, 2009		16,232		24,731		–1		–2,356		2,124		100,093		140,823		1,261		142,084
Net income
Group		—		—		—		—		—		9,685		9,685		455		10,140
Joint ventures and associated companies		—		—		—		—		—		–6,013		–6,013		—		–6,013
Other comprehensive income
Actuarial gains and losses, and the effect of the asset ceiling, related to pensions
Group		—		—		—		—		—		–633		–633		—		–633
Joint ventures and associated companies		—		—		—		—		—		28		28		—		28
Revaluation of other investments in shares and participations
Fair value remeasurement
Group		—		—		–2		—		—		—		–2		—		–2
Joint ventures and associated companies		—		—		—		—		—		—		—		—		—
Cash flow hedges
Gains/losses arising during the year
Group		—		—		—		665		—		—		665		—		665
Joint ventures and associated companies		—		—		—		7		—		—		7		—		7
Reclassification adjustments for gains/losses included in profit or loss		—		—		—		3,850		—		—		3,850		—		3,850
Adjustments for amounts transferred to initial carrying amount of hedged items		—		—		—		–1,029		—		—		–1,029		—		–1,029
Changes in cumulative translation adjustments
Group		—		—		—		—		–1,013		—		–1,013		–54		–1,067
Joint ventures and associated companies		—		—		—		—		–294		—		–294		—		–294
Tax on items relating to components of OCI		—		—		–1		–1,059		–154		174		–1,040		—		–1,040
Total other comprehensive income		—		—		–3		2,434		–1,461		–431		539		–54		485
Total comprehensive income		—		—		–3		2,434		–1,461		3,241		4,211		401		4,612
Transactions with owners
Stock issue		135		—		—		—		—		—		135		—		135
Sale of own shares		—		—		—		—		—		75		75		—		75
Repurchase of own shares		—		—		—		—		—		–135		–135		—		–135
Stock Purchase and Stock Option Plans
Group		—		—		—		—		—		658		658		—		658
Joint ventures and associated companies		—		—		—		—		—		—		—		—		—
Dividends paid		—		—		—		—		—		–5,897		–5,897		–421		–6,318
Business combinations		—		—		—		—		—		—		—		–84		–84
December 31, 2009		16,367		24,731		–4		78		663		98,035		139,870		1,157		141,027

122

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Equity and other comprehensive income 2008

	Capital stock		Additional paid in capital		Revaluation of other investments in shares and participations		Cash flow hedges		Cumulative translation adjustments		Retained earnings		Stock- holders’ equity		Non- controlling interest (NCI)		Total equity
January 1, 2008		16,132		24,731		5		307		–6,345		99,282		134,112		940		135,052
Net income
Group		—		—		—		—		—		11,564		11,564		394		11,958
Joint ventures and associated companies		—		—		—		—		—		–291		–291		—		–291
Other comprehensive income
Actuarial gains and losses related to pensions
Group		—		—		—		—		—		–4,019		–4,019		—		–4,019
Joint ventures and associated companies		—		—		—		—		—		4		4				4
Revaluation of other investments in shares and participations
Fair value remeasurement
Group		—		—		–6		—		—		—		–6		—		–6
Joint ventures and associated companies		—		—		–1		—		—		—		–1		—		–1
Cash flow hedges
Gains/losses arising during the year
Group		—		—		—		–5,116		—		—		–5,116		—		–5,116
Joint ventures and associated companies		—		—		—		36		—		—		36		—		36
Reclassification adjustments for gains/losses included in profit or loss		—		—		—		1,192		—		—		1,192		—		1,192
Adjustments for amounts transferred to initial carrying amount of hedged items		—		—		—		—		—		—		—		—		—
Changes in cumulative translation adjustments
Group		—		—		—		—		7,081		—		7,081		233		7,314
Joint ventures and associated companies		—		—		—		—		1,214		—		1,214		—		1,214
Tax on items relating to components of OCI		—		—		1		1,225		174		930		2,330		—		2,330
Total other comprehensive income		—		—		–6		–2,663		8,469		–3,085		2,715		233		2,948
Total comprehensive income		—		—		–6		–2,663		8,469		8,188		13,988		627		14,615
Transactions with owners
Stock issue		100		—		—		—		—		—		100		—		100
Sale of own shares		—		—		—		—		—		88		88		—		88
Repurchase of own shares		—		—		—		—		—		–100		–100		—		–100
Stock Purchase and Stock Option Plans
Group		—		—		—		—		—		589		589		—		589
Joint ventures and associated companies		—		—		—		—		—		—		—		—		—
Dividends paid		—		—		—		—		—		–7,954		–7,954		–286		–8,240
Business combinations		—		—		—		—		—		—		—		–20		–20
December 31, 2008		16,232		24,731		–1		–2,356		2,124		100,093		140,823		1,261		142,084

123

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

C17    POST-EMPLOYMENT BENEFITS

Ericsson sponsors a number of post-employment benefit plans throughout the Company, which are in line with market practice in each country. The year 2010 was characterized by the overall increase in discount rates, and a higher than expected return on plan assets. Consequently, the Company experienced a decrease in the net pension liability, and an actuarial gain.

CONTENTS

AMOUNT RECOGNIZED IN THE CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET	124
TOTAL PENSION EXPENSES RECOGNIZED IN THE INCOME STATEMENT	125
CHANGE IN THE DEFINED BENEFIT OBLIGATION. DBO	126
CHANGE IN THE PLAN ASSETS	127
ACTUARIAL GAINS AND LOSSES REPORTED DIRECTLY IN OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME	128
ACTUARIAL ASSUMPTIONS	129
INFORMATION ON ISSUES AFFECTING THE NET PENSION LIABILITY FOR THE YEAR	130

SECTION ONE: AMOUNT RECOGNIZED IN THE CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET

Amount recognized in the consolidated balance sheet

	Sweden		UK		Euro zone		US		Other		Total
2010
Defined benefit obligation (DBO)1)		14,980		5,437		3,163		2,693		2,437		28,710
Fair value of plan assets2)		12,389		5,691		2,514		2,048		2,793		25,435
Deficit/Surplus (+/–)		2,591		–254		649		645		–356		3,275
Unrecognized past service costs		—		—		5		—		–60		–55
Closing balance		2,591		–254		654		645		–416		3,220
Plans with net surplus excluding asset ceiling3)		—		290		643		—		939		1,872
Provision for post-employment benefits4)		2,591		36		1,297		645		523		5,092
2009
Defined benefit obligation (DBO)1)		16,150		5,688		3,840		2,781		2,258		30,717
Fair value of plan assets2)		10,927		5,336		2,406		1,974		2,563		23,206
Deficit/Surplus (+/–)		5,223		352		1,434		807		–305		7,511
Unrecognized past service costs		—		—		–14		—		–79		–93
Closing balance		5,223		352		1,420		807		–384		7,418
Plans with net surplus excluding asset ceiling3)		—		190		29		—		896		1,115
Provision for post-employment benefits4)		5,223		542		1,449		807		512		8,533

1) For details on DBO, please refer to section three of this note.

2) For details on plan assets, please refer to section four of this note.

3) Plans with a net surplus, i.e. where plan assets exceed DBO, are reported as Other financial assets, non-current (please see Note C12 “Financial Assets”).

4) Plans with net liabilities are reported in the balance sheet as Post-employment benefits, non-current.

124

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

SECTION TWO: TOTAL PENSION EXPENSES RECOGNIZED IN THE INCOME STATEMENT

The expenses for post-employment benefits within Ericsson are distributed between defined contribution plans and defined benefit plans, with a trend toward defined contribution plans.

Pension costs for defined contribution plans and defined benefit plans

	Sweden		UK		Euro zone		US		Other		Total
2010
Pension cost for defined contribution plans		1,037		95		433		244		192		2,001
Pension cost for defined benefit plans1)		762		153		159		30		–14		1,090
Total		1,799		248		592		274		178		3,091
Total pension cost expressed as a percentage of wages and salaries												7.1	%
2009
Pension cost for defined contribution plans		1,686		73		385		124		185		2,453
Pension cost for defined benefit plans1)		674		66		202		49		144		1,135
Total		2,360		139		587		173		329		3,588
Total pension cost expressed as a percentage of wages and salaries												8.7	%
2008
Pension cost for defined contribution plans		1,607		40		345		114		72		2,178
Pension cost for defined benefit plans1)		625		156		179		35		33		1,028
Total		2,232		196		524		149		105		3,206
Total pension cost expressed as a percentage of wages and salaries												8.3	%

1) See cost details in table below.

Cost details for defined benefit plans recognized in the income statement

	Sweden		UK		Euro zone		US		Other		Total
2010
Current service cost		631		161		129		32		140		1,093
Interest cost		643		314		182		159		172		1,470
Expected return on plan assets		–511		–322		–141		–130		–253		–1,357
Past service cost		—		—		33		—		9		42
Curtailments, settlements and other		–1		—		–44		–31		–82		–158
Total		762		153		159		30		–14		1,090
2009
Current service cost		594		205		138		35		131		1,103
Interest cost		590		284		194		171		155		1,394
Expected return on plan assets		–366		–270		–125		–156		–208		–1,125
Past service cost		—		—		5		—		25		30
Curtailments, settlements and other		–144		–153		–10		–1		41		–267
Total		674		66		202		49		144		1,135
2008
Current service cost		539		186		141		29		122		1,017
Interest cost		549		299		160		142		133		1,283
Expected return on plan assets		–431		–310		–143		–137		–201		–1,222
Past service cost		—		—		11		—		8		19
Curtailments, settlements and other		–32		–19		10		1		–29		–69
Total		625		156		179		35		33		1,028

125

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

SECTIONS THREE TO SIX FOCUS ON THE DEFINED BENEFIT PLANS SECTION THREE: CHANGE IN THE DEFINED BENEFIT OBLIGATION, DBO

The DBO is the gross pension liability.

Change in the defined benefit obligation

	Sweden		UK		Euro zone		US		Other		Total
2010
Opening balance		16,150		5,688		3,840		2,781		2,258		30,717
Current service cost		631		161		129		32		140		1,093
Interest cost		643		314		182		159		172		1,470
Employee contributions		—		11		4		—		5		20
Pension payments		–159		–99		–82		–169		–194		–703
Actuarial gain/loss (–/+)		–2,285		–157		–569		46		104		–2,861
Settlements		—		—		–14		—		–104		–118
Curtailments		–1		—		–30		–38		–93		–162
Business combinations1)		—		—		74		—		148		222
Other		1		–20		95		30		8		114
Translation difference		—		–461		–466		–148		–7		–1,082
Closing balance		14,980		5,437		3,163		2,693		2,437		28,710
Of which medical benefit schemes		—		—		—		594		—		594
2009
Opening balance		14,866		4,867		3,557		2,789		1,931		28,010
Current service cost		594		205		138		35		131		1,103
Interest cost		590		284		194		171		155		1,394
Employee contributions		—		14		4		—		12		30
Pension payments		–107		–108		–90		–172		–142		–619
Actuarial gain/loss (–/+)		351		543		204		143		–120		1,121
Settlements		—		—		—		—		–1		–1
Curtailments		–144		–153		–14		—		—		–311
Business combinations		—		—		—		—		–13		–13
Other		—		–13		74		26		40		127
Translation difference		—		49		–227		–211		265		–124
Closing balance		16,150		5,688		3,840		2,781		2,258		30,717
Of which medical benefit schemes		—		—		—		631		—		631

1) Business combinations in 2010 are related to the acquisition of LG-Nortel and Pride Spa.

126

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Funded status

The funded ratio, defined as total plan assets in relation to the total defined benefit obligation (DBO), was 88.6 percent in 2010, compared to 75.5 percent in 2009.

The following table summarizes the value of the DBO per geographical area based on whether there are plan assets wholly or partially funding each pension plan.

Value of the defined benefit obligation

	Sweden		UK		Euro zone		US		Other		Total
2010
DBO, closing balance		14,980		5,437		3,163		2,693		2,437		28,710
Of which partially or fully funded		14,527		5,437		2,086		2,072		1,998		26,120
Of which unfunded		453		—		1,077		621		439		2,590
2009
DBO, closing balance		16,150		5,688		3,840		2,781		2,258		30,717
Of which partially or fully funded		15,660		5,688		2,659		2,119		1,813		27,939
Of which unfunded		490		—		1,181		662		445		2,778

SECTION FOUR: CHANGE IN THE PLAN ASSETS

A majority of pension plans have assets managed by local Pension Trust funds, whose sole purpose is to secure the future pension payments to the employees.

Change in the plan assets

	Sweden		UK		Euro zone		US		Other		Total
2010
Opening balance		10,927		5,336		2,406		1,974		2,563		23,206
Expected return on plan assets		511		322		141		130		253		1,357
Actuarial gain/loss (+/–)		222		265		105		103		–42		653
Employer contributions		729		343		173		58		93		1,396
Employee contributions		—		11		3		—		5		19
Pension payments		—		–119		–43		–103		–119		–384
Settlements		—		—		—		—		–104		–104
Business combinations1)		—		—		—		—		164		164
Other		—		—		53		—		–4		49
Translation difference		—		–467		–324		–114		–16		–921
Closing balance		12,389		5,691		2,514		2,048		2,793		25,435
2009
Opening balance		8,181		4,407		2,330		2,289		1,830		19,037
Expected return on plan assets		366		270		125		156		208		1,125
Actuarial gain/loss (+/–)		1,076		342		–136		–253		162		1,191
Employer contributions		1,305		387		213		49		122		2,076
Employee contributions		—		14		4		—		12		30
Pension payments		—		–122		–75		–115		–125		–437
Settlements		—		—		—		—		—		—
Business combinations		—		—		–1		—		–11		–12
Other		–1		—		90		—		–2		87
Translation difference		—		38		–144		–152		367		109
Closing balance		10,927		5,336		2,406		1,974		2,563		23,206

1) Business combinations in 2010 are related to the acquisition of LG-Nortel.

127

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Refunds from or reductions in future contributions to plan assets are recognized if they are available and firmly decided.

Actual return on plan assets

	Sweden		UK		Euro zone		US		Other		Total
2010		733		587		246		233		211		2,010
2009		1,441		612		–10		–97		370		2,316

Asset allocation

	Sweden		UK		Euro zone		US		Other		Total
2010
Equities		4,326		2,028		1,277		1,134		458		9,223
Interest-bearing securities		7,508		3,207		970		870		1,837		14,392
Other		555		456		267		44		498		1,820
Total		12,389		5,691		2,514		2,048		2,793		25,435
Of which Ericsson securities		—		—		—		—		—		—
2009
Equities		3,824		1,825		1,094		1,069		394		8,063
Interest-bearing securities		7,103		2,801		1,051		741		1,747		13,586
Other		—		710		261		164		422		1,557
Total		10,927		5,336		2,406		1,974		2,563		23,206
Of which Ericsson securities		—		—		—		—		—		—

Equity instruments amount to 36 (35) percent of the total assets, interest bearing instruments amount to 57 (59) percent of the total assets, and other instruments amount to 7 (6) percent of the total assets.

The contributions to the defined benefit plans for the upcoming year will be based on the development of the financial markets as well as on the growth of the pension liability, and how these developments affect the target funding ratio of the Company.

SECTION FIVE: ACTUARIAL GAINS AND LOSSES REPORTED DIRECTLY IN OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

Actuarial gains and losses reported directly in other comprehensive income

	2010		2009
Cumulative gain/loss (–/+) at beginning of year		5,326		5,402
Recognized gain/loss (–/+) during the year		–3,514		–70
Translation difference		37		–6
Cumulative gain/loss (–/+) at end of year		1,849		5,326

Since January 1, 2006, Ericsson applies immediate recognition of actuarial gains and losses directly in the statement of Other Comprehensive Income. Actuarial gains and losses may arise from either a change in actuarial assumptions or in deviations between estimated and actual outcome.

128

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Actuarial gains/losses (–/+) related to IFRIC 14 “The Limit on a Defined Benefit Asset, Minimum Funding Requirements and their Interaction”, had an effect on other comprehensive income amounting to SEK 29 million in 2010 (SEK 662 million in 2009). For further details, see Note C12, “Financial Assets, Non-Current”.

Multi-year summary

	2010		2009		2008		2007		2006
Plan assets		25,435		23,206		19,037		20,236		18,395
DBO		28,710		30,717		28,010		25,226		24,612
Deficit/Surplus (–/+)		–3,275		–7,511		–8,973		–4,990		–6,217
Actuarial gains and losses (–/+)
Experience-based adjustments of pension obligations		177		310		57		–76		232
Experience-based adjustments of plan assets		–653		–1,191		2,952		59		–358

SECTION SIX: ACTUARIAL ASSUMPTIONS

Actuarial assumptions

	Sweden			UK			Euro zone1)			US1)			Other1)
2010
Discount rate		4.80	%		5.40	%		5.59	%		5.73	%		8.55	%
Expected return on plan assets for the year		4.55	%		6.00	%		6.27	%		7.00	%		9.91	%
Future salary increases		3.25	%		4.50	%		2.91	%		4.50	%		5.70	%
Inflation		2.00	%		3.50	%		2.00	%		2.50	%		3.50	%
Health care cost inflation, current year		n/a			n/a			n/a			9.00	%		n/a
Life expectancy after age 65 in years, males		21			22			22			18			19
Life expectancy after age 65 in years, females		24			24			25			20			22
2009
Discount rate		4.00	%		5.60	%		5.26	%		5.89	%		8.91	%
Expected return on plan assets for the year		4.55	%		6.00	%		6.31	%		7.00	%		9.34	%
Future salary increases		3.25	%		4.90	%		2.92	%		4.50	%		6.77	%
Inflation		2.00	%		3.60	%		2.17	%		2.50	%		3.80	%
Health care cost inflation, current year		n/a			n/a			n/a			9.00	%		n/a
Life expectancy after age 65 in years, males		21			21			22			18			18
Life expectancy after age 65 in years, females		24			24			25			20			22

1) Weighted average.

• Actuarial assumptions are assessed on a quarterly basis.

• The discount rate for each country is determined by reference to market yields on high-quality corporate bonds.

• The overall expected long-term return on plan assets is a weighted average of each asset category’s expected rate of return. The expected return on interest-bearing investments is set in line with each country’s market yield. Expected return on equities is derived from each country’s risk free rate with the addition of a risk premium.

• Salary increases are partially affected by fluctuations in inflation rate.

129

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

• The net periodic pension cost and the present value of the DBO for current and former employees are calculated using the Projected Unit Credit (PUC) actuarial cost method, where the objective is to spread the cost of each employee’s benefits over the period that the employee works for the Company.

Sensitivity analysis for medical benefit schemes

The effect (in SEK million) of a one percentage point change in the assumed trend rate of medical cost would have the following effect:

Sensitivity analysis for medical benefit schemes

	1 percent increase		1 percent decrease
Net periodic post-employment medical cost		3		–3
Accumulated post-employment benefit obligation for medical costs		54		–46

SECTION SEVEN: INFORMATION ON ISSUES AFFECTING THE NET PENSION LIABILITY FOR THE YEAR

Sweden

In 2010, The Swedish defined benefit obligation has been calculated using a discount rate based on yields of covered bonds, which is higher than a discount rate based on yields of government bonds. The Swedish covered bonds are considered high quality bonds, mainly AAA-rated, as they are secured with assets, and the market for covered bonds is considered deep and liquid, thereby meeting IAS19 requirements.

As before, Ericsson has secured the disability- and survivors’ pension part of the ITP Plan through an insurance solution with the insurance company Alecta. Although this part of the plan is classified as a multi-employer defined benefit plan, it has not been possible for Ericsson to get sufficient information to apply defined benefit accounting, and therefore, it has been accounted for as a defined contribution plan.

Alecta has a collective funding ratio which is a buffer for its insurance commitments to protect against fluctuations in investment return and insurance risks. Alecta’s target ratio is 140 percent and reflects the fair value of Alecta’s plan assets as a percentage of plan commitments, then measured in accordance with Alecta’s actuarial assumptions, which are different from those in IAS 19. Alecta’s collective funding ratio was 146 in 2010 (141 in 2009).

130

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

C18    PROVISIONS

Provisions

	Warranty		Restructuring		Project related		Other		Total
2010
Opening balance		2,533		4,299		1,694		3,905		12,431
Additions		1,743		2,640		1,285		1,046		6,714
Reversal of excess amounts		–297		–335		–353		–869		–1,854
Negative effect on Income Statement										4,860
Cash out/Utilization		–1,466		–3,261		–1,547		–880		–7,154
Balances regarding divested/acquired businesses		182		—		28		—		210
Reclassification		–182		176		62		–200		–144
Translation differences		–44		–289		–64		–62		–459
Closing balance		2,469		3,230		1,105		2,940		9,744
2009
Opening balance		1,931		3,830		3,794		4,795		14,350
Additions		2,141		4,920		1,952		2,129		11,142
Reversal of excess amounts		–171		–210		–451		–915		–1,747
Negative effect on Income Statement										9,395
Cash out/Utilization		–1,427		–4,248		–3,459		–1,595		–10,729
Balances regarding divested/acquired businesses		96		—		—		16		112
Reclassification		19		146		–128		–595		–558
Translation differences		–56		–139		–14		70		–139
Closing balance		2,533		4,299		1,694		3,905		12,431

Provisions will fluctuate over time depending on business mix, market mix as well as technology shifts. Risk assessment in the ongoing business is performed monthly to identify the need for new additions and reversals. Management uses its best judgment to estimate provisions based on this assessment. In certain circumstances, provisions are no longer required due to more favorable outcomes than anticipated, which affect the provisions balance as a reversal. In other cases the outcome can be negative, and if so, a charge is recorded in the income statement.

For 2010, new or additional provisions amounting to SEK 6.7 billion were made, and SEK 1.9 billion were reversed. The actual cash outlays for 2010 was SEK 7.2 billion compared with the estimated SEK 8 billion. The expected cash outlays in 2011 is approximately SEK 8 billion.

Of the total provisions, SEK 353 (461) million are classified as non-current. For more information, see Note C1, “Significant Accounting Policies” and Note C2, “Critical Accounting Estimates and Judgments”.

Warranty provisions

Warranty provisions are based on historic quality rates for established products as well as estimates regarding quality rates for new products and costs to remedy the various types of faults predicted. The actual cash outlays for 2010 was SEK 1.5 billion and in line with the expected SEK 2 billion. Provisions amounting to SEK 1.7 billion were made and due to more favorable outcomes in certain cases reversals of SEK 0.3 billion were made. The cash outlays of warranty provisions during year 2011 is estimated to approximately SEK 2 billion.

131

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Restructuring provisions

The cost reduction program initiated in the first quarter 2009 was completed by the second quarter 2010. The total restructuring charges for the program was SEK 15.5 billion of which SEK 6.9 billion were provided for as restructuring provisions. In the second half of the year the cost reduction continued and primarily relates to continuous efficiency activities in service delivery and development, transformation in managed services contracts and product rationalization. In 2010 SEK 2.6 billion (4.9) in provision were made. The cash outlays were 3.3 billion (4.2) for the full year and SEK 0.7 billion were related to restructuring programs before 2009. The cash outlay for 2011 is estimated to approximately SEK 3 billion.

Project related provisions

Project provisions relate to estimated losses on onerous contracts, including probable contractual penalties. The cash outlays of project related provisions were SEK 1.5 billion and in line with the estimated SEK 1 billion. Provisions amounting to SEK 1.3 billion were made and SEK 0.4 billion were reversed due to a more favorable outcome than expected. The cash outlays for 2011 is estimated to be approximately SEK 1 billion.

Other provisions

Other provisions include provisions for tax issues, litigations, supplier claims, and other. The cash outlays was SEK 0.9 billion in 2010 compared to the estimate of SEK 2 billion. During 2010, new provisions amounting to SEK 1.0 billion were made and SEK 0.9 billion were reversed during the year due to a more favorable outcome. For 2011, the estimated cash outlays is approximately SEK 2 billion.

C19    INTEREST-BEARING LIABILITIES

As of December 31, 2010, Ericsson’s outstanding interest-bearing liabilities were SEK 30.8 (32.1) billion.

Interest-bearing liabilities

	2010		2009
Borrowings, current
Current part of non-current borrowings1)		760		684
Other current borrowings		3,048		1,440
Total current borrowings		3,808		2,124
Borrowings, non-current
Notes and bond loans		20,646		23,801
Other borrowings, non-current		6,309		6,195
Total non-current interest-bearing liabilities		26,955		29,996
Total interest-bearing liabilities		30,763		32,120

1) Including notes and bond loans of SEK 0 (0) million.

All outstanding notes and bond loans are issued by the Parent Company under its Euro Medium-Term Note (EMTN) program. Bonds issued at a fixed interest rate are swapped to a floating interest rate using interest rate swaps, resulting in a weighted average interest rate of 2.65 (2.88) percent at December 31, 2010. These bonds are revalued based on changes in benchmark interest rates according to the fair value hedge methodology stipulated in IAS 39.

132

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

On December 23, 2010, the USD 625 million bilateral loan with Swedish Export Credit Corporation (SEK) was renegotiated to reduce interest expense and to prolong the maturity profile. USD 325 million was amortized. The remaining USD 300 million will mature in 2016 according to the original plan. At the same time a new bilateral bond of USD 170 million was issued with maturity 2020. Consequently gross cash was reduced by USD 155 million. The new bond is not guaranteed by EKN (The Swedish Export Credit Guarantee Board).

In 2008 Ericsson signed a seven year loan of SEK 4.0 billion with the European Investment Bank. The loan supports Ericsson’s R&D activities to develop the next generation of mobile broadband technology at sites in Kista, Gothenburg and Linköping in Sweden.

Notes and bond loans

Issued–maturing	Nominal amount		Coupon			Currency		Book value (SEK m.)			Maturity date (yy-mm-dd)			Unrealized hedge gain/loss (incl. in book value)
2004-2012		450		2.420	%		SEK		450			12-12-07	2)
2007-2012		1,000		5.100	%		SEK		1,035			12-06-29			–35
2007-2012		2,000		2.200	%		SEK		2,000			12-06-29	3)
2007-2014		375		1.314	%		EUR		3,383			14-06-27	4)
2007-2017		500		5.380	%		EUR		5,059	1)		17-06-27			–571
2009-2013		600		5.000	%		EUR		5,521	1)		13-06-24			–129
2009-2016		300		3.35281	%		USD		2,041			16-06-23	5)
2010-2020		170		2.69281	%		USD		1,157			20-12-23	6)
Total									20,646						–735

1) Interest rate swaps are designated as fair value hedges.

2) Next contractual repricing date 2011-06-03 (semi annual).

3) Next contractual repricing date 2011-03-25 (quarterly).

4) Next contractual repricing date 2011-03-24 (quarterly).

5) Next contractual repricing date 2011-03-21 (quarterly).

6) Next contractual repricing date 2011-03-18 (quarterly).

C20    FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT AND FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

Ericsson’s financial risk management is governed by a policy approved by the Board of Directors. The Finance Committee of the Board of Directors is responsible for overseeing the capital structure and financial management of the Company and approving certain matters (such as acquisitions, investments, customer finance commitments, guarantees and borrowing) and is continuously monitoring the exposure to financial risks.

Ericsson defines its managed capital as the total Company equity. For Ericsson, a robust financial position with a strong equity ratio, investment grade rating, low leverage and ample liquidity is deemed important. This provides financial flexibility and independence to operate and manage variations in working capital needs as well as to capitalize on business opportunities.

Ericsson’s overall capital structure should support the financial targets: to grow faster than the market, deliver best-in-class margins and generate a healthy cash flow. The capital structure is managed by balancing equity, debt financing and liquidity in such a way that the Company secure funding of operations at a reasonable cost of capital. Regular borrowings are complemented with committed credit facilities to give additional flexibility to manage unforeseen funding needs. Ericsson strive to finance growth, normal capital expenditures and dividends to shareholders by generating sufficient positive cash flows from operating activities.

133

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Ericsson’s capital objectives are:

• An equity ratio above 40 percent.

• A cash conversion rate above 70 percent.

• To maintain a positive net cash position.

• To maintain a solid investment grade rating by Moody’s and Standard & Poor’s.

Capital objectives related information

	2010		2009
Capital (SEK billion)		147		141
Equity ratio (percent)		52		52
Cash conversion rate (percent)		112		117
Positive net cash (SEK billion)		51.3		36.1
Credit rating
Moody’s		Baa1		Baa1
Standard & Poor’s		BBB+		BBB+

Ericsson has a treasury function with the principal role to ensure that appropriate financing is in place through loans and committed credit facilities, to actively manage the Company’s liquidity as well as financial assets and liabilities, and to manage and control financial risk exposures in a manner consistent with underlying business risks and financial policies. Hedging activities, cash management and insurance management are largely centralized to the treasury function in Stockholm.

Ericsson also has a customer finance function with the main objective to find suitable third-party financing solutions for customers and to minimize recourse to Ericsson. To the extent customer loans are not provided directly by banks, the Parent Company provides or guarantees vendor credits. The customer finance function monitors the exposure from outstanding vendor credits and credit commitments.

Ericsson classifies financial risks as:

• Foreign exchange risk

• Interest rate risk

• Credit risk

• Liquidity and refinancing risk

• Market price risk in own and other equity instruments.

The Board of Directors has established risk limits for defined exposures to foreign exchange and interest rate risks as well as to political risks in certain countries.

For further information about accounting policies, please see Note C1, “Significant Accounting Policies”.

Foreign exchange risk

Ericsson is a global company with sales mainly outside Sweden. Revenues and costs are to a large extent in currencies other than SEK and therefore the financial results of the Company are impacted by currency fluctuations.

134

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Ericsson reports the financial accounts in SEK and movements in exchange rates between currencies will affect:

• Specific line items such as Net sales and Operating income.

• The comparability of our results between periods.

• The carrying value of assets and liabilities.

• Reported cash flows.

Net sales and Operating Income are affected by changes in foreign exchange rates from two different kinds of exposures, translation exposure and transaction exposure. In the Operating Income we are primarily exposed to transaction exposure which is partially addressed by hedging.

Currency exposure

Exposure currency	Translation exposure		Transaction exposure		Net exposure		Net exposure, percent of total
Net sales
USD		46.6		40.8		87.4		43	%
EUR		27.4		10.5		37.9		19	%
CNY		13.5		–0.3		13.2		6	%
JPY		8.8		0.6		9.4		5	%
INR		8.3		–1.1		7.2		4	%
GBP		7.8		–1.5		6.3		3	%
BRL		5.9		–0.2		5.7		3	%
SEK		41.7		–37.6		4.1		2	%
Other		42.2		–11.2		31.0		15	%
Pre-hedge total		202.2		0.0		202.2		100	%
Hedge						1.1
Total Net sales						203.3
Net cost
USD		–45.9		–14.7		–60.6		33	%
SEK		–32.8		–15.3		–48.1		26	%
EUR		–25.8		–4.5		–30.3		16	%
CNY		–12.8		1.1		–11.7		6	%
INR		–9.0		3.6		–5.4		3	%
BRL		–5.9		0.7		–5.2		3	%
JPY		–8.4		4.3		–4.1		2	%
GBP		–7.5		6.8		–0.7		0	%
Other		–37.9		18.0		–19.9		11	%
Pre-hedge total		–186.0		0.0		–186.0		100	%
Hedge						–0.8
Total Net cost						–186.8
Operating income						16.5

135

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Translation exposure

Translation exposure relates to Sales and Cost of Sales in foreign entities when translated into SEK upon consolidation. These exposures can not be addressed by hedging, but as the Income Statement is translated using average rate, the impact of volatility in foreign currency rates is reduced.

Transaction exposure

Transaction exposure relates to Sales and Cost of sales in non-reporting currencies in individual group companies. Foreign exchange risk is as far as possible concentrated to Swedish group companies, primarily Ericsson AB. Sales to foreign subsidiaries are normally denominated in the functional currency of the receiving entity, and export sales from Sweden to external customers are normally denominated in USD or other foreign currency. In order to limit the exposure toward exchange rate fluctuations on future revenues and costs, committed and forecasted future sales and purchases in major currencies are hedged, for the coming 6–12 months.

According to Company policy, transaction exposure in subsidiaries’ balance sheets (i.e. trade receivables and payables and customer finance receivables) should be fully hedged, except for non-tradable currencies. Group Treasury has a mandate to leave selected transaction exposures in subsidiaries’ balance sheets unhedged up to an aggregate Value at Risk (VaR) of SEK 20 million, given a confidence level of 99 percent and a 1-day horizon.

Foreign exchange exposures in balance sheet items are hedged through offsetting balances or derivatives.

As of December 31, 2010, outstanding foreign exchange derivatives hedging transaction exposures had a net market value of SEK 0.6 (0.3) billion. The market value is partly deferred in the hedge reserve in OCI to offset the gains/losses on hedged future sales in foreign currency.

Cash flow hedges

The purpose of hedging forecasted revenues and costs is to reduce volatility in the income statement. Hedging is done by selling or buying foreign currencies against the functional currency of the hedging entity using FX forwards.

Hedging is done based on a rolling 12-month exposure forecast. Ericsson uses a layered hedging approach, where the closest quarters are hedged to a higher degree than later quarters. Each consecutive quarter is hereby hedged on several occasions and is covered by an aggregate of hedging contracts initiated at various points in time, which supports the objective of reducing volatility in the income statement from changes in foreign exchange rates.

Translation exposure in net assets

Ericsson has many subsidiaries operating outside Sweden with other functional currencies than SEK. The results and net assets of such companies are exposed to exchange rate fluctuations, which affect the consolidated income statement and balance sheet when translated to SEK. Translation risk related to forecasted results from foreign operations can not be hedged, but net assets can be addressed by hedging.

136

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Translation exposure in foreign subsidiaries is hedged according to the following policy established by the Board of Directors:

Translation risk related to net assets in foreign subsidiaries is hedged up to 20 percent in selected companies. The translation differences reported in OCI during 2010 were negative, SEK 3.7 billion, including hedging gain of SEK 0.4 billion.

Interest rate risk

Ericsson is exposed to interest rate risk through market value fluctuations in certain balance sheet items and through changes in interest revenues and expenses. The net cash position was SEK 51.3 (36.1) billion at the end of 2010, consisting of cash, cash equivalents and short-term investments of SEK 87.2 (76.7) billion and interest-bearing liabilities and post-employment benefits of SEK 35.9 (40.7) billion.

Ericsson manages the interest rate risk by (i) matching fixed and floating interest rates in interest-bearing balance sheet items and (ii) avoiding significant fixed interest rate exposure in Ericsson’s net cash position. The policy is that interest-bearing assets shall have an average interest duration between 10 and 14 months and interest-bearing liabilities an average interest duration shorter than 6 months, taking derivative instruments into consideration. Treasury has a mandate to deviate from the asset management benchmark given by the Board and take FX positions up to an aggregate risk of VaR SEK 30 million given a confidence level of 99 percent and a 1-day horizon.

As of December 31, 2010, 97 (88) percent of Ericsson’s interest-bearing liabilities and 90 (61) percent of Ericsson’s interest-bearing assets had floating interest rates, i.e. interest periods of less than 12 months.

When managing the interest rate exposure, Ericsson uses derivative instruments, such as interest rate swaps. Derivative instruments used for converting fixed rate debt into floating rate debt are designated as fair value hedges.

Fair value hedges

The purpose of fair value hedges is to hedge the variability in the fair value of fixed-rate debt (issued bonds) from changes in the relevant benchmark yield curve for its entire term by converting fixed interest payments to a floating rate (e.g. STIBOR or LIBOR) by using interest rate swaps (IRS). The credit risk/spread is not hedged.

The fixed leg of the IRS is matched against the cash flows of the hedged bond. Hereby the fixed-rate bond/debt is converted into a floating-rate debt in accordance with the policy.

137

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Outstanding derivatives¹⁾

	2010					2009
Fair value	Asset		Liability			Asset			Liability
Currency derivatives
Maturity within 3 months		581		1,086			580			500
Maturity between 3 and 12 months		945		505			910			423
Maturity 1 to 3 years		2		21			90			44
Maturity 3 to 5 years		—		—			84			—
Maturity more than 5 years		—		—			3			—
Total currency derivatives		1,528		1,613	2)		1,666	3)		967
Of which designated in cashflow hedge relations		662		—			96			—
Of which designated in net investment hedge relations		—		3			—			62
Interest rate derivatives
Maturity within 3 months		6		28			—			—
Maturity between 3 and 12 months		76		61			28			40
Maturity 1 to 3 years		544		118			49			151
Maturity 3 to 5 years		184		34			175			40
Maturity more than 5 years		705		87			685			58
Total interest rate derivatives		1,515		329	2)		937	3)		289
Of which designated in fair value hedge relations		862		—			845			—

1) Some of the derivatives with short maturities are recognized in the balance sheet as non-current due to hedge accounting.

2) Of which SEK 902 million is reported as non-current liabilities.

3) Of which SEK 843 million is reported as non-current assets.

Sensitivity analysis

Ericsson uses the VaR methodology to measure foreign exchange and interest rate risks in portfolios managed by Treasury. This statistical method expresses the maximum potential loss that can arise with a certain degree of probability during a certain period of time. For the VaR measurement, Ericsson has chosen a probability level of 99 percent and a 1-day time horizon. The daily VaR measurement uses market volatilities and correlations based on historical daily data (one year).

The average VaR calculated for 2010 was for the interest rate mandate SEK 20.3 (14.3) million and for the transaction exposure mandate SEK 9.8 (13.9) million. No VaR-limits were exceeded during 2010.

Financial credit risk

Financial instruments carry an element of risk in that counterparts may be unable to fulfill their payment obligations. This exposure arises in the investments in cash, cash equivalents, short-term Investments and from derivative positions with positive unrealized results against banks and other counterparties.

Ericsson mitigates these risks by investing cash primarily in well-rated securities such as treasury bills, government bonds, commercial papers, and mortgage covered bonds with short-term ratings of at least A-1/P-1 and long-term ratings of AAA. Separate credit limits are assigned to each counterpart in order to minimize risk

138

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

concentration. We have had no sub-prime exposure in our investments. All derivative transactions are covered by ISDA netting agreements to reduce the credit risk. No credit losses were incurred during 2010, neither on external investments nor on derivative positions.

At December 31, 2010, the credit risk in financial cash instruments was equal to the instruments’ carrying value. Credit exposure in derivative instruments was SEK 3.0 (2.6) billion.

Liquidity risk

Liquidity risk is that Ericsson is unable to meet its short-term payment obligations due to insufficient or illiquid cash reserves.

Ericsson minimizes the liquidity risk by maintaining a sufficient net cash position. This is managed through centralized cash management, investments in highly liquid interest-bearing securities, and by having sufficient committed credit lines in place to meet potential funding needs. For information about contractual obligations, please see Note C32, “Contractual obligations”. The current cash position is deemed to satisfy all short-term liquidity requirements.

During 2010, cash and bank and short-term investments increased by SEK 10.5 billion to SEK 87.2 billion. The increase was mainly due to positive operating cash flow.

Cash, cash equivalents and short-term investments

	Remaining time to maturity
(SEK billion)	< 3 months		< 1 year		1–5 years		>5 years		Total
Bank Deposits		29.4		0.1		—		—		29.5
Type of issuer/counterpart
Governments		—		9.3		23.5		2.9		35.7
Banks		1.5		—		4.0		—		5.5
Corporations		—		—		—		—		—
Mortgage institutes		—		—		15.3		1.2		16.5
2010		30.9		9.4		42.8		4.1		87.2
2009		31.8		2.6		34.4		7.9		76.7

The instruments are either classified as held for trading or as assets available for sale with maturity less than one year and therefore short-term investments. Cash, Cash Equivalents and short-term investments are mainly held in SEK unless off-set by EUR-funding.

Refinancing risk

Refinancing risk is the risk that Ericsson is unable to refinance outstanding debt at reasonable terms and conditions, or at all, at a given point in time.

139

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Repayment schedule of long-term borrowings¹⁾

Nominal amount (SEK billion)	Current maturities of long- term debt		Notes and bonds (non-current)		Liabilities to financial institutions (non-current)		Total
2011		0.8		—		—		0.8
2012		—		3.5		0.9		4.4
2013		—		5.4		—		5.4
2014		—		3.4		—		3.4
2015		—		—		4.1		4.1
2016		—		2.0		—		2.0
2017		—		4.5		—		4.5
2018		—		—		—		—
2019		—		—		—		—
2020		—		1.2		—		1.2
Total		0.8		20.0		5.0		25.8

1) Excluding finance leases reported in Note C27, “Leasing”.

Debt financing is mainly carried out through borrowing in the Swedish and international debt capital markets.

Bank financing is used for certain subsidiary funding and to obtain committed credit facilities.

Funding programs¹⁾

	Amount		Utilized		Unutilized
Euro Medium-Term Note program (USD million)		5,000		3,003		1,997
Euro Commercial Paper program (USD million)		1,500		—		1,500
Swedish Commercial Paper program (SEK million)		5,000		—		5,000
Long-term Committed Credit facility (USD million)		2,000		—		2,000
Indian Commercial Paper program (INR million)		5,000		3,200		1,800

1) There are no financial covenants related to these programs.

At year-end, Ericsson’s credit ratings remained at Baa1 (Baa1) by Moody’s and BBB+ (BBB+) by Standard & Poor’s, both considered to be “Solid Investment Grade”.

140

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Financial instruments carried at other than fair value

The fair value of the majority of the Company’s financial instruments are determined based on quoted market prices or rates. In the following tables, carrying amounts and fair values of financial instruments that are carried in the financial statements at other than fair values are presented. Assets valued at fair value through profit or loss showed a net gain of SEK 1.1 billion. For further information about valuation principles, please see Note C1, “Significant accounting policies”.

Financial instruments carried at other than fair value¹⁾

	Carrying amount				Fair value
SEK billion	2010		2009		2010		2009
Current maturities of non-current borrowings		0.8		0.7		0.8		0.7
Notes and bonds		20.6		23.8		20.5		22.8
Other borrowings non-current		5.1		4.8		5.0		4.0
Total		26.5		29.3		26.3		27.5

1) Excluding finance leases reported in Note C27, “Leasing”.

Financial instruments excluded from the tables, such as trade receivables and payables, are carried at amortized cost which is deemed to be equal to fair value. When a market price is not readily available and there is insignificant interest rate exposure affecting the value, the carrying value is considered to represent a reasonable estimate of fair value.

Market price risk in own shares and other listed equity investments

Risk related to our own share price

Ericsson is exposed to the development of its own share price through stock option and stock purchase plans for employees and synthetic share-based compensations to the Board of Directors. The obligation to deliver shares, or pay compensation amounts, under these plans is covered by holding Ericsson Class B shares as treasury stock and warrants for issuance of new Ericsson Class B shares or provisions. An increase in the share price will result in social security charges, which represents a risk to both income and cash flow. The cash flow exposure is fully hedged through the holding of Ericsson Class B shares as treasury stock to be sold to generate funds to cover also social security payments, and through the purchase of call options on Ericsson Class B shares. For further information about the stock option and stock purchase plans, please see note C29, “Information Regarding Members of the Board of Directors, the Group Management and Employees”.

141

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Financial instruments, carrying amounts

SEK billion	Customer finance C14		Trade receivables C14		Short-term investments		Cash equivalents		Borrowings C19		Trade payables C22		Other financial assets C12		Other current receivables C15		Other current liabilities C21		Other non- current liabilities		2010		2009
Assets at fair value through profit or loss		—		—		56.3		1.5		—		—		—		3.0		–1.0		–0.9		58.9		56.0
Loans and receivables		4.4		61.1		—		2.1		—		—		2.7		—		—		—		70.3		73.7
Available for sale assets		—		—		—		—		—		—		—		—		—		—		—		—
Financial liabilities at amortized cost		—		—		—		—		–30.8		–25.0		—		—		—		—		–55.8		–51.0
Total		4.4		61.1		56.3		3.6		–30.8		–25.0		2.7		3.0		–1.0		–0.9		73.4		78.7

C21    OTHER CURRENT LIABILITIES

Other current liabilities

	2010		2009
Income tax liabilities		2,228		1,890
Advances from customers		5,946		4,903
Liabilities to associated companies and joint ventures		115		152
Accrued interest		349		378
Accrued expenses, of which		31,463		29,957
Employee related		10,063		10,137
Supplier related		12,273		10,769
Other1)		9,127		9,051
Deferred revenues		11,415		8,267
Derivatives with a negative value2)		1,039		1,255
Other3)		6,050		5,727
Total		58,605		52,529

1) Major balance relates to accrued expenses for customer projects.

2) See Note C20, “Financial Risk Management and Financial Instruments”.

3) Includes items such as VAT and withholding tax payables and other payroll deductions, and liabilities for goods received where invoice is not yet received.

C22    TRADE PAYABLES

Trade payables

	2010		2009
Payables to associated companies and joint ventures		157		1,186
Other		24,802		17,678
Total		24,959		18,864

142

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

C23    ASSETS PLEDGED AS COLLATERAL

Assets pledged as collateral

	2010		2009
Chattel mortgages		191		167
Bank deposits		467		383
Total		658		550

C24    CONTINGENT LIABILITIES

Contingent liabilities

	2010		2009
Contingent liabilities		875		1,245
Total		875		1,245

Contingent liabilities assumed by Ericsson include guarantees of loans to other companies of SEK 25 (76) million. Ericsson has SEK 413 (542) million issued to guarantee the performance of a third party. All ongoing legal and tax proceedings have been evaluated, their potential economic outflows and probability estimated and necessary provisions made.

Financial guarantees for third party amounted to SEK 191 (52) million as of December 31, 2010. Maturity date for major part of the issued guarantees occurs in 2019 at latest.

Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB (SEMC) has been granted term loans and credit facilities of SEK 3,157 million, of which SEK 2,106 million were utilized as of December 31, 2010. The parent companies of Ericsson and Sony Corporation have issued guarantees for these term loans and credit facilities on a 50/50 basis, without joint responsibility. Thus Ericsson’s guaranteed amount is maximum SEK 1,579 million excluding interest. As of December 31, 2010, Ericsson’s part of the outstanding amount is SEK 1,037 million excluding accrued interest of SEK 16 million. Maturity dates for the issued guarantees are 2011 (SEK 1,128 million) and 2012 (SEK 451 million). See also Note C30, “Related Party Transactions”.

C25    STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS

Interest paid in 2010 was SEK 977 million (SEK 772 million in 2009, SEK 1,689 million in 2008) and interest received was SEK 1,083 million (SEK 1,900 million in 2009, SEK 2,375 million in 2008). Taxes paid, including withholding tax, were SEK 4,808 million (SEK 4,427 million in 2009, SEK 4,274 million in 2008).

Cash and cash equivalents includes cash of SEK 27,231 million (SEK 18,372 million in 2009) and temporary investments of SEK 3,633 million (SEK 4,426 million in 2009). For more information regarding the disposition of cash and cash equivalents and unutilized credit commitments, see Note C20, “Financial Risk Management and Financial Instruments”.

Cash restricted due to currency regulations or other legal restrictions in certain countries amounted to SEK 10,836 million (SEK 8,907 million in 2009, SEK 8,197 million in 2008).

143

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Adjustments to reconcile net income to cash

	2010		2009		2008
Property, plant and equipment
Depreciation		3,299		3,550		3,108
Impairment losses/reversals of impairments		–3		–48		–3
Total		3,296		3,502		3,105
Intangible assets
Amortization
Capitalized development expenses		664		647		1,726
Intellectual Property Rights, brands and other intangible assets		4,999		3,562		3,280
Total amortization		5,663		4,209		5,006
Impairments
Capitalized development expenses		49		157		562
Intellectual Property Rights, brands and other intangible assets		945		4,255		—
Total		6,657		8,621		5,568
Total depreciation, amortization and impairment losses on property, plant and equipment and intangible assets		9,953		12,123		8,673
Taxes		351		–1,011		1,032
Dividends from joint ventures/associated companies1)		119		70		3,863
Undistributed earnings in joint ventures/ associated companies1)		1,357		6,013		291
Gains/losses on sales of investments and operations, intangible assets and PP&E, net2)		–237		–910		–1,210
Other non-cash items2) 3)		947		571		1,669
Total adjustments to reconcile net income to cash		12,490		16,856		14,318

1) See also note C12, “Financial Assets, Non-Current”.

2) See also note C26, “Business Combinations”.

3) Refers mainly to unrealized foreign exchange, gains/losses on financial instruments.

Acquisitions/divestments of subsidiaries and other operations

	Acquisitions		Divestments
2010
Cash flow from business combinations1)		–3,286		454
Total		–3,286		454
2009
Cash flow from business combinations1)		–9,633		1,239
Capital contribution to joint venture		–9,688		—
Total		–19,321		1,239
2008
Cash flow from business combinations1)		–74		654
Other investments		—		1,256
Total		–74		1,910

1) See also note C26, “Business Combinations”.

144

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

C26    BUSINESS COMBINATIONS

Acquisitions and divestments

Acquisitions

Acquisitions 2008–2010

	2010			2009		2008
Cash		3,789			9,633		74
Total consideration		3,789			9,633		74
Acquisition-related costs		67	1)		—		—
Net asset acquired
Cash and cash equivalents		570			5		—
Property, plant and equipment		205			297		—
Intangible assets		3,825			5,832		–209
Investments in associates		138			—		—
Other assets		2,506			1,235		887
Provision, incl. post-employment benefits		–390			—		—
Other liabilities		–3,573			–1,270		278
Total identifiable net assets		3,281			6,099		956
Non-controlling interest		–748			—		—
Goodwill		1,256			3,534		–882
		3,789			9,633		74

1) Acquisition-related costs are included in Selling and administrative expenses in the consolidated income statement.

In 2010, Ericsson made acquisitions with a cash flow effect amounting to SEK 3,286 (9,633) million, primarily:

• inCode: On September 7, 2010, the Company announced that it had entered into an asset purchase agreement to acquire certain assets of inCode’s Strategy and Technology Group, a premier professional services firm providing strategic business and consulting services to leading North American telecommunications clients. inCode is consolidated by the Company as of September 30 2010. The purchase price was USD 12 million on a cash and debt free basis. The acquisition includes certain assets of inCode’s Strategy and Technology Group, including contracts, technology and intellectual property, and about 45 employees throughout the US and Canada.

• LG-Nortel: On April 21, 2010, the Company announced that it had entered into a share purchase agreement to acquire Nortel’s majority shareholding (50 percent + 1 share) in LG-Nortel, the joint venture of LG Electronics and Nortel Networks. In 2009, LG-Nortel generated approximately USD 650 million of sales. The purchase price was USD 234 million on a cash and debt free basis. The acquisition has significantly expanded the Company’s footprint in the Korean market and provided well established sales channel and strong R&D capability in the country. Furthermore, the acquisition provided the Company with an industrial base and the ability to build new customer relationships. Part of the acquisition costs is recognized as goodwill due to the competence acquired. The non-controlling interest is measured at the non-controlling interest’s share of the acquiree’s net assets. Net Sales for acquired LG-Nortel business amounted to approximately SEK 2,322 million for the period July 1 – December 31, 2010. If LG-Nortel had been consolidated from January 1, 2010, the sales had amounted

145

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

to approximately SEK 3,820 million. The acquired LG-Nortel business had a positive impact on the result. Approximately 1,300 employees were transferred. LG-Nortel is consolidated by the Company as of June 30, 2010, and is included in segment Networks. The new name of the joint venture is LG-Ericsson. Transaction costs for the acquisition amounted to SEK 24 million.

• Nortel GSM: On November 25, 2009, the Company announced it had entered to acquire certain assets of the Carrier Networks division of Nortel relating to Nortel’s GSM business in the US and Canada. Nortel GSM was consolidated by the Company as of March 31, 2010. The acquisition further strengthens the Company’s ability to serve North Americas leading wireless operators. The purchase was structured as an asset sale at a cash purchase price of USD 79 million on a cash and debt free basis. Approximately 350 employees were transferred to Ericsson. Transaction costs for the acquisition amounted to SEK 22 million

• Optimi: On December 22, 2010, the Company announced the acquisition of Optimi Corporation, a US-Spanish telecommunications vendor providing products and services within the networks optimization and management sector to leading clients in telecommunications. The purchase price was USD 99 million on a cash and debt free basis. Approximately 200 highly skilled professionals and a complete portfolio of services and tools were transferred to the Company. Optimi is consolidated by the Company as of December 31.

• Pride: On January 12, 2010, the Company announced it had acquired all shares in Italian Pride Spa, a consulting and systems integration company, operating in Italy. The purchase price was EUR 66 million on a cash and debt free basis. The aim was to further strengthen the Company’s offering in the systems integration and consultancy field. Pride employs about 1,000 employees. Goodwill is related to business footprint and critical mass in Systems Integration. Pride is consolidated by the Company as of January 29, 2010.

The preliminary purchase price allocation made in 2009 related to Nortel CDMA were finalized 2010 with the following effects: An increase in inventory of SEK 114 million, a decrease in other assets of SEK 191 million, an increase of other liabilities of SEK 67 million, an increase of intangible assets of SEK 281 MSEK and a decrease in goodwill of SEK 137 million.

Nortel CDMA business (2009)

Net assets acquired	Book value		Fair value adjustments		Fair value
Intangible assets
Intellectual property rights		—		4,979		4,979
Customer relationships		—		811		811
Goodwill		—		2,957		2,957
Other assets and liabilities
Inventory		187		—		187
Property, plant and equipment		261		—		261
Other assets		392		—		392
Other liabilities		–1,242		—		–1,242
Total purchase price						8,345
Less:
Cash and cash equivalents		—		—		—
Cash flow effect						8,345

146

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

The determination of purchase price allocation and fair values of assets acquired and liabilities assumed is based on preliminary appraisal; therefore, these values may be subject to adjustments.

Divestments

Divestments 2008–2010

	2010		2009		2008
Cash		454		1,239		654
Net assets disposed of
Property, plant and equipment		21		5		3
Other assets		372		586		1,005
Other liabilities		–183		–38		–456
		210		553		552
Net gains from divestments		357		780		296
Less Cash and cash equivalents		–113		–94		–194
Cash flow effect		454		1,239		654

In 2010, the Company made divestments with a cash flow effect amounting to SEK 454 (1,239) million.

• Ericsson Federal Inc. (EFI): On January 3, 2011, the Company announced the completion of the sale of 100 percent of the shares in EFI to Tailwind Capital, a private equity firm focused on growing companies. EFI was consolidated by the Company until the sale in the end of December 2010. The sale resulted in a gain amounting to SEK 216 million and a cash flow effect of SEK 360 million.

Divestments in 2009 refer mainly to TEMS with a gain amounting to SEK 777 million and a cash flow effect of SEK 926 million.

TEMS business (2009)

Net assets disposed of	2009
Property, plant and equipment		5
Other assets		276
Other liabilities		–38
		243
Net gains from divestments		777
Less:
Cash and cash equivalents		94
Cash flow effect		926

147

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Acquisitions 2008–2010

Company	Description	Date of announcement
Optimi	A US-Spanish telecommunications vendor providing products and services within the networks optimization and management sector with around 200 employees.	Dec 22, 2010
inCode	An asset purchase agreement of certain assets with around 45 employees. A premier professional services firm providing strategic business and consulting services.	Sep 7, 2010
LG-Nortel	Nortel’s majority shareholding (50 percent + 1 share) in LG-Nortel with around 1,300 employees.	Apr 21, 2010
Pride	Italian consulting and systems integration company with around 1,000 employees.	Jan 12, 2010
Nortel GSM	An asset purchase agreement of the Carrier Networks division of Nortel relating to GSM business.	Nov 25, 2009
Nortel	An asset purchase agreement of the Carrier networks division of Nortel relating to CDMA and LTE technology.	Nov 13, 2009
Elcoteq	Estonian electronics manufacturing service company with around 1,200 employees.	June 17, 2009
Bizitek	Turkish systems integrator of business support systems with around 116 employees.	May 28, 2009
Mobeon	Swedish company. Acquisition of shares.	Mar 31, 2008

Divestments 2008–2010

Company	Description	Date of announcement
EFI	Sale of Ericsson Federal Inc. (EFI).	Jan 3, 2011
TEMS	Tools for air interface monitoring and radio network planning.	Mar 23, 2009
Enterprise	PBX solutions business.	May 1, 2008

148

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

C27    LEASING

Leasing with the Company as lessee

Assets under finance leases, recorded as property, plant and equipment, consist of:

Finance leases

	2010		2009
Acquisition costs
Real estate		1,846		1,942
Machinery		3		4
		1,849		1,946
Accumulated depreciation
Real estate		–687		–662
Machinery		–3		–4
		–690		–666
Accumulated impairment losses
Real estate		–54		–49
Net carrying value		1,105		1,231

As of December 31, 2010, future minimum lease payment obligations for leases were distributed as follows:

Future minimum lease payment obligations for leases

	Finance leases		Operating leases
2011		155		3,097
2012		153		2,586
2013		151		1,754
2014		230		1,203
2015		131		722
2016 and later		997		2,216
Total		1,817		11,578
Future finance charges1)		–568		n/a
Present value of finance lease liabilities		1,249		11,578

1) Average effective interest rate on lease payables is 5.87 percent.

Expenses in 2010 for leasing of assets were SEK 3,675 (3,839) million, of which variable expenses were SEK 51 (0) million. The leasing contracts vary in length from 1 to 18 years.

The Company’s lease agreements normally do not include any contingent rents. In the few cases they occur, they relate to charges for heating linked to the oil price index. Most of the leases of real estate contain terms of renewal, giving the company the right to prolong the agreement in question for a predefined period of time. All of the finance leases of facilities contain purchase options. Only a very limited number of the Company’s lease agreements contain restrictions on stockholders’ equity or other means of finance. The major agreement contains a restriction stating that the Parent Company must maintain a stockholders’ equity of at least SEK 25 billion.

149

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Leases with the Company as lessor

Leasing income mainly relates to subleasing of real estate. These leasing contracts vary in length from 1 to 11 years.

At December 31, 2010, future minimum payment receivables were distributed as follows:

Future minimum payment receivables

	Finance leases		Operating leases
2011		—		52
2012		—		13
2013		—		13
2014		—		13
2015		—		13
2016 and later		—		38
Total		—		142
Unearned financial income		—		n/a
Uncollectible lease payments		—		n/a
Net investments in financial leases		—		n/a

Leasing income in 2010 was SEK 94 (181) million.

C28    TAX ASSESSMENT VALUES IN SWEDEN

Tax assessment values in Sweden

	2010		2009
Land and land improvements		65		58
Buildings		295		265
Total		360		323

150

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

C29    INFORMATION REGARDING MEMBERS OF THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS, THE GROUP MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEES

CONTENTS

REMUNERATION TO THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS	151
REMUNERATION TO THE GROUP MANAGEMENT	153
LONG-TERM VARIABLE REMUNERATION	155
EMPLOYEE NUMBERS, WAGES AND SALARIES	160

REMUNERATION TO THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS

Remuneration to members of the board of directors

	Board fees		Number of synthetic shares/ portion of Board fee			Value at grant date of synthetic shares allocated 2010 A		Number of previously allocated synthetic shares		Net change in value of allocated synthetic shares1) B		Committee fees		Total fees paid in cash2) C			Total remuneration 2010 (A+B+C)
Board member
Michael Treschow		3,750,000		32,856/75	%		2,812,474		79,070.80		948,927		250,000		1,359,509	3)		5,120,910
Marcus Wallenberg		750,000		2,190/25	%		187,464		5,270.80		63,256		125,000		687,500			938,220
Sverker Martin-Löf		750,000		0/0	%		—		—		—		—		750,000			750,000
Roxanne S. Austin		750,000		6,571/75	%		562,478		15,813.60		189,779		250,000		437,500			1,189,756
Sir Peter L. Bonfield		750,000		2,190/25	%		187,464		5,270.80		63,256		250,000		812,500			1,063,220
Börje Ekholm		750,000		6,571/75	%		562,478		15,813.60		189,779		125,000		312,500			1,064,756
Ulf J. Johansson		750,000		6,571/75	%		562,478		15,813.60		189,779		350,000		615,357	3)		1,367,613
Nancy McKinstry		750,000		4,380/50	%		374,928		13,097.60		167,534		125,000		500,000			1,042,462
Anders Nyrén		750,000		0/0	%		—		—		—		125,000		875,000			875,000
Carl-Henric Svanberg		750,000		4,380/50	%		374,928		—		–32,631		—		375,000			717,297
Hans Vestberg		—		—			—		—		—		—		—			—
Michelangelo Volpi		750,000		4,380/50	%		374,928		—		–32,631		—		375,000			717,297
Employee Representatives
Monica Bergström		4,500		—			—		—		—		—		4,500			4,500
Pehr Claesson		15,000		—			—		—		—		—		15,000			15,000
Kristina Davidsson		15,000		—			—		—		—		—		15,000			15,000
Anna Guldstrand		15,000		—			—		—		—		—		15,000			15,000
Jan Hedlund		15,000		—			—		—		—		—		15,000			15,000
Karin Lennartsson		10,500		—			—		—		—		—		10,500			10,500
Karin Åberg		15,000		—			—		—		—		—		15,000			15,000
Total		11,340,000		70,089			5,999,618		150,150.80		1,747,048		1,600,000		7,189,866			14,936,533	4)

1) The difference in value as of December 31, 2010, compared to December 31, 2009 (for synthetic shares allocated 2008 and 2009), and compared to grant date 2010 (for synthetic shares allocated 2010). The value of synthetic shares allocated in 2008 and 2009 includes respectively SEK 1.85 and SEK 2.00 per share in compensation for dividends resolved by the Annual General Meetings 2009 and 2010.

2) Committee fee and cash portion of the Board fee.

3) Including an amount corresponding to statutory social charges in respect of the part of the fee that has been invoiced through a limited liability company.

4) Excluding social security charges in the amount of SEK 3,077,266

151

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Comments to the table

• The Chairman of the Board was entitled to a Board fee of SEK 3,750,000 and a fee of SEK 125,000 for each Board committee on which he served.

• The other Directors appointed by the Annual General Meeting were entitled to a fee of SEK 750,000 each. In addition, each non-employed Director serving on a Board committee received a fee of SEK 125,000 for each committee. However, the Chairman of the Audit Committee received a fee of SEK 350,000 and the other non-employed members of the Audit Committee received a fee of SEK 250,000 each.

• Members of the Board, who are not employees of the Company, have not received any remuneration other than the fees and synthetic shares as above. None of the directors have entered into a service contract with the Parent Company or any of its subsidiaries, providing for termination benefits.

• Members and Deputy Members of the Board who are Ericsson employees received no remuneration or benefits other than their entitlements as employees. However, a fee of SEK 1,500 per attended Board meeting was paid to each employee representative on the Board and their deputies.

• According to new rules it has been possible for Board members fulfilling certain criteria to invoice the amount of the Board and Committee fee. The Board member is allowed to add to the invoice an amount corresponding to social charges. The social charges thus included in the invoiced amount are not higher than the general payroll tax that would otherwise have been paid by the Company. The entire amount, e.g. the cash portion of the Board fee and the committee fee, including social charges, constitutes the invoiced Board fee

• The Annual General Meeting 2010 resolved that non-employed Directors may choose to receive the Board fee, (i.e. exclusive of committee fee) as follows: i) 25 percent of the Board fee in cash and 75 percent in the form of synthetic shares, with a value corresponding to 75 percent of the Board fee at the time of allocation, ii) 50 percent in cash and 50 percent in the form of synthetic shares, or iii) 75 percent in cash and 25 percent in the form of synthetic shares. Directors may also choose not to participate in the synthetic share program and receive 100 percent of the Board fee in cash. Committee fees are always paid in cash.

The number of synthetic shares is based on a volume-weighed average of the market price of Ericsson Class B shares on the NASDAQ OMX Stockholm exchange during the five trading days immediately following the publication of Ericsson’s interim report for the first quarter of 2010: SEK 85.60. The number of synthetic shares is rounded down to the nearest whole number of shares.

The synthetic shares are vested during the Directors’ term of office and the right to receive payment with regard to the allocated synthetic shares occurs after the publication of the Company’s year-end financial statement during the fifth year following the Annual General Meeting which resolved on the synthetic share program, i.e. in 2015.

The amount payable shall be determined based on the volume-weighed average price for shares of Class B during the five trading days immediately following the publication of the year-end financial statement.

Synthetic shares were allocated to members of the Board for the first time 2008, on equal terms and conditions as resolved 2009 and 2010. Payment based on synthetic shares may thus occur for the first time in 2013 with respect to the synthetic shares allocated 2008. The value of all outstanding synthetic shares fluctuates in line with the market value of Ericsson’s Class B share and may differ from year to year compared to the

152

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

original value on their respective grant dates. The change in value of the outstanding synthetic shares is established each year and affects the total recognized costs that year. As per December 31, 2010 the total number of synthetic shares under the programs is 220,239.80 and the total accounted debt is SEK 17,649,112.

REMUNERATION TO THE GROUP MANAGEMENT

Remuneration costs

The total remuneration to the President and CEO and to other members of the Group management, hereafter presented as the Executive Leadership Team (ELT) includes fixed salary, short-term and long-term variable remuneration, pension and other benefits. These remuneration elements are based on the guidelines for remuneration and other employment conditions for senior management as approved at AGM 2010, see the approved guidelines in section “2010 Remuneration Policy”.

Remuneration costs incurred during 2010 for the President and CEO and other members of Executive Leadership Team

SEK	The President		Other members of ELT		Total 2010		Total 2009
Salary		12,573,789		84,697,698		97,271,487		61,653,309
Provisions for annual variable remuneration earned 2010 to be paid 2011		6,737,556		26,592,809		33,330,365		21,364,557
Long-term variable remuneration provision		1,253,262		6,467,584		7,720,846		3,172,351
Pension costs		5,586,760		24,994,073		30,580,833		47,573,897
Other benefits		80,962		4,142,484		4,223,446		2,423,437
Social charges and taxes		7,842,186		30,246,918		38,089,103		36,674,431
Total		34,074,515		177,141,565		211,216,080		172,861,982

Comments to the table

• As of January 1, 2010, Hans Vestberg was appointed President and CEO.

• During 2010, there were two Executive Vice Presidents, appointed by the Board of Directors. None of them has acted as deputy to the President and CEO during the year. The Executive Vice Presidents are included in the group “Other members of ELT”.

• The group “Other members of ELT” comprises the following persons: Jan Frykhammar, Johan Wibergh, Jan Wäreby, Magnus Mandersson, Cesare Avenia, Carl Olof Blomqvist, Håkan Eriksson, Douglas Gilstrap, Henry Sténson, Marita Hellberg (up to June 30), Torbjörn Possne (up to September 30), Rima Qureshi (from February 1), Mats H. Olsson (from February 8), Angel Ruiz (from February 8) and Bina Chaurasia (from November 15).

• Included in “salary” for the President and CEO is vacation pay and a one-off cost of SEK 2 million in connection with changing the terms and conditions of the President and CEO’s long-term variable remuneration arrangements 2010.

• The ELT has a significantly different composition compared to 2009, with more diversity as to nationalities, gender and experience, both on local contracts as well as expatriate contracts. To be able to attract and retain, decisions on long-term compensation commitments have been made during 2010, cost for these commitments are included in salary for other members of ELT. For 2009 there were no such commitments.

153

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

• The salary stated in the table for other members of the ELT includes vacation pay paid during 2010 as well as other contracted compensation which were paid during 2010 or provisioned for 2010. Deferred salary, earned 2010 to be paid 12 months or later after period end amounts to SEK 6,097,404.

• “Long-term variable remuneration provisions” refers to the compensation costs during 2010 for all outstanding share-based plans. For a description of compensation cost, including accounting treatment, see Note C1, “Significant Accounting Policies”, section Share-based compensation to employees and the Board of Directors.

• For the President and CEO and other members of ELT employed in Sweden a supplementary plan is applied in addition to the occupational pension plan for salaried staff on the Swedish labor market (ITP) with pension from 60 years. These pension plans are not conditional upon future employment at Ericsson.

• Ericsson’s commitments for benefit based pensions per December 31, 2010, under IAS 19 amounted to SEK 5,177,173 for the President and CEO which includes ITP plan and temporary disability and survivor’s pension. For other members of ELT the Company’s commitments amounted to SEK 45,368,650 of which SEK 35,087,673 refers to the ITP plan and the remaining SEK 10,280,977 to temporary disability and survivor’s pensions.

• For previous Presidents and CEOs, the Company has made provisions for defined benefit pension plans in connection with their active service periods within the Company.

Outstanding matching rights

As per December 31, 2010 Number of Class B shares	The President		Other members of ELT
Stock Purchase Plans 2007, 2008, 2009 and 2010 and Executive Performance Stock Plans 2008, 2009 and 2010		142,373		687,562

Comments to the table

• For the definition of matching rights, see description in section “Long-term variable remuneration”.

• The number of matching rights is based on maximum performance matching under Executive Performance Stock Plans, 2008, 2009 and 2010 for all members of ELT during 2010.

• 2007 award lapsed for the Performance Stock Plan, so for 2007 only the matching under the Stock Purchase Plan is included in outstanding matching rights.

• During 2010, the President and CEO received 2,314 matching shares and other members of ELT 17,093 matching shares.

2010 Remuneration policy

Remuneration at Ericsson is based on the principles of performance, competitiveness and fairness. These principles and good practice in Sweden guide our policy to:

• Attract and retain highly competent, performing and motivated people that have the ability, experience and skill to deliver on the Ericsson strategy.

• Encourage behavior consistent with Ericsson’s culture and core values of professionalism, respect and perseverance.

154

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

• Ensure fairness in reward by delivering total remuneration that is appropriate but not excessive.

• Ensure a total compensation mix of fixed and variable remuneration and benefits that reflects the Company’s principles and is competitive where Ericsson competes for talent.

• Encourage variable remuneration which, first, aligns employees with clear and relevant targets, second, reinforces performance and, third, enables flexible remuneration costs.

• Ensure that all variable remuneration plans have maximum award and vesting limits.

• Encourage employees to deliver sustained performance and build up a personal shareholding in Ericsson, aligning the interests of shareholders and employees.

• Communicate clearly to both employees and shareholders how Ericsson translates remuneration principles and policy into practice.

Group Management

For senior management consisting of the Executive Leadership Team, including the President and CEO, in the following referred to as the “Group Management”, total remuneration consists of fixed salary, short- and long-term variable remuneration, pension and other benefits. Furthermore, the following guidelines apply for Group Management:

• Variable remuneration is through cash and stock-based programs awarded against specific business targets derived from the long-term business plan approved by the Board of Directors. Targets may include financial targets at either corporate or unit level, operational targets, employee motivation targets and customer satisfaction targets.

• With the current composition of Group Management, the Company’s cost during 2010 for the variable remuneration of Group Management can, at a constant share price, amount to between 0 and 140 percent of the aggregate fixed salary cost, all excluding social security costs.

• All benefits, including pension benefits, follow the competitive practice in the home country taking total compensation into account. The retirement age is normally 60 to 65 years of age.

• By way of exception, additional arrangements can be made when deemed required. Such additional arrangement shall be limited in time and shall not exceed a period of 36 months and two times the remuneration that the individual concerned would have received had no additional arrangement been made.

• The mutual notice period may be no more than six months. Upon termination of employment by the Company, severance pay amounting to a maximum of 18 months fixed salary is paid. Notice of termination given by the employee due to significant structural changes, or other events that in a determining manner affect the content of work or the condition for the position, is equated with notice of termination served by the Company.

LONG-TERM VARIABLE REMUNERATION

The stock purchase plan

The Stock Purchase Plan is designed to offer an incentive for all employees to participate in the Company where practicable, which is consistent with industry practice and with our ways of working. For the 2010 plan employees are able to save up to 7.5 percent (President and CEO 10 percent) of gross fixed salary (President and CEO gross fixed salary and annual variable remuneration) for purchase of Class B contribution shares at market

155

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

price on the NASDAQ OMX Stockholm or ADS’s (American Depositary Share) at NASDAQ (contribution shares) during a twelve-month period (contribution period). If the contribution shares are retained by the employee for three years after the investment and the employment with the Ericsson Group continues during that time, the employee’s shares will be matched with a corresponding number of Class B shares or ADS’s free of consideration. Employees in 94 countries participate in the plans.

The table below shows the contribution periods and participation details for ongoing plans as of December 31, 2010.

Stock purchase plans

Plan	Contribution period		Number of participants at launch		Take-up rate–percent of all employees
Stock Purchase plan 2007		August 2007–July 2008		19,000		26	%
Stock Purchase plan 2008		August 2008–July 2009		19,000		25	%
Stock Purchase plan 2009		August 2009–July 2010		18,000		25	%
Stock Purchase plan 2010		August 2010–July 2011		22,000		27	%

Participants save each month, beginning with August payroll, towards quarterly investments. These investments (in November, February, May and August) are matched on the third anniversary of each such investment, subject to continued employment, and hence the matching spans over two financial years and two tax years.

The key contributor retention plan

The Key Contributor Retention Plan is part of Ericsson’s talent management strategy and is designed to give recognition for performance, critical skills and potential as well as encourage retention of key employees. Under the program, up to 10 percent of employees (2010: 7,201 employees) are selected through a nomination process that identifies individuals according to performance, critical skills and potential. Participants selected obtain one extra matching share in addition to the ordinary one matching share for each contribution share purchased under the Stock Purchase Plan during a twelve-month program period.

Executive performance stock plans

Plan	Base year EPS1)		Target average annual EPS growth range2)		Matching share vesting range3)		Maximum opportunity as  percentage of fixed salary4)
Executive Performance Stock Plan 20075)		8.83		5% to 15%		0.67 to 4 1 to 6 1.33 to 8		30 45 72	%  %  %
Executive Performance Stock Plan 2008		4.43		5% to 15%		0.67 to 4 1 to 6 1.33 to 8		30 45 72	%  %  %
Executive Performance Stock Plan 2009		2.90		5% to 15%		0.67 to 4 1 to 6 1.33 to 8		30 45 72	%  %  %
Executive Performance Stock Plan 2010		1.14		5% to 15%		0.67 to 4 1 to 6 1.5 to 9		30 45 162	%  %  %

156

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

1) Sum of four quarters up to June 30 of plan years, up to and including 2009. For 2010 plan the sum of 4 quarters up to December 31, 2010.

2) EPS range found from three-year average EPS of the twelve quarters to the end of the performance period and corresponding growth targets.

3) Corresponding to EPS range (no Performance Share Plan matching below this range). Matching shares per contribution share invested in addition to Stock Purchase Plan matching according to program of up to 4, 6 or 9 matching shares.

4) At full investment, full vesting and constant share price. Excludes Stock Purchase Plan matching.

5) The 2007 Executive Performance Stock Plan did not vest. All awards have also lapsed for the matching share vesting range 1.33 to 8 shares for the 2008 and 2009 plans following the only participant, the former President and CEO, leaving the Company.

The executive performance stock plan

The Executive Performance Stock Plan is designed to focus the management on driving earnings and provide competitive remuneration. Senior executives, including ELT, are selected to obtain up to four or six extra shares (performance matching shares) in addition to the ordinary one matching share for each contribution share purchased under the Stock Purchase Plan. Up to 0.5 percent of employees (2010: 264 executives) are offered to participate in the plan. The President and CEO is allowed to invest up to 10 percent of fixed salary and Short-Term Variable Remuneration in contribution shares and may obtain up to nine performance matching shares in addition to the Stock Purchase Plan matching share for each contribution share. The performance matching is subject to the fulfillment of a performance target of average annual Earnings per Share (EPS) growth. The table shows all Executive Performance Stock Plans as per December 31, 2010.

157

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Shares for all plans

Plan (million shares)	Originally designated1) A		Outstanding beginning of 2010 B		Awarded during  2010 C		Exercised/ matched during 2010 D		Forfeited/ expired during 2010 E		Outstanding end of 2010 F=B+C-D-E			Compensation costs charged during 2010 (MSEK) G
2006 Stock Purchase Plan, Key Contributor Retention Plan and Executive Performance Stock Plans		6.4		3.3		—		2.7		0.6		—			18	3)
2007 Stock Purchase Plan, Key Contributor Retention Plan and Executive Performance Stock Plans		9.7		8.6		—		1.4		0.1		7.1	2)		130	3)
2008 Stock Purchase Plan, Key Contributor Retention Plan and Executive Performance Stock Plans		16.5		11.3		—		0.1		0.2		11.0	2)		247	3)
2009 Stock Purchase Plan, Key Contributor Retention Plan and Executive Performance Stock Plans		22.4		2.5		7.6		0.1		0.1		9.9	2)		351	3)
2010 Stock Purchase Plan, Key Contributor Retention Plan and Executive Performance Stock Plans		19.4		—		3.0		—		—		3.0	2)		11	3)
Total		74.4		25.7		10.6		4.3		1.0		31.0			757	4)

1) Adjusted for rights offering and reverse split when applicable.

2) Presuming maximum performance matching under the Executive Performance Stock Plans. The 2006 and 2007 plans have lapsed.

3) Fair value is calculated as the share price on the investment date, reduced by the net present value of the dividend expectations during the three-year vesting period. Net present value calculations are based on data from external party. Fair value is also adjusted for participants failing to keep hold of their contribution shares during the vesting period. For shares under the Executive Performance Stock Plans, the Company assesses the probability of meeting the performance targets when calculating the compensation cost. Fair value of the Class B share at each investment date during 2010 was: February 15 SEK 64.47, May 15 SEK 75.26, August 15 SEK 67.44 and November 15 SEK 62.57.

4) Total compensation costs charged during 2009: SEK 529 million, 2008: SEK 572 million.

158

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Shares for all plans

All plans are funded with treasury stock and are equity settled. Treasury stock for all plans has been issued in directed cash issues of Class C shares at the quotient value and purchased under a public offering at the subscription price plus a premium corresponding to the subscribers’ financing costs, and then converted to Class B shares.

For all plans, additional shares have been allocated for financing of social security expenses. Treasury stock is sold on the NASDAQ OMX Stockholm to cover social security payments when arising due to matching of shares. During 2010, 669,700 shares were sold at an average price of SEK 77.09. Sale of shares is recognized directly in equity.

If, as of December 31, 2010, all shares allocated for future matching under the Stock Purchase Plan were transferred, and shares designated to cover social security payments were disposed of as a result of the exercise and the matching, approximately 50 million Class B shares would be transferred, corresponding to 1.5 percent of the total number of shares outstanding, 3,200 million. As of December 31, 2010, 73 million Class B shares were held as treasury stock.

The table above shows how shares (representing matching rights but excluding shares for social security expenses) are being used for all outstanding plans. From left to right the table includes (A) the number of shares originally approved by the Annual General Meeting, adjusted for reverse split where applicable; (B) the number of originally designated shares that were outstanding at the beginning of 2010; (C) the number of shares awards that were granted during 2010; (D) the number of shares matched during 2010; (E) the number of shares forfeited by participants or expired under the plan rules during 2010; (F) the balance left as outstanding at the end of 2010, having added new awards to the shares outstanding at the beginning of the year and deducted the shares related to awards matched, forfeited and expired. The final column (G) shows the compensation costs charged to the accounts during 2010 for each plan, calculated as fair value in SEK.

For a description of compensation cost, including accounting treatment, see Note C1, “Significant Accounting Policies”, section Share-based compensation to employees and the Board of Directors.

159

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

EMPLOYEE NUMBERS, WAGES AND SALARIES

Employee numbers

Average number of employees

	2010						2009
	Men		Women		Total		Men		Women		Total
North America		11,005		2,770		13,775		9,366		2,358		11,724
Latin America		5,326		1,328		6,654		5,876		1,254		7,130
Northern Europe & Central Asia1) 2)		15,227		5,821		21,048		16,271		6,082		22,353
Western & Central Europe2)		9,338		1,817		11,155		10,003		2,021		12,024
Mediterranean2)		9,034		2,670		11,704		7,956		2,403		10,359
Middle East		3,544		468		4,012		3,541		428		3,969
Sub Saharan Africa		1,331		359		1,690		1,716		412		2,128
India		5,783		835		6,618		3,818		370		4,188
China & North East Asia		6,867		2,948		9,815		4,897		2,113		7,010
South East Asia & Oceania		3,976		1,378		5,354		4,155		1,320		5,475
Total		71,431		20,394		91,825		67,599		18,761		86,360
1)      Of which Sweden		13,066		4,355		17,421		13,930		4,591		18,521
2)      Of which EU		32,045		9,843		41,888		32,970		10,055		43,025

Number of employees at year end

Employees by region	2010		2009
North America		13,498		11,222
Latin America		7,181		6,055
Northern Europe & Central Asia1)  2)		21,425		21,993
Western & Central Europe2)		10,818		11,622
Mediterranean2)		10,795		9,509
Middle East		3,982		3,744
Sub Saharan Africa		1,626		2,104
India		6,710		4,184
China & North East Asia		9,807		6,894
South East Asia & Oceania		4,419		5,166
Total		90,261		82,493
1)      Of which Sweden		17,848		18,217
2)      Of which EU		40,743		41,396

160

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Employees by gender and age at year end 2010

	Female			Male			Percent of total
Under 25 years old		1,385			3,911			6	%
26–35 years old		6,976			24,369			35	%
36–45 years old		7,317			26,135			37	%
46–55 years old		3,264			12,668			18	%
Over 55 years old		908			3,328			5	%
Percent of total		22	%		78	%		100	%

Number of employees related to cost of sales and operating expenses

	2010		2009		2008
Cost of sales		45,628		41,521		35,717
Operating expenses		44,633		40,972		43,023
Total		90,261		82,493		78,740

Employee movements

	2010		2009
Head count at year-end		90,261		82,493
Employees who have left the Company		10,066		9,147
Employees who have joined the Company		17,834		12,900
Temporary employees		978		693

Employee wages and salaries

Wages and salaries and social security expenses

	2010		2009
Wages and salaries		43,390		41,247
Social security expenses		13,793		13,630
Of which pension costs		3,091		3,588

Amounts related to the President and CEO and the Group Management Team are included.

161

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Wages and salaries per region

	2010		2009
North America3)		10,236		6,358
Latin America		2,269		2,181
Northern Europe & Central Asia1) 2)		11,464		11,918
Western & Central Europe2)		6,153		7,063
Mediterranean2)		5,053		5,619
Middle East		1,680		1,865
Sub Saharan Africa		849		974
India		881		674
China & North East Asia		2,923		2,393
South East Asia & Oceania		1,882		2,202
Total		43,390		41,247
1)      Of which Sweden		10,086		10,324
2)      Of which EU		21,858		23,734
3)      Of which the United States		8,098		4,928

Remuneration in foreign currency has been translated to SEK at average exchange rates for the year.

Remuneration to board members and presidents in subsidiaries

	2010		2009
Salary and other remuneration		289		315
Of which annual variable remuneration		43		42
Pension costs		29		34

Board members, presidents and group management by gender at year end

	2010						2009
	Females			Males			Females			Males
Parent Company
Board members and President		33	%		67	%		38	%		62	%
Group Management		14	%		86	%		8	%		92	%
Subsidiaries
Board members and Presidents		10	%		90	%		10	%		90	%

C30    RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

During 2010, various related party transactions were executed pursuant to contracts based on terms customary in the industry and negotiated on an arm’s length basis. For information regarding equity and Ericsson’s share of assets, liabilities and income in joint ventures and associated companies, see Note C12, “Financial Assets, Non-Current”. For information regarding transactions with senior management, see Note 29, “Information Regarding Members of the Board of Directors, the Group Management and Employees”.

162

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB (SEMC)

In October 2001, SEMC was established as a joint venture between Sony Corporation and Ericsson, and a substantial portion of Ericsson’s handset operations was sold to SEMC. The joint venture is headquartered in London, United Kingdom. As part of the formation of the joint venture, contracts were entered into between Ericsson and SEMC.

Major transactions are as follows:

• License revenues. Both owners of SEMC, Sony Corporation and Ericsson, receive license revenues for SEMC’s usage of trademarks and intellectual property rights. The decline in license revenues during 2009 is a consequence of the formation of ST-Ericsson.

• Purchases. Ericsson purchases mobile phones from SEMC to support contracts with a number of customers for mobile systems which also include limited quantities of phones.

• Dividends. Both owners of SEMC receive dividends, when so decided by the board of directors. During 2010 Ericsson received no dividends from SEMC.

Sony Ericsson mobile communications

	2010		2009		2008
Related party transactions
License revenues		1,255		1,746		5,856
Purchases		61		164		261
Ericsson’s share of dividends		—		—		3,627
Related party balances
Receivables		258		369		1,002
Liabilities		8		14		176

SEMC has been granted term loans and credit facilities of SEK 3,157 million, of which SEK 2,106 million were utilized as of December 31, 2010. The parent companies of Ericsson and Sony Corporation have issued guarantees for these term loans and credit facilities on a 50/50 basis, without joint responsibility. Thus Ericsson’s guaranteed amount is maximum SEK 1,579 million excluding interest. As of December 31, 2010, Ericsson’s part of the outstanding amount is SEK 1,037 million excluding accrued interest of SEK 16 million. Maturity dates for the issued guarantees are 2011 (SEK 1,128 million) and 2012 (SEK 451 million). See also Note C24, “Contingent Liabilities”.

ST-Ericsson

ST-Ericsson, the joint venture between Ericsson and STMicroelectronics, was formed on February 2, 2009, by merging Ericsson Mobile Platforms with ST-NXP Wireless. The joint venture is equally owned by Ericsson and STMicroelectronics. ST-Ericsson is an industry leader in design, development and the creation of cutting-edge mobile platforms and wireless semiconductors. ST-Ericsson is a key supplier to four of the industry’s top five handset manufacturers, who together represent about 80 percent of global handset shipments, as well as to other leading companies in the industry. The joint venture is headquartered in Geneva, Switzerland, and employs approximately 8,000 persons.

163

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Major transactions are as follows:

• Sales. Ericsson provides ST-Ericsson with services in the areas of R&D, HR, IT and facilities.

• Purchases. Major part of Ericsson’s purchases from ST-Ericsson consists of chipsets and R&D services.

• Dividends. Both owners of ST-Ericsson receive dividends, when so decided by the board of directors. During 2010 Ericsson received no dividends from ST-Ericsson.

ST-Ericsson

	2010		2009
Related party transactions
Sales		403		740
Purchases		629		624
Ericsson’s share of dividends		—		—
Related party balances
Receivables		53		244
Liabilities		48		365

ST-Ericsson has been granted a revolving credit facility of USD 200 million, which is equally shared by Ericsson and STMicroelectronics. As of December 31, 2010, the amount drawn on the facility was SEK 1,030 million. Each parent lent SEK 515 million.

Ericsson does not have any contingent liabilities, assets pledged as collateral or guarantees towards ST-Ericsson.

Ericsson Nikola Tesla d.d.

Ericsson Nikola Tesla d.d. is a joint stock company for design, sales and service of telecommunication systems and equipment, and an associated member of the Ericsson Group. Ericsson Nikola Tesla d.d. is located in Zagreb, Croatia. Ericsson holds 49.07 percent of the shares.

Major transactions are as follows:

• Sales. Ericsson sells telecommunication equipment to Ericsson Nikola Tesla d.d.

• License revenues. Ericsson receives license revenues for Ericsson Nikola Tesla d.d.’s usage of trademarks.

• Purchases. Ericsson purchases development resources from Ericsson Nikola Tesla d.d.

• Dividends. Ericsson received dividends from Ericsson Nikola Tesla d.d. during 2010.

164

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

Ericsson Nikola Tesla d.d.

	2010		2009		2008
Related party transactions
Sales		563		654		1,020
License revenues		2		7		9
Purchases		566		569		547
Ericsson’s share of dividends		104		66		227
Related party balances
Receivables		120		93		85
Liabilities		75		70		58

Ericsson does not have any contingent liabilities, assets pledged as collateral or guarantees toward Ericsson Nikola Tesla d.d.

C31    FEES TO AUDITORS

Fees to auditors

	PwC		Others		Total
2010
Audit fees		79		5		84
Audit related fees		17		1		18
Tax services fees		16		2		18
Other fees		7		2		9
Total		119		10		129
2009
Audit fees1)		88		3		91
Audit related fees1)		18		—		18
Tax services fees		16		2		18
Other fees1)		3		2		5
Total		125		7		132
2008
Audit fees1)		88		4		92
Audit related fees1)		15		—		15
Tax services fees		14		2		16
Other fees1)		2		5		7
Total		119		11		130

1) Allocation of fees to auditors is based on the requirements in the Swedish Annual Accounts Act. 2008 and 2009 figures are restated for comparability.

During the period 2008–2010, in addition to audit services, PwC provided certain audit related services, tax and other services to the Company. The audit related services include quarterly reviews, SAS 70 reviews and services in connection with issuing of certificates and opinions. The tax services include general expatriate services and corporate tax compliance work. Other services include consultation on financial accounting, services related to acquisitions, operational effectiveness and assessments of internal control.

Audit fees to other auditors largely consist of local statutory audits for minor companies.

165

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

C32    CONTRACTUAL OBLIGATIONS

Contractual obligations 2010

	Payment due by period
SEK billion	<1 year		1–3 years		3–5 years		>5 years		Total 2010
Long-term debt1) 2)		1.6		10.7		7.9		8.1		28.3
Finance lease obligations3)		0.1		0.3		0.4		1.0		1.8
Operating leases3)		3.1		4.3		1.9		2.2		11.5
Other non-current liabilities		0.0		0.4		0.2		1.8		2.4
Purchase obligations4)		7.7		—		—		—		7.7
Trade Payables		25.0		—		—		—		25.0
Commitments for customer financing5)		3.3		—		—		—		3.3
Total		40.8		15.7		10.4		13.1		80.0

1) Including interest payments.

2) See also Note C20, “Financial Risk Management and Financial Instruments”.

3) See also Note C27, “Leasing”.

4) The amounts of purchase obligations are gross, before deduction of any related provisions.

5) See also Note C14, “Trade Receivables and Customer Financing”.

For information about financial guarantees, see Note C24, “Contingent Liabilities”

Except for those transactions described in this report, Ericsson has not been a party to any material contracts over the past three years other than those entered into during the ordinary course of business.

C33    EVENTS AFTER THE BALANCE SHEET DATE

On March 16, 2011, Ericsson made a statement regarding the situation in Japan following the earthquake on March 11.

The Company focuses on supporting customers in securing functionality of vital telecommunication services. Ericsson states that, as Japan is a large supplier to the global market for semiconductors and other components, it is reasonable to expect an effect on supply but it is too early to say to what extent. The situation in Japan is not expected to have material impact on Ericsson’s Q1 2011 sales.

166

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

RISK FACTORS

You should carefully consider all the information in this Annual Report and in particular the risks and uncertainties outlined below. Any of the factors described below, or any other risk factors discussed elsewhere in this report, could have a material negative effect on our business, operational and after-tax results, financial position, cash flow, liquidity, credit rating, brand and/or our share price. Furthermore, our operational results may have a greater variability than in the past and we may have difficulties in accurately predicting future developments. See also “Forward-Looking Statements”.

CONTENTS

MARKET, TECHNOLOGY AND BUSINESS RISKS	167
REGULATORY, COMPLIANCE AND CORPORATE GOVERNANCE RISKS	172
RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH OWNING ERICSSON SHARES	174

MARKET, TECHNOLOGY AND BUSINESS RISKS

Demand is difficult to predict

Adverse economic conditions could cause network operators to postpone investments or initiate other cost-cutting initiatives to improve their financial position. This could result in significantly reduced expenditures for network infrastructure and services, in which case our operating results would suffer. We have established flexibility to cost-effectively accommodate fluctuations in demand. However, if demand were to fall in the future, we may experience material adverse effects on our revenues, cash flow, capital employed and value of our assets and we may even incur operating losses. If demand is significantly weaker or more volatile than expected, this may have a material adverse impact on our credit rating, borrowing opportunities and costs as well as on the trading price of our shares. When deemed necessary, we undertake specific restructuring or cost saving initiatives, however, there are no guarantees that such initiatives are sufficient, successful or executed in time to deliver necessary improvements in earnings.

Some of the risk factors we are exposed to may exacerbate in an adverse condition in the financial market. Most of our customers are financially stable and have networks with good utilization. However, some operators, in particular in markets with weak currencies, may incur borrowing difficulties and lower traffic than expected, which may affect their investment plans. The potential adverse effects of an economic downturn include:

• Reduced demand for products and services, resulting in increased price competition or deferrals of purchases, with lower revenues not being possible to compensate with reduced costs.

• Risks of excess and obsolete inventories and excess manufacturing capacity and risk of financial difficulties or failures among our suppliers.

• Increased demand for customer finance, difficulties in collection of accounts receivable and increased risk of counterpart failures.

• Risk of impairment losses related to our intangible assets as a result of lower forecasted sales of certain products.

• Increased difficulties in forecasting sales and financial results as well as increased volatility in our reported results.

• Decline in the value of the assets in the Company’s pension plans.

167

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Short-term volatility has an impact

Our sales to network operators represent a mix of equipment, software and services, which normally generate different gross margins. Third party products normally have lower margins than own products. As a consequence, reported gross margin in a specific period will be affected by the overall mix of products and services as well as the relative content of third party products. Network expansions and upgrades have much shorter lead times for delivery than initial network buildouts. Such orders are normally placed with short notice by customers, i.e. less than a month, and consequently variations in demand are difficult to forecast. As a result, changes in our product and service mix may affect our ability to accurately forecast sales and margins or detect in advance whether actual results will deviate from market consensus.

Convergence brings opportunity and risk

We are affected by market conditions within the telecom industry, including the convergence of the telecom, data and media industries. The convergence is largely driven by technological development related to IP-based communications. This change increases our addressable market, changes the competitive landscape, and affects our objective setting, risk assessment and strategies. If we fail to understand the market development, acquire the necessary competence or develop and market products, services and solutions that are competitive in this changing market, our future results will suffer.

We depend on growth and the success of new services

Most of our business depends on continued growth in mobile communications in terms of both number of subscriptions and usage per subscriber, which in turn requires the continued deployment and evolution of our network systems by customers. If operators are not successful in their attempts to increase the number of subscribers and/or stimulate increased usage, our business and operational results could be materially adversely affected. Also, if operators experience a decline in ARPU or profitability despite the introduction of new non-voice services, their willingness for further investments will be reduced and thus adversely affect our business.

Fixed and mobile networks converge and new technologies, such as IP and broadband, enable operators to deliver a range of new types of services in both fixed and mobile networks. We are dependent upon the market acceptance of such services, e.g. music, internet and navigation in the handset, and on the outcome of regulatory and standardization activities in this field, such as spectrum allocation. If delays in standardization or market acceptance occur, this could adversely affect our business and operational results.

We operate in a highly competitive industry

The markets we operate in are highly competitive in price, functionality and service quality as well as in the timing of development and introduction of new products and services.

We face intense competition from significant competitors and Chinese companies in particular have become relatively stronger in recent years. Our competitors may implement new technologies before we do, offer more attractively priced or enhanced products, services or solutions, or they may offer other incentives that we do not provide. Some of our competitors may have greater resources in certain business segments or geographic markets than we do. We may also encounter increased competition from new market entrants, alternative technologies or evolving industry standards. The rapid technological change also results in shorter life-cycles for products, increasing the risk in all product investments.

Continuous price erosion is a symptom of this rapid technological change and we must counteract this by introducing new products to the market and by continuously enhancing the functionality while reducing the cost of new and existing products. Our operating results depend largely on our ability to compete in this market environment.

168

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Vendor consolidation may lead to a new competitive landscape

Industry convergence and consolidation among equipment suppliers could potentially result in stronger competitors that are competing as end-to-end suppliers as well as competitors more specialized in particular areas. Consolidation may also result in competitors with greater resources than we have or in reduction of our current scale advantages. This could have a material adverse effect on our business, operating results, and financial condition.

Operator consolidation may increase our dependence on a limited number of customers

We derive most of our business from large, multi-year agreements with a limited number of significant customers. Although no single customer currently represents more than 8 percent of sales, a loss of or a reduced role with a key customer could have a significant adverse impact on sales, profit and market share for an extended period.

In recent years, network operators have undergone significant consolidation, resulting in a large number of operators with activities in several countries. This trend is expected to continue, and also intra-country consolidation is likely to accelerate as a result of competitive pressure.

A market with fewer and larger operators will increase our reliance on key customers and may negatively impact our bargaining position and profit margins. Moreover, if the combined companies operate in the same geographic market, networks may be shared and less network equipment and associated services will be required. Another possible consequence of customer consolidation could be a delay in network investments pending negotiations of e.g. merger/acquisition agreements, securing necessary approvals, or integration of their businesses. Recently, network operators have started to share parts of their network infrastructure through cooperation agreements rather than legal consolidations, which may adversely affect demand for network equipment.

Long-term frame agreements can expose us to risk

Long-term agreements are typically awarded on a competitive bidding basis. In some cases, such agreements also include commitments to future price reductions. In order to maintain the gross margin with such price reductions, we continuously strive to reduce the costs of our products. We reduce costs through design improvements, negotiation of better purchase prices, allocation of more production to low-cost countries and increased productivity in our own production. However, there can be no assurance that our actions to reduce costs will be sufficient or quick enough to maintain our gross margin in such contracts.

Transforming into a more service-based company

Operators are increasingly outsourcing parts of their operations as a way to reduce cost and focus on new services. This has opened up a market which we have addressed. The growth rate is difficult to forecast and each new contract carries a risk that transformation and integration of the operations is not as fast or smooth as planned. Early contract margins are generally lower and the mix of new/old contracts may affect reported results negatively in a given period. Contracts normally cover several years and revenues are of a recurring nature. However, sometimes contract scopes are reduced with negative impact on sales and earnings. Ericsson is the market leader in managed services but competition in this area is increasing, which may have adverse effects on growth and profitability.

Success of R&D investments is uncertain

To be a player in our industry requires large investments in technology and creates exposure to rapid technological and market changes. We spend significant amounts and resources in innovation work for new

169

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

technology, products and solutions. In order for us to be successful, those technologies, products and solutions must be accepted by relevant standardization bodies and by the industry as a whole. If we invest in the development of technologies, products and solutions that do not function as expected, are not adopted by the industry, are not ready in time or are not successful in the marketplace our sales and earnings may suffer.

Acquisitions and divestments

In addition to in-house innovation efforts, we make strategic acquisitions in order to obtain various benefits, e.g. to reduce time-to-market, to gain access to technology and/or competence, to increase our scale or to broaden our product portfolio or expand our customer base. From time to time we also divest parts of our operations to optimize our product portfolio or operations. There are no guarantees that such acquisitions or divestments are successful or that we will succeed in integrating the acquired entities to gain the expected benefits within the time frame we expect or at all.

Joint ventures and partnerships

If our partnering arrangements fail to perform as expected (whether through an incorrect assessment of our needs or the capabilities or financial stability of our strategic partners), our ability to work with these partners or develop new products and solutions may be constrained and this may harm our competitive position in the market. Additionally, our share of any losses from, or commitments to contribute additional capital to, such partnerships may adversely affect our results of operations or financial position.

A limited number of suppliers of components, production capacity and R&D and IT services

Our ability to deliver according to market demands and contractual commitments depends significantly on obtaining timely and adequate supply of materials, components and production capacity and other vital services on competitive terms. Although we strive to avoid single-source supplier solutions, this is not always possible. Failure by any of our suppliers could interrupt our product supply or operations and significantly limit our sales or increase our costs. To find an alternative supplier or re-design products to replace components may take significant time. If we fail to anticipate customer demand properly, an over/under-supply of components and production capacity could occur. In many cases, some of our competitors utilize the same contract manufacturers and if they have purchased capacity ahead of us we could be blocked from acquiring the needed products. This factor could limit our ability to supply our customers or could increase our costs. At the same time, we commit to certain capacity levels or component quantities, which, if unused, will result in charges for unused capacity or scrapping costs. We are also exposed to financial counterpart risks to suppliers where we pay in advance. We conduct regular supplier audits and evaluations to mitigate the risks mentioned as well as brand risks related to the suppliers’ compliance with e.g. labor and environmental regulations.

Product or service quality issues

Sales contracts normally include warranty undertakings for faulty products and often also provisions regarding penalties and/or termination rights in the event of a failure to deliver ordered products or services on time or with required quality. Although we undertake a number of quality assurance measures to reduce such risks, product quality or service performance issues may affect our results negatively.

Significant foreign exchange exposures

With the majority of our cost base in SEK and a very large share of sales in other currencies, and significant operations outside Sweden, our foreign exchange exposures are significant. Currency exchange rate fluctuations affect our consolidated income statement, balance sheet and cash flows when foreign currencies are exchanged or translated to SEK, which increases volatility in reported results.

170

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

As market prices are predominantly established in USD or EUR, and with a net revenue exposure in foreign currencies, a stronger SEK exchange rate would generally have a negative effect on our reported results. Our attempts to reduce the effects of exchange rate fluctuations through a variety of hedging activities may not be sufficient or successful, resulting in an adverse impact on our results.

Intellectual property rights (IPR)

Although we have a large number of patents, there can be no assurance that they will not be challenged, invalidated, or circumvented, or that any rights granted in relation to our patents will in fact provide competitive advantages to us.

In 2005, the European Union considered placing restrictions on the patentability of software. Although the European Union ultimately rejected this proposal, we cannot guarantee that they will not revisit this issue in the future. We rely on many software patents, and any limitations on the patentability of software may materially affect our business.

We utilize a combination of trade secrets, confidentiality policies, non-disclosure and other contractual arrangements in addition to relying on patent, copyright and trademark laws to protect our intellectual property rights. However, these measures may not be adequate to prevent or deter infringement or other misappropriation. Moreover, we may not be able to detect unauthorized use or take appropriate and timely steps to establish and enforce our proprietary rights. In fact, existing laws of some countries in which we conduct business offer only limited protection of intellectual property rights, if at all.

Our solutions may also require us to license technologies from third parties. It may be necessary in the future to seek or renew licenses and there can be no assurance that they would be available on acceptable terms, or at all. Moreover, the inclusion in our products of software or other intellectual property licensed from third parties on a non-exclusive basis could limit our ability to protect proprietary rights in our products.

Many key aspects of telecommunications and data network technology are governed by industry-wide standards usable by all market participants. As the number of market entrants and the complexity of technology increases, the possibility of functional overlap and inadvertent infringement of intellectual property rights also increases. Third parties have asserted, and may assert in the future, claims, directly against us or indirectly against our customers, alleging infringement of their intellectual property rights. Defending such claims may be expensive, time-consuming and divert the efforts of our management and/or technical personnel. As a result of litigation, we could be required to pay damages and other compensation directly or indemnifying our customers for such damages and other compensation, develop non-infringing products/technology or enter into royalty or licensing agreements. However, we cannot be certain that such licenses will be available to us on commercially reasonable terms or at all.

Litigations

In the normal course of our business we are involved in legal proceedings. Litigation can be expensive, lengthy and disruptive to normal business operations. Moreover, the results of complex legal proceedings are difficult to predict. An unfavorable resolution of a particular lawsuit could have a material adverse effect on our business, reputation, operating results, or financial condition.

As a publicly listed company, Ericsson may be exposed to lawsuits, in which plaintiffs allege that the Company or its officers have failed to comply with securities laws, stock market regulation or other laws, regulations or requirements. Whether or not there is merit to such claims, the time and costs incurred to defend the Company and its officers and the potential settlement or compensation to the plaintiffs may have significant impact on our reported results and reputation. For additional information regarding certain of the lawsuits in which we are involved, see “Legal and Tax Proceedings” in the Board of Directors’ Report.

171

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Business interruption

Our business operations rely on complex operations and communications networks, which are vulnerable to damage or disturbance from a variety of sources. Having outsourced a significant portion of our IT operations, we depend partly on security and reliability measures of external companies. Regardless of protection measures, essentially all systems and communications networks are susceptible to disruption due to failure, vandalism, computer viruses, security breaches, natural disasters, power outages and other events. We also have a concentration of operations on certain sites, e.g. for R&D, production, network operation centers, logistic centers and shared services centers, where business interruptions could cause material damage and costs. Transport of goods from suppliers, and to customers, could also be hampered for the reasons stated above. Although we have assessed these risks, implemented controls, performed business continuity planning and selected reputable companies for outsourced services, we cannot be sure that interruptions with material adverse effects will not occur.

Attract and retain highly qualified employees

We believe that our future success largely depends on our continued ability to hire, develop, motivate and retain engineers and other qualified personnel needed to develop successful new products, support our existing product range and provide services to our customers. Competition for skilled personnel and highly qualified managers in the telecommunications industry remains intense. We are continuously developing our corporate culture, remuneration, promotion and benefit policies as well as other measures aimed at empowering our employees and reducing employee turnover. However, there are no guarantees that we will be successful in attracting and retaining employees with appropriate skills in the future.

Access to short-term and long-term capital

If we do not generate sufficient amounts of capital to support our operations, service our debt and continue our research and development and customer finance programs, or if we cannot raise sufficient amounts of capital at the times and on the terms required by us, our business is likely to be adversely affected. Access to short-term funding may decrease or become more expensive as a result of our operational and financial condition and market conditions or due to deterioration in our credit rating. We cannot assure that additional sources of funds that we from time to time may need will be available or available on reasonable terms.

REGULATORY, COMPLIANCE AND CORPORATE GOVERNANCE RISKS

Regulatory environment changes

Telecommunications is an industry subject to particular regulation and regulatory changes affect both our customers’ and our own operations. For example, regulations imposing more stringent, time-consuming or costly planning and zoning requirements or building approvals for radio base stations and other network infrastructure could adversely affect the timing and costs of network construction or expansion, and ultimately the commercial launch and success of these networks. Similarly, tariff and roaming regulations or rules on network neutrality could also affect operators’ ability or willingness to invest in network infrastructure, which in turn could affect the sales of our systems and services. Also radio frequency spectrum allocation between different types of usage may affect operator spending adversely or force us to develop new products to be able to compete.

License fees, environmental, health and safety, privacy and other regulatory changes, in general or particular to our industry, may increase costs and restrict operations for network operators and service providers or us. Also indirect impacts of such changes could affect our business adversely even though the specific regulations may not apply directly to our products or us.

172

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Country-specific political, economic and regulatory risks

We conduct business throughout the world and are subject to the effects of general global economic conditions as well as conditions unique to a specific country or region. We conduct business in more than 180 countries, with a significant proportion of our sales to emerging markets in Asia Pacific, Latin America, Eastern Europe, the Middle East and Africa. We expect that sales to such emerging markets will represent an increasing portion of total sales, as developing nations and regions around the world increase their investments in telecommunications. We already have extensive operations in many of these countries, which involve certain risks, including volatility in gross domestic product, civil disturbances, economic and political instability, nationalization of private assets and the imposition of exchange controls.

Changes in regulatory requirements, tariffs and other trade barriers, price or exchange controls or other governmental policies in the countries where we do business could limit our operations and make the repatriation of profits difficult. In addition, the uncertainty of the legal environment in some regions could limit our ability to enforce our rights. In addition we must comply with the export control regulations of the countries and any trade embargoes in force at the time of sale and/or delivery. Although we seek to comply with all such regulations, even unintentional violations could have material adverse effects on our business, operational results and brand.

Compliance with high standards of corporate governance

Ericsson applies mandatory corporate governance statutes and rules, such as the Swedish Corporate Governance Code and is also committed to several corporate responsibility and environmental initiatives. To ensure that our operations are executed in accordance with these requirements, our management system includes a robust corporate culture and a Code of Business Ethics as well as policies and directives to govern our processes and operations. We regularly perform communication and training in these areas, and we monitor and audit internal compliance with the policies and directives as well as our suppliers’ adherence to our Supplier Code of Conduct. There is however no guarantee that violations will not occur, which could have material adverse effects on our brand, reputation and business.

Compliance with environmental, health and safety regulations

We are subject to certain environmental, health and safety laws and regulations that affect our operations, facilities and products in each of the jurisdictions in which we operate. We believe that we are in compliance with all material laws and regulations. However, there is a risk that we may have to incur expenditures to cover environmental and health liabilities to maintain compliance with current or future laws and regulations or to undertake any necessary remediation. It is difficult to reasonably estimate the future impact of environmental matters, including potential liabilities. This is due to several factors, particularly the length of time often involved in resolving such matters.

Potential health risks related to electromagnetic fields

The mobile telecommunications industry is subject to claims that mobile handsets and other devices that generate electromagnetic fields expose users to health risks. At present, a substantial number of scientific studies conducted by various independent research bodies have indicated that electromagnetic fields, at levels within the limits prescribed by public health authority safety standards and recommendations, cause no adverse effects to human health. However, any perceived risk or new scientific findings of adverse health effects of mobile communication devices and equipment could adversely affect us through a reduction in sales or through liability claims. Although Ericsson’s products are designed to comply with all current safety standards and recommendations regarding electromagnetic fields, we cannot guarantee that we or the jointly owned Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications or ST-Ericsson will not become the subject of product liability claims or be held liable for such claims or be required to comply with future regulatory changes that may have an adverse effect on our business.

173

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH OWNING ERICSSON SHARES

Our share price has been and may continue to be volatile

Our share price has been volatile partly due to the high volatility in the securities markets generally and for telecommunications and technology companies in particular. The share price is also likely to be affected by the development in our market, our reported financial results and the expectations of financial analysts, as well as statements and market speculation regarding our future prospects or the timing or content of any profit warning by us or our competitors.

Factors other than our financial results that may affect our share price include, but are not limited to:

• A weakening of our brand name or other circumstances with adverse effects on our reputation

• Announcements by our customers, competitors or us regarding capital spending plans of network operators

• Financial difficulties for our customers

• Awards of large supply or service contracts

• Speculation in the press or investment community about the business level or growth in the market for mobile communications

• Technical problems, in particular those relating to the introduction and viability of new network systems like LTE/4G and new platforms such as the RBS 6000 (multi-standard radio base station) platform

• Actual or expected results of ongoing or potential litigation

• Announcements concerning bankruptcy or investigations into the accounting procedures of other telecommunications companies, even if we are not involved

• Our ability to forecast and communicate our future results in a manner consistent with investor expectations.

Currency fluctuations may adversely affect share value or value of dividends

Because our shares are quoted in SEK on NASDAQ OMX Stockholm (our primary stock exchange), but in USD on NASDAQ (ADSs), fluctuations in exchange rates between SEK and USD may affect the value of your investment. In addition, because we pay cash dividends in SEK, fluctuations in exchange rates may affect the value of distributions if arrangements with your bank, broker or depositary call for distributions to you in currencies other than SEK. An increasing part of the trade in our shares is carried out on alternative exchanges or markets, which may lead to less accurate share price information on NASDAQ OMX Stockholm or NASDAQ.

174

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS

This Annual Report includes forward-looking statements, including statements reflecting management’s current views relating to the growth of the market, future market conditions, future events and expected operational and financial performance. The words “believe”, “expect”, “foresee”, “anticipate”, “assume”, “intend”, “may”, “could”, “plan”, “estimate”, “will”, “should”, “could”, “aim”, “target”, “might” or, in each case, their negative, and similar words are intended to help identify forward-looking statements. Forward-looking statements may be found throughout this document, but in particular in the chapter “Board of Directors’ Report” and include statements regarding:

• our goals, strategies and operational or financial performance expectations;

• development of corporate governance standards, stock market regulations and related legislation;

• the growth of the markets in which we operate;

• our liquidity, capital resources, capital expenditures, our credit ratings and the development in the capital markets, affecting our industry or us;

• the expected demand for our existing as well as new products and services;

• the expected operational or financial performance of our joint ventures and other strategic cooperation activities;

• the time until acquired entities will be accretive to income;

• technology and industry trends including regulatory and standardization environment, competition and our customer structure;

• our plans for new products and services including research and development expenditures.

Although we believe that the expectations reflected in these and other forward-looking statements are reasonable, we cannot assure you that these expectations will materialize. Because forward-looking statements are based on assumptions, judgments and estimates, and are subject to risks and uncertainties, actual results could differ materially from those described or implied herein. Important factors that could affect whether and to what extent any of our forward-looking statements materialize include, but are not limited to:

• our ability to respond to changes in the telecommunications market and other general market conditions in a cost effective and timely manner;

• developments in the political, economic or regulatory environment affecting the markets in which we operate, including trade embargoes, changes in tax rates, changes in patent protection regulations, allegations of health risks from electromagnetic fields, cost of radio licenses for our customers, allocation of radio frequencies for different purposes and results of standardization activities;

• the effectiveness of our strategies and their execution, including partnerships, acquisitions and divestments;

• financial risks, including changes in foreign exchange rates or interest rates, lack of liquidity or access to financing, changes in tax liabilities, credit risks in relation to counterparties, customer defaults under significant customer finance arrangements and risks of confiscation of assets in foreign countries;

• the impact of the consolidation in the industry, and the resulting (i) reduction in the number of customers, and adverse consequences of a loss of, or significant decline in, our business with a major customer; (ii) increased strength of a competitor or the establishment of new competitors;

• the impact of changes in product demand, price erosion, competition from existing or new competitors or new technologies or alliances between vendors of different types of technology and the risk that our products and services may not sell at the rates or levels we anticipate;

175

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

• the product mix and margins of our sales;

• the volatility of market demand and difficulties to forecast such demand;

• our ability to develop commercially viable products, systems and services, to acquire licenses of necessary technology, to protect our intellectual property rights through patents and trademarks and to license them to others and defend them against infringement, and the results of patent litigation;

• supply constraints, including component or production capacity shortages, suppliers’ abilities to cost effectively deliver quality products on time and in sufficient volumes, and risks related to concentration of proprietary or outsourced production in a single facility or sole source situations with a single vendor;

• our ability to successfully manage operators’ networks to their satisfaction with satisfactory margins;

• our ability to maintain a strong brand and good reputation and to be acknowledged for good corporate governance;

• our ability to recruit and retain qualified management and other key employees.

Certain of these risks and uncertainties are described further in “Risk Factors”. We undertake no obligation to publicly update or revise any forward-looking statements included in this Annual Report, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise, except as required by applicable law or stock exchange regulation.

176

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

REMUNERATION REPORT

INTRODUCTION

This report outlines how the remuneration policy is implemented throughout Ericsson in line with corporate governance best practice, with specific references to Group management. To begin with, the work of the Remuneration Committee 2010 and the remuneration policy are explained, followed by descriptions of plans and approaches. This report also includes information on how the remuneration programs have been evaluated and conclusions from that. More details of the remuneration of Group management and Board members’ fees can be found in the Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—Note C29, “Information regarding members of the Board of Directors, the Group management and employees” (“Note C29”).

THE REMUNERATION COMMITTEE

The Remuneration Committee advises the Board of Directors on an ongoing basis on the remuneration of the Group management, hereafter referred to as the Executive Leadership Team (ELT). This includes fixed salaries, pensions, other benefits and short-term and long-term variable remuneration, all in the context of pay and employment conditions throughout Ericsson. The Remuneration Committee also approves variable remuneration outcomes, prepares remuneration related proposals for Board and shareholder approval and develops and monitors the remuneration policy, strategies and general guidelines for employee remuneration.

The Remuneration Committee’s work is the foundation for the governance of our remuneration processes together with our internal systems and audit controls. The Committee is chaired by Michael Treschow and its other members are Nancy McKinstry, Börje Ekholm and Karin Åberg. All the members are non-executive directors, independent (except for the employee representative) as required by the Swedish Corporate Governance Code and have relevant knowledge and experience of remuneration matters.

The Company’s General Counsel acts as secretary to the Committee. The Chief Executive Officer, the Senior Vice President Human Resources & Organization and the Vice President Compensation & Benefits attend the Remuneration Committee meetings by invitation and assist the Committee in its considerations, except when issues relating to their own remuneration are being discussed.

The Remuneration Committee has appointed an independent expert advisor, Gerrit Aronson, to assist and advise the Committee. Gerrit Aronson provided no other services to the Company during 2010. The Remuneration Committee is also provided with national and international pay data collected from external survey providers and can call on other independent expertise, should it so require. The Chairman continues to ensure that contact is maintained, as necessary and appropriate, with principal shareholders on the subject of remuneration.

The purpose and function of the Remuneration Committee will continue going forward and its responsibilities can be found on the Ericsson website (www.ericsson.com). These responsibilities, together with the remuneration policy, are reviewed and evaluated annually in light of matters such as changes to corporate governance best practice or changes to accounting, legislation, political opinion or business practices among peers. This helps to ensure that the policy continues to provide Ericsson with a competitive remuneration strategy. The policy for Group management remuneration is, in accordance with Swedish law, brought to shareholders annually for approval.

REMUNERATION 2010

The Remuneration Committee met nine times during the year. The winter meetings focused on following-up results from the 2009 variable remuneration programs and preparing proposals to shareholders for the 2010 Annual General Meeting (AGM). During winter and spring the committee considered the new Regional organization and new members in the Executive Leadership Team (ELT). In the fall the work began with a

177

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

review of the remuneration strategy with focus on the Long-Term Variable remuneration, the Short-Term Variable remuneration plans and levels of fixed compensation. Feedback from meetings with investors, market analysis and global trend analyses served as input to the remuneration strategy discussion. As is illustrated above, the Committee has also considered market trends, existing and potential remuneration risks, target setting, its working arrangements and corporate governance.

REMUNERATION POLICY

Remuneration at Ericsson is based on the principles of performance, competitiveness and fairness. Our remuneration policy together with the mix of remuneration elements are designed to reflect these remuneration principles by creating a balanced remuneration package. The policy for 2010 can be found in Note C29. The auditors’ opinion on how we have followed our policy during 2010 is posted on the website.

Evaluation of remuneration policy and plans

The Remuneration Committee has supported the Board with the review and evaluation of the remuneration policy and practice. As described later in this report, all remuneration elements and levels are evaluated through benchmarking against market data provided by external sources. Analyses of market data, as well as of attrition data, show that Ericsson is in general competitive in local markets and that total remuneration is appropriate but not excessive.

The remuneration policy is evaluated annually in light of the long-term strategy and the Remuneration Committee’s overview of total remuneration and each individual remuneration element. The Committee has concluded and the Board has decided that the remuneration policy remains valid and right for Ericsson and should not be materially changed for 2011.

Evaluation through employee surveys show that the common understanding of Ericsson’s remuneration policy could be improved. To enhance the understanding of how Ericsson translates remuneration principles and policy into practice, a Remuneration website has been launched in January 2011. This is a training program containing e-learning and training targeted at line managers to support more informed decisions and better communication to the wider employee population.

178

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Extensive analyses of local market data for each position in the Executive Leadership Team have been conducted and decisions on budget and increases for ELT have been taken by Remuneration Committee. The work is also reviewed by the independent advisor to the Committee.

The evaluation of Long-Term Variable remuneration plans concluded that the objectives of the Stock Purchase Plan to promote “One Ericsson” and align the interests of employees with those of shareholders have been successful. The participation rate has increased from 25 percent to 27 percent over the year. The evaluation conducted also confirms that the Key Contributor Retention Plan meets the purpose to retain our key employees, the voluntary attrition rate among Key Contributors being about two thirds compared to total number of employees.

A survey of Ericsson’s managers in January 2011 verified that over half of managers think the Long-Term Variable and Short-Term Variable remuneration plans are “effective” or “very effective” in meeting the purpose of the plans.

This confirms earlier third-party research that has shown that the Long-Term Variable plans drive the right values and enhance retention. The plans remain competitive by Swedish standards. The participation rate among Key Contributors remains high compared with international benchmarks.

However, the evaluation has also shown that the Executive Performance Stock Plan has had limited success in terms of meeting the purpose of rewarding long-term financial performance. The performance target has proved to be more binary than anticipated, where the 2004 program vested in full and the programs for 2005, 2006 and 2007 did not vest. Extensive work has been conducted to define how the plan should be developed and this has identified the need to secure clear targets that are more aligned with strategy and value creation. Based on this, the Board has evaluated targets and target levels to identify those that best support the long-term strategy and value creation of the company and will propose these targets for the 2011 Executive Performance Stock Plan to the AGM.

TOTAL REMUNERATION

When we consider the remuneration of an individual, it is the total remuneration that matters. We first consider the total annual cash compensation, looking at target level of short-term variable remuneration plus fixed salary. We then add target long-term variable remuneration to get total target remuneration and, finally, pension and other benefits to arrive at the total package.

For the ELT, remuneration consists of fixed salary, short-term and long-term variable remuneration, pension and other benefits. If the size of any one of these elements is increased or decreased, at least one other element has to change where the competitive position should remain unchanged.

The remuneration costs for the CEO and the ELT are reported in Note C29.

Fixed salary

Fixed salaries are set to be competitive within an individual’s home market. When setting fixed salaries the Remuneration Committee considers the impact on total remuneration, including pension and associated costs. The absolute levels are determined by the size and complexity of the position and the year-to-year performance of the individual. Together with other elements of remuneration, the ELT salaries are subject to an annual review by the Remuneration Committee, which considers external pay data to ensure that levels of pay remain competitive and appropriate to the remuneration policy.

179

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Variable remuneration

At Ericsson we strongly believe that, where possible, we should encourage variable compensation as integral part of total target remuneration approach. First and foremost this aligns employees with clear and relevant targets but it also enables more flexible payroll costs and emphasizes the link between performance and pay. All variable remuneration plans have maximum award and vesting limits.

Summaries of 2010 short- and long-term variable remuneration

What we call it	What is it?	What is the objective?	Who participates?	How is it earned?
Short-term: Remuneration delivered over 12 months or less
Fixed salary	Fixed remuneration paid at set times	Attract and retain employees, delivering part of annual remuneration in a predictable format	All employees	Market appropriate levels set according to position and evaluated according to individual performance
Short-Term Variable remuneration (STV)	A variable plan that is measured and paid over a single year	Align employees with clear and relevant targets, providing an earnings opportunity in return for performance and flexible cost	Managers, including Executive Leadership Team	Achievements against set targets. Reward can increase to up to twice the target level and decrease to zero, depending on performance
Local and Sales Incentive Plans	Tailored versions of the STV	As for STV, tailored for local or business requirements, such as sales	Most employees	Similar to STV. All plans have maximum award and vesting limits
Long-term: Remuneration delivered over 3 years or more
Stock Purchase Plan (SPP)	All-employee stock-based plan	Reinforce a “One Ericsson” and align employees’ interests with those of shareholders	All employees are eligible	Buy one share and it will be matched by one share after 3 years if still employed
Key Contributor Retention Plan (KC)	Share-based plan for selected individuals	Recognize, retain and motivate key contributors for performance, critical skills and potential	Up to 10 percent of employees	If selected, get one more matching share in addition to the SPP one
Executive Performance Stock Plan (EPSP)	Share-based plan for senior executives	Remuneration for long-term commitment and earnings performance	Senior executives, including Executive Leadership Team	Get up to 4, 6 or, for CEO, 9 further matching shares to the SPP one for long-term performance.

180

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Short-term variable remuneration

The annual variable remuneration is delivered through cash-based programs. Specific business targets are derived from the annual business plan approved by the Board of Directors and, in turn, defined by the Company’s long-term strategy. Ericsson strives to grow faster than the market with best-in-class margins and strong cash conversion and therefore the starting point is to have these as three core targets:

• Sales Growth

• Operating Income

• Cash Flow

For the ELT, targets are thus predominantly financial targets at either Group level or at the individual unit level and may also include operational targets like customer satisfaction and employee motivation. Targets are cascaded to all managers and will vary depending on the specific position. All variable remuneration targets have to be objective and measurable and typically refer to a result that is achieved on a collective basis. Each target is, in accordance with our strict governance instructions, defined in a “target specification” and measured over the calendar year. The target setting process is fully integrated with the strategy work and target levels are tested against plans and forecasts up until they are finalized around the turn of the year. The Board of Directors and the Remuneration Committee decide on all Ericsson Group targets, which are cascaded to unit-related targets throughout the Company, always subject to a two levels of management approval process. The Remuneration Committee monitors the appropriateness and fairness of Group target levels throughout the performance year and has the authority to revise them should they cease to be relevant, stretching and/or enhance shareholder value.

181

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

During 2010, approximately 75,000 employees participated in short-term variable plans. Of these 8,000 were in the global Short-Term Variable remuneration plan (“STV”) for management, including the ELT, and 4,000 were in the global Sales Incentive Plan (“SIP”). Local plans vary in design according to local competitive practice but typically mirror the STV.

The chart “Short-term variable remuneration payouts and target levels” illustrates how payouts to the ELT have varied with performance over the past five years.

Long-term variable remuneration

Share-based long-term variable remuneration plans are submitted each year for approval by shareholders at the AGM. All long-term variable remuneration plans are designed to form part of a well-balanced total remuneration and span over a minimum of three years. As these are variable plans, outcomes are unknown and rewards depend on long-term personal investment, corporate performance and resulting share price performance. During 2010, share-based remuneration was made up of three different but linked plans: The all-employee Stock Purchase Plan, the Key Contributor Retention Plan and the Executive Performance Stock Plan.

The stock purchase plan

The all-employee Stock Purchase Plan is designed to offer, where practicable, an incentive for all employees to participate, reinforcing a “One Ericsson” aligned with shareholder interests. Employees can save up to 7.5 percent (CEO 10 percent ) of gross fixed salary (CEO, gross fixed salary and annual variable remuneration) for purchase of Class B shares at market price on NASDAQ OMX Stockholm or ADSs on NASDAQ (contribution shares) over a twelve-month period. If the contribution shares are retained by the employee for three years after the investment and employment with the Ericsson Group continues during that time, the employee’s shares will be matched with a corresponding number of Class B shares or ADSs. The plan was introduced in 2002 and employees in 94 countries participate. In December 2010 the number of participants was in excess of 22,000 or approximately 27 percent of eligible employees.

182

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Participants save each month, beginning with August payroll, towards quarterly investments. These investments (in November, February, May and August) are matched on the third anniversary of each such investment and hence the matching spans over two financial years and two tax years.

The key contributor retention plan

The Key Contributor Retention Plan is part of Ericsson’s talent management strategy and is designed to give individuals recognition for performance, critical skills and potential as well as encourage retention of key employees. Under the program, operating units around the world are given quotas that total no more than 10 percent of employees world-wide. Each unit nominates individuals that have been identified according to performance, critical skills and potential. The nominations are calibrated in management teams locally and reviewed by both local and corporate Human Resources to ensure that there is a minimum of bias and a strong belief in the system. Participants selected obtain one extra matching share in addition to the one matching share for each contribution share purchased under the Stock Purchase Plan during a twelve-month program period. The plan was introduced in 2004.

The executive performance stock plan

The Executive Performance Stock Plan was also first introduced in 2004. The plan is designed to focus management on driving long-term financial performance and provide market competitive remuneration. Senior executives, including the ELT, are selected to obtain up to four or six extra shares (performance matching shares). This is in addition to the one matching share for each contribution share purchased under the all employee Stock Purchase Plan and the performance matching is subject to the fulfillment of an Earnings per Share (EPS) performance target. Since 2010, the CEO may obtain up to nine performance matching shares in addition to the Stock Purchase Plan matching share for each contribution share.

The Remuneration Committee has been satisfied that the use of an EPS performance target has been an appropriate measure to date. However, following its evaluation, the Remuneration Committee and the Board have decided to propose to the 2011 AGM a new set of performance measures for the 2011 Executive Performance Stock Plan.

The performance targets are not capable of being retested after the end of the three-year performance period. If the minimum required performance is not achieved, all matching shares subject to performance will lapse. The Board may also reduce the number of performance matching shares, if deemed appropriate, considering the Company’s financial results and position, conditions on the stock market and other relevant circumstances at the time of matching. The Remuneration Committee analyzes the financial results against those of competitors in the industry.

Short-term variable remuneration structure

	Short-Term Variable remuneration as percentage of Fixed Salary									Percentage of Short-Term Variable remuneration opportunity
	Target level			Maximum level			Actual paid for 2010			Group  Financial Targets			Unit/Functional Financial  Targets			Non-Financial Targets
CEO 2010		40	%		80	%		64	%		90	%		0	%		10	%
CEO 2011		40	%		80	%		—			90	%		0	%		10	%
Average ELT 20101)		31	%		62	%		46	%		73	%		16	%		11	%
Average ELT 20111)		34	%		68	%		—			61	%		23	%		16	%

1) Excludes CEO—differences in target and maximum levels from year to year are due to changes in the composition of the ELT.

183

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Benefits and terms of employment

Pension benefits follow the competitive practice in the employee’s home country and may contain various supplementary plans, in addition to any national system for social security. Where possible, pension plans are operated on a defined contribution basis. Under these plans, Ericsson pays contributions into a plan but does not guarantee the ultimate benefit, unless local regulations or legislation prescribe that defined benefit plans that do give such guarantees have to be offered.

For the CEO and other members of the ELT employed in Sweden a supplementary pension plan is applied in addition to the occupational pension plan for salaried staff on the Swedish labor market (ITP). The pension age is according to local practice, for ELT members normally 60 years. The pensionable salary for ELT members on local contract in Sweden consists of the annual fixed salary including vacation pay and the target value of the Short-Term Variable remuneration. For members of the ELT who are not employed in Sweden, local market competitive pension arrangements apply.

Other benefits, such as company car and medical insurance, are also set to be competitive in the local market. ELT members may not receive loans from the Company.

ELT members locally employed in Sweden have a mutual notice period of up to six months. Upon termination of employment by the Company, severance pay can amount to up to 18 months fixed salary. For other ELT members different notice period and severance pay agreement apply, however no agreements exceeds the notice period of 6 months or the severance pay of 18 months.

REMUNERATION OF THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS

The remuneration of Directors not employed by Ericsson is handled separately by the Nomination Committee and approved by the Annual General Meeting of shareholders. The remuneration consists of fees for Board and committee work, part of which can be delivered under a synthetic share program. The synthetic shares, which are valued in line with Ericsson’s Class B shares, vest in cash after the publication of the year-end financial statement during the fifth year after award.

184

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT 2010

CONTENTS

REGULATION AND COMPLIANCE	187
SHAREHOLDERS	188
GENERAL MEETING OF SHAREHOLDERS	189
NOMINATION COMMITTEE	191
BOARD OF DIRECTORS	192
COMMITTEES OF THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS	197
REMUNERATION TO BOARD MEMBERS	201
MEMBERS OF THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS	202
COMPANY MANAGEMENT	206
MEMBERS OF THE EXECUTIVE LEADERSHIP TEAM	211
AUDITORS	214
INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING 2010	215
AUDITOR’S REPORT ON THE CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT	219

Corporate governance is not only about efficient and reliable controls and procedures. We believe that adherence to a strong ethos of ethical business practice by all people in our organization—starting at the top and permeating to all employees—is essential to maintaining a sound and reliable corporate governance structure.

As Chairman of the Board it lies at the core of my responsibilities to ensure that the Board work is conducted in an optimal manner and in line with the principles and processes in the work procedure of the Board of Directors. It is crucial that the Board is at all times well informed in order to efficiently and in a constructive manner promote open and meaningful debates on important issues. The Board work is constantly scrutinized and improved to ensure that the Board has the best possible basis for its resolutions.

The Board has two key roles: firstly to be a good supporter to the Company management, and, secondly, to exercise a critical review and raise difficult questions. These two roles must be well-balanced. It is crucial to ensure that the Board and the executive management at all times have an open and straightforward dialogue.

Good corporate governance is the basis for building robust corporate culture. It will further promote sustainable business practice which in turn generates shareholder value.

Michael Treschow

Chairman of the Board of Directors

185

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Corporate governance describes the ways in which rights and responsibilities are distributed among the various corporate bodies according to the laws, rules and processes to which they are subject. It defines the decision-making systems and structure through which owners directly or indirectly control a company.

This Corporate Governance Report is rendered as a separate report added to the Annual Report in accordance with the Annual Accounts Act (1995:1554 Chapter 6, Section 6) and the Swedish Corporate Governance Code. The report has been reviewed by Ericsson’s auditor in accordance with the Annual Accounts Act and a separate report from the auditor is appended hereto.

186

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

REGULATION AND COMPLIANCE

External rules

As a Swedish public limited liability company with securities quoted on NASDAQ OMX Stockholm as well as on NASDAQ New York, Ericsson is subject to a variety of rules that affect its governance. Major external rules include:

• The Swedish Companies Act

• Rulebook for issuers of NASDAQ OMX Stockholm

• The Swedish Corporate Governance Code (the “Code”) which is found on the website of the Swedish Corporate Governance Board who administrates the Code (www.corporategovernanceboard.se)

• NASDAQ New York Stock Market Rules – including applicable NASDAQ New York corporate governance requirements, subject to certain exemptions principally reflecting mandatory Swedish legal requirements

• Applicable requirements of the US Securities and Exchange Commission.

Internal rules

In addition, to ensure compliance with legal and regulatory requirements and the high ethical standards that we set for ourselves, Ericsson has internal rules that include:

• Code of Business Ethics

• Group Steering Documents including Group policies and directives, instructions and business processes for approval, control and risk management

• Code of Conduct to be applied in the product development, production, supply and support of Ericsson products and services worldwide.

The Board of Directors has also included internal rules in its work procedure.

Compliance with the Swedish Corporate Governance Code

The Code has been applied by Ericsson since July 2005. Ericsson is committed to complying with best-practice corporate governance on a global level wherever possible. This includes continued compliance with the Code. Ericsson has not deviated from any of the provisions of the Code.

Compliance with applicable stock exchange rules

There has been no infringement of applicable stock exchange rules and Ericsson has complied with good stock market practice.

Code of Business Ethics

Ericsson’s Code of Business Ethics sets out how the Group achieves and maintains its high ethical standards. It summarizes the Group’s fundamental policies and directives.

The ethical code has been translated into 25 languages. This ensures that it is accessible to all employees and underpins the importance of ethical conduct in all business activities. During recruitment, employees sign a form to acknowledge that they are aware of the principles of the Code of Business Ethics. This procedure is repeated at regular intervals throughout the term of employment.

187

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Through this process, Ericsson strives to ensure that high ethical standards are continuously upheld. All employees have an individual responsibility to ensure that business practice adheres to the rules of the Code of Business Ethics.

SHAREHOLDERS

Ownership structure

As of December 31, 2010 Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (the “Parent Company”), had 630,592 shareholders (according to the share register kept by Euroclear Sweden AB). Institutions, both Swedish and international, own almost 78 percent of the shares. The largest shareholders are Industrivärden, holding 19.39 percent of the votes (together with Handelsbankens Pensionsstiftelse and Pensionskassan SHB Försäkringsförening) and Investor, holding 19.33 percent of the votes.

A significant number of the shares held by foreign investors are nominee-registered, i.e. held off-record by banks, brokers and/or nominees. This means that the actual shareholder is not displayed in the share register or included in the shareholding statistics.

More information on Ericsson’s shareholders can be found in the chapter “Share Information” in the Annual Report.

Shares and voting rights

The share capital of the Parent Company consists of two classes of listed shares: A and B. Each Class A share carries one vote and each Class B share carries one tenth of one vote. Class A and B shares entitle the holder to the same proportion of assets and earnings. They also carry equal rights in terms of dividends.

The Parent Company may also issue Class C shares in order to create treasury stock to hedge variable remuneration programs resolved by the General Meeting. The Class C shares are converted into Class B shares before they are transferred to participants of the variable remuneration programs.

The members of the Board of Directors and the Executive Leadership Team have the same voting rights on shares as other shareholders.

188

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

GENERAL MEETING OF SHAREHOLDERS

Decision making at General Meetings

The decision-making rights of Ericsson’s shareholders are exercised at General Meetings. Most resolutions at General Meetings are passed by a simple majority. However, the Swedish Companies Act requires qualified majorities in certain cases, for example:

• Amending the articles of association

• The resolution to transfer own shares to employees participating in employee share plans

The Annual General Meeting of Shareholders

The Annual General Meeting (AGM) is held in Stockholm. The date and venue for the meeting is announced on the Ericsson website no later than in conjunction with the release of the third-quarter report.

Shareholders who cannot participate in person may be represented by proxy. Only named shareholders registered in the share register have voting rights. Nominee-registered shareholders who wish to vote may request to be entered into the share register by the record date for the AGM.

The AGM is held in Swedish and is simultaneously interpreted into English. All documentation provided by the Company is available in both Swedish and English.

The AGM gives shareholders the opportunity to raise questions relating to the operations of the Group. Ericsson always strives to ensure that the members of the Board of Directors and the Group management (the Executive Leadership Team) are present to answer such questions. Shareholders and other interested parties may also correspond in writing with the Company at any time.

The auditor is always present at the AGM.

189

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Ericsson’s Annual General Meeting 2010

1,836 shareholders attended the AGM held on April 13, 2010, including shareholders represented by proxy, representing approximately 62 percent of the votes.

The meeting was also attended by the Board of Directors, members of the Executive Leadership Team and the external auditor.

Decisions of the AGM 2010 included:

• Payment of a dividend of SEK 2.00 per share for 2009

• Re-election of Chairman of the Board of Directors, Michael Treschow

• Re-election of members of the Board of Directors, Roxanne S. Austin, Sir Peter L. Bonfield, Börje Ekholm, Ulf J. Johansson, Sverker Martin-Löf, Marcus Wallenberg, Nancy McKinstry, Anders Nyrén and Carl-Henric Svanberg

• Election of Hans Vestberg and Michelangelo Volpi as new members of the Board of Directors

• Board of Directors’ fees to remain unchanged:

• Chairman: SEK 3,750,000

• Other non-employed Board members: SEK 750,000 each

• Chairman of the Audit Committee: SEK 350,000

• Other non-employed members of the Audit Committee: SEK 250,000 each

• Chairmen and other non-employed members of the Finance and Remuneration committees: SEK 125,000 each

• Approval for part of the Directors’ fees to be paid in the form of synthetic shares

• Approval of the remuneration policy for senior management

• Implementation of a Long-Term Variable Remuneration Program.

The minutes of the AGM 2010 are available at: www.ericsson.com/res/investors/docs/2010/agm/101119_ minutes_agm.pdf. (Information on the Ericsson website does not form part of this Report).

ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING 2011

Ericsson’s Annual General Meeting 2011 will take place on April 13, at the Annex to the Ericsson Globe Arena in Stockholm.

Shareholders who wish to have a matter considered at the AGM should make a written request to the Board in due time before the AGM. Further information on Ericsson’s website.

HOW TO CONTACT THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS

Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson

The Board of Directors’ Secretariat

SE-164 83 Stockholm, Sweden

boardsecretariat@ericsson.com

190

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

NOMINATION COMMITTEE

A Nomination Committee was elected by the AGM for the first time in 2001. Since then, each AGM has appointed a Nomination Committee, or resolved on the procedure for appointing the Nomination Committee.

The AGM 2010 resolved that the Nomination Committee shall consist of:

• Representatives of the four largest shareholders by voting power by the end of the month in which the AGM was held

• The Chairman of the Board of Directors.

However, as described in the procedure for appointing members, the Nomination Committee may include additional members following a request by a shareholder. The request must be justified by changes in the shareholder’s share ownership and be received by the Nomination Committee no later than December 31.

Members of the Nomination Committee

In addition to the Chairman of the Board of Directors, the current Nomination Committee consists of the four representatives appointed by the four shareholders with the largest voting power as of April 30, 2010:

• Jacob Wallenberg (Investor AB, Chairman of the Nomination Committee)

• Carl-Olof By (AB Industrivärden, Svenska Handelsbankens Pensionsstiftelse and Pensionskassan SHB Försäkringsförening)

• Caroline af Ugglas (Livförsäkringsaktiebolaget Skandia)

• Marianne Nilsson (Swedbank Robur Fonder).

The tasks of the Nomination Committee

Over the years the tasks of the Nomination Committee have evolved to comply with the requirements of the Code. However, the main task of the Committee remains to propose candidates for election to the Board of Directors. In doing this, the Committee must not only orientate itself on the Company’s strategy and future challenges to be able to assess the competence and experience that is required by the Board, but also consider all applicable rules on the independence of the Board of Directors.

It also prepares remuneration proposals for resolution by the AGM for:

• Non-employed Directors elected by the AGM

• The auditor

• Members of the Nomination Committee.

To date, the Committee has not proposed that it should be paid any fees. When proposing auditors, the Nomination Committee selects candidates in cooperation with the Audit Committee of the Board.

The Committee also proposes a candidate for election of the Chairman of General Meetings.

Work of the Nomination Committee for the AGM 2011

The Nomination Committee starts its work by going through a checklist of all its duties according to the Code and its procedure resolved by the AGM. It also sets a time plan for its work ahead. As understanding of Ericsson’s business is paramount to the members of the Committee, both the Chairman of the Board and the President and CEO have presented their views to the Committee on the Company’s position and strategy.

191

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

The Committee has also been thoroughly informed of the results of the evaluation of the Board work and procedures, including the performance of the Chairman of the Board. From this basis the Committee is able to make assessments on the competence and experience required by the Board members.

The Committee has also acquainted itself with the assessments made by the Company and the Audit Committee in terms of quality and efficiency of external auditor work, including recommendations regarding auditors and audit fees. Following the Chairman of the Boards’ announcement of his intention to resign from the Board, one main focus for the Nomination Committee this year has been to nominate a successor. As of February 21, 2011 the Nomination Committee has held 8 meetings.

Shareholders may submit proposals to the Nomination Committee at any time, but should do so in due time before the AGM to ensure that they are considered by the Committee. Further information is available on Ericsson’s website.

HOW TO CONTACT THE NOMINATION COMMITTEE

Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson

The Nomination Committee

c/o General Counsel’s Office

SE-164 83 Stockholm, Sweden

nomination.committee@ericsson.com

BOARD OF DIRECTORS

The Board of Directors is ultimately responsible for the organization of Ericsson and the management of its operations. It develops guidelines and instructions for day-to-day operations, managed by the President and CEO. In turn, the President and CEO ensures the Board is updated regularly on events of importance to the Group. This includes business development, results, financial position and the liquidity of the Group.

According to the Articles of Association, the Board of Directors shall consist of no less than 5 and no more than 12 directors, with no more than 6 deputies. In addition, under Swedish law, trade unions have the right to appoint three directors and their deputies to the Board.

Directors will serve from the close of one AGM to the close of the next, but can serve any number of consecutive terms.

While the President and CEO may be elected as a director of the Board, the Swedish Companies Act prohibits the President of a public company from being elected Chairman of the Board.

Rules and regulations

Ericsson strictly follows rules and regulations regarding conflicts of interest. Directors are disqualified from participating in any decision regarding agreements between themselves and Ericsson. The same applies for agreements between Ericsson and any third party or legal entity in which the Board member has an interest.

In order to ensure compliance with NASDAQ Stock Market Rules, the Audit Committee has implemented a procedure on related-party transactions. Furthermore, the Audit Committee has established a pre-approval process for non-audit services carried out by the external auditor.

192

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Composition of the Board of Directors

The Board of Directors consists of 12 Directors, including the Chairman of the Board, elected by the shareholders at the AGM 2010, for the period until the close of the AGM 2011. It also includes three employee representatives, each with a deputy, appointed by the trade unions for the same period of time. The President and CEO, Hans Vestberg, is the only Board member who was also a member of Ericsson’s management during 2010.

Work procedure

Pursuant to the Swedish Companies Act, the Board of Directors has adopted a work procedure that outlines rules for the distribution of tasks between the Board and its Committees as well as between the Board, its Committees and the President and CEO. This complements the regulation in the Swedish Companies Act and the Articles of Association of the Company. The work procedure is reviewed, evaluated and adopted by the Board at least once a year as required.

Independence

The Board of Directors and its Committees are subject to a variety of independence requirements. Ericsson applies independence rules in applicable Swedish law, the Swedish Corporate Governance Code, the NASDAQ Stock Market Rules and in the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002. However, Ericsson has sought and received exemptions from certain requirements in the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and in the NASDAQ Stock Market Rules that are contrary to Swedish law.

The composition of the Board of Directors meets all applicable independence criteria.

The Nomination Committee concluded before the AGM 2010 that, for the purposes of the Code, at least six of the persons nominated to the Board were independent of Ericsson, its senior management and its major shareholders. These were Roxanne S. Austin, Sir Peter L. Bonfield, Ulf J. Johansson, Nancy McKinstry, Michael Treschow and Michelangelo Volpi.

193

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Structure of the work of the Board of Directors

The work of the Board follows a yearly cycle in order to address each of the duties of the Board appropriately and to be able to keep strategy, risk assessment and value creation high on the agenda.

• Statutory Meeting

The yearly cycle starts with the statutory Board meeting which is held in connection with the AGM. At this meeting, members of each of the three Committees are appointed and the Board resolves on matters such as signatory power.

• First Interim Report Meeting

At the next ordinary meeting, the Board handles the first interim report for the year.

• Main Strategy Meeting

Various strategic issues are addressed in most of the Board meetings. However, in accordance with the annual cycle for the strategy process, this Board meeting is in essence dedicated to short and long-term strategies of the Group. Following the Board’s input and approval of the overall strategy, the strategy is cascaded throughout the entire organization, starting at the Global Leadership Summit with the top 250 managers in Ericsson.

• Second Interim Report Meeting

In July, the Board convenes to handle the interim report for the second quarter of the year.

• Follow-up on Strategy & Risk Management Meeting

Following the summer, this meeting addresses particular strategy matters in further detail and finally confirms the Group strategy. The meeting also addresses the overall risk management of the Group.

194

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

• Third Interim Report Meeting and Board Evaluation

A Board meeting is held at the end of October to handle the third-quarter interim report.

The results of the Board evaluation are presented and discussed by the Board during this meeting.

• Budget and Financial Outlook Meeting

The last meeting of the calendar year addresses budget and financial outlook and a further analysis of internal and external risks.

• Full-Year Financial Results Meeting

At the first meeting of the calendar year the Board focuses on the financial result of the entire year and handles the fourth-quarter report.

• Annual Report Meeting

At the second Board meeting in February, which closes the yearly cycle of work, the Board concludes the Annual Report.

As the Board is responsible for financial oversight, financials are presented and evaluated at each Board meeting. Each Board meeting generally also includes reports on committee work by the Chairman of each committee. In addition, minutes from the committee meetings are distributed to all Directors prior to the Board meeting.

At each Board meeting the President and CEO reports on business and market developments as well as the financial performance of the Company. The Board is regularly informed of developments in legal and regulatory matters of importance.

Auditor involvement

The Board meets with Ericsson’s external auditor at least once a year to receive and consider the auditor’s observations. The auditor prepares reports for the management on the accounting and financial reporting practices of the Group.

195

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

The Audit Committee also meets with the auditor to receive and consider observations on the interim reports. The auditor has been instructed to report on whether the accounts, the management of funds and the general financial position of the Group are well controlled in all material respects.

The Board also reviews and assesses the process for financial reporting, as described later in “Internal control over financial reporting 2010”. Combined with the internal controls, the Board’s and the auditor’s review of interim and annual reports are deemed to give reasonable assurance on the quality of the financial reporting.

Training of the Board of Directors

All new Directors receive comprehensive training tailored to their individual requirements. Introductory training typically includes meetings with the heads of the major businesses and functions and training arranged by NASDAQ OMX Stockholm on listing issues and insider rules. In addition, full-day training sessions are held twice a year for all Directors. The sessions enhance their knowledge of specific operations and issues as appropriate to ensure that the Board has knowledge and understanding at the forefront of technical development. As a rule, the Board receives Sustainability and Corporate Responsibility training at least once a year.

Key focus areas in Board training 2010 were:

• Radio Technology, including R&D strategy and intellectual property rights

• Major trends impacting the competitive landscape.

Work of the Board of Directors in 2010

Ten Board meetings were held in 2010. For attendance at Board meetings see the table on page 201. Among the matters addressed by the Board this year (apart from regular matters in the annual Board work cycle) were:

• A more consolidated and efficient go-to-market model with 10 Regions instead of 23 Market Units

• A redefined management team, the Executive Leadership Team, including two regional heads

• Continued effects of the general financial uncertainty in the market

• The causes and consequences of the general shortage of components that telecom equipment providers, including Ericsson, have experienced during the year

• The rollout of the multi-standard radio base station RBS 6000–Ericsson’s first multi-standard base station.

• A number of acquisitions and divestments, including the acquisition of Nortel’s stake in the joint venture LG-Nortel.

Board work evaluation

A key objective of the Board evaluation is to ensure that the Board is functioning well. This includes gaining an understanding of the issues which the Board thinks warrant greater scope and determining areas within the Board where additional competence is needed. The evaluation also serves as guidance for the work of the Nomination Committee.

Each year, the Chairman of the Board initiates and leads the evaluation of Board and Committee work and procedures. The evaluation tools include detailed questionnaires, interviews and discussions.

In 2010, the Chairman held individual meetings with all the Directors, following their response to two separate written questionnaires, one covering the Board work in general and the other the Chairman’s

196

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

performance. The Chairman was not involved in the development, compilation or evaluation of the questionnaire which related to his performance, nor was he present when his performance was evaluated. The evaluations were thoroughly discussed and an action plan was developed in order to further improve the work of the Board.

COMMITTEES OF THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS

The Board of Directors has established three Committees: the Audit Committee, the Finance Committee and the Remuneration Committee. Members of each Committee are appointed for one year amongst the Board members in accordance with the principles set forth in the Swedish Companies Act and the Code.

The work of the Committees is mainly to prepare matters for final resolution by the Board. However, the Board has authorized each Committee to determine certain issues in limited areas. It may also on occasion provide extended authorization to determine specific matters.

If deemed appropriate, the Board of Directors and each Committee have the right to engage external expertise, either in general or in respect to specific matters.

Prior to every Board meeting, each Committee submits, in addition to minutes, a written summary to the Board on the issues handled or resolved since the previous ordinary Board meeting. In addition to the minutes and the written summary, the Chairman of the Committee also reports on the Committee work at each Board meeting.

Audit Committee

On behalf of the Board, the Audit Committee monitors the following:

• The scope and correctness of the financial statements

• Compliance with legal and regulatory requirements

• Internal control over financial reporting

• Risk management.

The Audit Committee also reviews the annual and interim financial reports and oversees the external audit process, including audit fees. This involves:

• Reviewing, with management and the external auditor, the financial statements. This includes conformity with generally accepted accounting principles

• Reviewing, with management, the reasonableness of significant estimates and judgments made in preparing the financial statements, as well as the quality of the disclosures in the financial statements

• Reviewing matters arising from reviews and audits performed.

The Audit Committee itself does not perform audit work. Ericsson has an internal audit function which reports to the Audit Committee and performs independent audits.

When applicable, the Committee is also involved in the preparatory work of proposing candidates for the election of the auditor. It also monitors Group transactions and the ongoing performance and independence of the auditor. This avoids conflicts of interest.

In order to ensure the auditor’s independence, the Audit Committee has established pre-approval policies and procedures for non-audit related services to be performed by the external auditor. Pre-approval authority may not be delegated to management.

197

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Also in place are the following:

• A process for reviewing transactions with related parties

• A whistleblower procedure for the reporting of violations relating to accounting, internal control and auditing matters.

Organization of the board work

Alleged violations are investigated by Ericsson’s internal audit function in conjunction with the relevant Group Function. Information regarding any incidents are reported to the Audit Committee. The report includes measures taken, details of the responsible Group Function and the status of any investigation.

Members of the audit committee

The Audit Committee consists of four Board members appointed by the Board. In 2010, the Audit Committee comprised Ulf J. Johansson (Chairman of the Committee), Roxanne S. Austin, Sir Peter L. Bonfield and Jan Hedlund.

All members are independent from the Company and senior management, except Jan Hedlund, who is appointed Board member by the unions pursuant to Swedish mandatory law. Each member is financially literate and familiar with the accounting practices of an international company such as Ericsson. At least one member must be an audit committee financial expert, in accordance with the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, Section 407. The Board of Directors has determined that Ulf J. Johansson, Roxanne S. Austin and Sir Peter L. Bonfield all satisfy this requirement.

Former authorized public accountant, Peter Markborn, is appointed external expert advisor to assist and advise the Audit Committee.

Work of the audit committee

The Audit Committee held eight meetings in 2010. Directors’ attendance is reflected in the table on page 201. During the year, the Audit Committee reviewed the scope and results of external financial audits and the independence of the external auditor. It also monitored the external audit fees and approved non-audit services performed by the external auditor.

Certain additional non-audit services performed by the external auditor were approved by the Audit Committee Chairman under the Committee’s pre-approval policies and procedures. The Committee approved the annual audit plan for the internal audit function and reviewed its reports. Prior to publishing, the Committee also reviewed and discussed each interim report with the external auditor.

198

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

The Committee monitored the continued compliance with the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and the internal control and risk management process. It has also reviewed certain related-party transactions in accordance with its established process.

Finance Committee

The Finance Committee is primarily responsible for:

• Handling matters related to acquisitions and divestments

• Handling capital contributions to companies inside and outside the Ericsson Group

• Raising of loans, issuances of guarantees and similar undertakings, and the approval of financial support to customers and suppliers

• Continuously monitoring the Group’s financial risk exposure.

The Finance Committee is authorized to determine matters such as:

• Direct or indirect financing

• Provision of credits

• Granting of securities and guarantees

• Certain investments, divestments and financial commitments.

Members of the finance committee

The Finance Committee consists of four Board members as appointed by the Board. In 2010, the Finance Committee comprised: Marcus Wallenberg (Chairman of the Committee), Anna Guldstrand, Anders Nyrén and Michael Treschow.

Work of the finance committee in 2010

The Finance Committee held nine meetings in 2010. Directors’ attendance is reflected in the table on page 201. During the year the Finance Committee has approved numerous customer finance and credit facility arrangements with a continued focus on capital structure, cash flow and cash generating ability. It has also continuously monitored Ericsson’s financial position and credit exposure.

Remuneration Committee

The Remuneration Committee’s main responsibility is to prepare for resolution by the Board of Directors matters regarding salary and other remuneration. This includes pension benefits of the President and CEO, the Executive Vice Presidents and other officers who report directly to the President and CEO. Other responsibilities include:

• Developing, monitoring and evaluating strategies and general guidelines for employee remuneration, including short-term variable remuneration and pension benefits

• Reviewing the results of short-term variable remuneration plans before pay out

• Preparation of the long-term variable remuneration program for referral to the Board and resolution by the General Meeting

• Preparation of targets for short-term variable remuneration for the following year, for resolution by the Board.

199

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

To achieve this, the Committee holds annual remuneration reviews with Company representatives. These reviews determine the strategic direction, and align program designs and pay policies with the business objectives.

Members of the committees

Consideration is given to trends in remuneration, legislative changes, disclosure rules and the general global environment surrounding executive pay. The Committee reviews salary survey data before approving any salary adjustment for CEO direct reports. In addition the Committee prepares salary adjustments for the President and CEO for resolution by the Board.

Members of the remuneration committee

The Remuneration Committee consists of four Board members as appointed by the Board. In 2010, the Remuneration Committee comprised: Michael Treschow (Chairman of the Committee), Börje Ekholm, Nancy McKinstry, and Karin Åberg.

Gerrit Aronson is appointed by the Remuneration Committee as an independent expert advisor to assist the Committee, particularly regarding international trends and developments.

Work of the remuneration committee in 2010

The Remuneration Committee held eight meetings in 2010. Directors’ attendance is reflected in the table on page 201.

The Committee reviewed and prepared for resolution by the Board a proposal for the Long-Term Variable Remuneration Program 2010. This was approved by the AGM 2010. The Committee further resolved on salaries and short term variable pay for 2010 for CEO direct reports and prepared for resolution by the Board remuneration to the President and CEO, Hans Vestberg. The Committee also prepared a remuneration policy which was subsequently referred by the Board to the AGM for approval.

Towards the end of the year, the Committee concluded its analysis of the current long-term variable remuneration structure and remuneration policy. The resulting proposals will be referred to the AGM 2011 for resolution.

For further information on remuneration, fixed and variable pay, please see Note C29 “Information Regarding Members of the Board of Directors, the Group management and Employees” in the Annual Report and the “Remuneration Report” included the Annual Report.

200

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

REMUNERATION TO BOARD MEMBERS

Remuneration to Board members not employed by the Company is proposed by the Nomination Committee for resolution by the Annual General Meeting.

The Annual General Meeting 2010 approved the Nomination Committee’s proposal for fees to the non-employed Board members for Board and Committee work. For information on Board of Directors’ fees 2010, please refer to Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—Note C29 “Information Regarding Members of the Board of Directors, the Group Management and Employees” in the Annual Report. The Annual General Meeting 2010 also approved the Nomination Committee’s proposal that Board members may be paid part of their Board fee in the form of synthetic shares.

A synthetic share gives the right to receive a future cash payment of an amount which corresponds to the market value of a class B share in Ericsson at the time of payment. The purpose of paying part of the Board of Director’s fee in the form of synthetic shares is to further align the Directors’ interest with shareholder interest. For more information on the terms and conditions of the synthetic shares, please refer to the notice convening the Annual General Meeting 2010 at www.ericsson. com/thecompany/investors/general-meetings. (Information on the Ericsson website does not form part of this document.)

Directors’ attendance and fees 2010

	Fees resolved by the AGM 2010							Number of Board/Committee meetings attended
Board member	Board fees1)			Committee fees		Board		Audit Committee		Finance Committee		Remuneration Committee
Michael Treschow		3,750,000			250,000		10				9		8
Sverker Martin-Löf		750,000					10
Marcus Wallenberg		750,000			125,000		9				9
Roxanne S. Austin		750,000			250,000		7		6
Sir Peter L. Bonfield		750,000			250,000		10		8
Börje Ekholm		750,000			125,000		9						7
Ulf J. Johansson		750,000			350,000		10		8
Nancy McKinstry		750,000			125,000		10						7
Anders Nyrén		750,000			125,000		10				9
Carl-Henric Svanberg		750,000					8
Hans Vestberg		—					8
Michelangelo Volpi2)		750,000					6
Anna Guldstrand		15,000	5)				10				9
Jan Hedlund		15,000	5)				10		8
Karin Åberg		15,000	5)				10						8
Monica Bergström3)		4,500	5)				3
Pehr Claesson		15,000	5)				10
Kristina Davidsson		15,000	5)				10
Karin Lennartsson4)		10,500	5)				7
Total number of meetings							10		8		9		8

1) Non-employed Directors can choose to receive part of their Board fee (exclusive of Committee fees) in the form of synthetic shares.

2) Elected as Board member as of April 13, 2010.

3) Resigned as Deputy employee representative as of April 13, 2010.

4) Deputy employee representative as of April 13, 2010.

5) Employee representative Board members and their deputies are not entitled to a Board fee but a compensation in the amount of SEK 1,500 per attended Board meeting.

201

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

MEMBERS OF THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS

Board members elected by the Annual General Meeting 2010

Michael Treschow (first elected 2002). Chairman of the Board of Directors.

Chairman of the Remuneration Committee. Member of the Finance Committee.

Born 1943. Master of Science, Lund Institute of Technology, Sweden. Board Chairman: Unilever NV, and Unilever PLC. Board Member: ABB Ltd and the Knut and Alice Wallenberg Foundation. Holdings in Ericsson¹⁾: 164,008 Class B shares.

Principal work experience and other information: Board Chairman of the Confederation of Swedish Enterprise 2004–2007. President and CEO of AB Electrolux 1997–2002 and Chairman of its Board of Directors 2004–2007. Earlier experience includes positions in Atlas Copco, where he served as President and CEO 1991–1997. Member of the Royal Academy of Engineering Sciences.

Marcus Wallenberg (first elected 1996).

Deputy Chairman of the Board of Directors.

Chairman of the Finance Committee.

Born 1956. Bachelor of Science of Foreign Service, Georgetown University, USA. Board Chairman: Skandinaviska Enskilda Banken, Saab AB and AB Electrolux. Board Member: AstraZeneca PLC, Stora Enso Oy, the Knut and Alice Wallenberg Foundation and Temasek Holdings Limited. Holdings in Ericsson¹⁾: 1,200 Class A shares and 140,800 Class B shares.

Principal work experience and other information: Positions in Investor AB, where he served as President and CEO 1999–2005. Prior to this he was Executive Vice President at Investor. Previous employers include Stora Feldmühle AG, Citicorp, Citibank and Deutsche Bank.

Sverker Martin-Löf (first elected 1993).

Deputy Chairman of the Board of Directors.

Born 1943. Doctor of Technology and Master of Engineering, Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm.

Board Chairman: Skanska AB, Svenska Cellulosa Aktiebolaget SCA, SSAB and AB Industrivärden.

Board Member: Svenska Handelsbanken. Holdings in Ericsson¹⁾: 10,400 Class B shares.

Principal work experience and other information: President and CEO of Svenska Cellulosa Aktiebolaget SCA 1990–2002, where he was employed 1977–1983 and 1986–2002. Previous positions at Sunds Defibrator and Mo och Domsjö AB.

Roxanne S. Austin (first elected 2008).

Member of the Audit Committee.

Born 1961. B.B.A. in Accounting, University of Texas, San Antonio, USA. Board Member: Abbott Laboratories, Teledyne Technologies Inc. and Target Corporation. Holdings in Ericsson¹⁾: 3,000 Class B shares.

Principal work experience and other information: President of Austin Investment Advisors since 2004. President and CEO of Move Networks Inc. 2009–2010. President and CEO of DIRECTV 2001–2003. Corporate Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of Hughes Electronics Corporation 1997–2000, which she joined in 1993. Previously a partner at Deloitte & Touche. Member of the board of trustees of the California Science Center. Member of the California State Society of certified Public Accountants and the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants.

202

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Sir Peter L. Bonfield (first elected 2002).

Member of the Audit Committee.

Born 1944. Honors degree in Engineering, Loughborough University, Leicestershire, UK. Board Chairman: NXP Semiconductors. Deputy Chairman: British Quality Foundation. Board Member: Mentor Graphics Inc., Sony Corporation, TSMC and Actis Capital LLP. Holdings in Ericsson¹): 4,400 Class B shares.

Principal work experience and other information: CEO and Chairman of the Executive Committee of British Telecommunications plc. 1996–2002. Chairman and CEO of ICL plc 1990–1996. Positions with STC plc and Texas Instruments Inc. Member of the Advisory Boards of New Venture Partners LLP, the Longreach Group and Apax Partners LLP. Board Mentor of CMi. Senior Advisor, Rothschild, London. Fellow of the Royal Academy of Engineering.

Börje Ekholm (first elected 2006)

Member of the Remuneration Committee.

Born 1963. Master of Science in Electrical Engineering, Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm. Master of Business Administration, INSEAD, France. Board Chairman: Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm. Board Member: Investor AB, AB Chalmersinvest, EQT Partners AB, Husqvarna AB, Lindorff Group AB, the Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm and Scania. Holdings in Ericsson¹⁾: 30,760 Class B shares.

Principal work experience and other information: President and CEO of Investor AB since 2005. Formerly Head of Investor Growth Capital Inc. and New Investments. Previous positions at Novare Kapital AB and McKinsey & Co Inc.

Ulf J. Johansson (first elected 2005)

Chairman of the Audit Committee.

Born 1945. Doctor of Technology and Master of Science in Electrical Engineering, Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm. Board Chairman: Acando AB, Eurostep Group AB, Novo A/S, Novo Nordisk Foundation, and Trimble Navigation Ltd. Board Member: Jump Tap Inc. Holdings in Ericsson¹⁾: 6,435 Class B shares.

Principal work experience and other information: Founder of Europolitan Vodafone AB, where he was the Chairman of the Board 1990–2005. Previous positions at Spectra-Physics AB as President and CEO and at Ericsson Radio Systems AB. Member of the Royal Academy of Engineering Sciences.

Nancy McKinstry (first elected 2004)

Member of the Remuneration Committee.

Born 1959. Master of Business Administration in Finance and Marketing, Columbia University, USA. Bachelor of Arts in Economics, University of Rhode Island, USA. Board Chairman: CEO and Chairman of the Executive Board of Wolters Kluwer n.v. Board Member: TiasNimbas Business School. Holdings in Ericsson¹⁾: 4,000 Class B shares.

Principal work experience and other information: CEO and Chairman of the Executive Board of Wolters Kluwer n.v. President and CEO of CCH Legal Information Services 1996–1999. Previous positions at Booz, Allen & Hamilton, and New England Telephone Company. Member of the Advisory Board of the University of Rhode Island, the Advisory Council of the Amsterdam Institute of Finance, the Dutch Advisory Council of INSEAD, the Board of Overseers of Columbia Business School and the Advisory Board of the Harrington School of Communication and Media.

203

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Anders Nyrén (first elected 2006)

Member of the Finance Committee.

Born 1954. Graduate of Stockholm School of Economics, Master of Business Administration from Anderson School of Management, UCLA, USA. Board Chairman: Sandvik AB. Vice Chairman Svenska Handelsbanken. Board Member: Svenska Cellulosa Aktiebolaget SCA, AB Industrivärden, SSAB, AB Volvo, Ernströmgruppen and Stockholm School of Economics. Holdings in Ericsson¹⁾: 6,686 Class B shares.

Principal work experience and other information: President and CEO of Industrivärden since 2001. CFO and EVP of Skanska AB 1997–2001. Director Capital Markets of Nordbanken 1996–1997. CFO and EVP of Securum AB 1992–1996. Managing Director of OM International AB 1987–1992. Earlier positions at STC Scandinavian Trading Co AB and AB Wilhelm Becker.

Carl-Henric Svanberg (first elected 2003)

Born 1952. Master of Science, Linköping Institute of Technology. Bachelor of Science in Business Administration, University of Uppsala. Board Chairman: BP p.l.c. Board Member: Melker Schörling AB and University of Uppsala. Holdings in Ericsson¹⁾: 3,234,441 Class B shares.

Principal work experience and other information: President and CEO of Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson 2003-2009. President and CEO of Assa Abloy AB 1994–2003. Various positions within Securitas AB 1986–1994 and Asea Brown Boveri (ABB) 1977–1985. Member of the Steering Committee of the Global Alliance for Information and Communication Technologies and Development (GAID), the External Advisory Board of the Earth Institute at Columbia University and the Advisory Board of Harvard Kennedy School. Holds Honorary Doctorates at Luleå University of Technology and Linköping University and is the recipient of the King of Sweden’s medal for his contribution to Swedish industry.

Hans Vestberg (first elected 2010)

Born 1965. Bachelor of Business Administration and Economics, University of Uppsala. Board Chairman: ST-Ericsson and Svenska Handbollförbundet. Board Member: Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB and Thernlunds AB. Holdings in Ericsson¹⁾: 54,368 Class B shares.

Principal work experience and other information: President and CEO as of January 1, 2010. First Executive Vice President until December 31, 2009. Chief Financial Officer and Head of Group Function Finance until October 31, 2009. Previously Executive Vice President and Head of Business Unit Global Services. Has held various positions in the Company since 1988, including Vice President and Head of Market Unit Mexico and Head of Finance and Control in USA, Brazil and Chile.

Michelangelo Volpi (first elected 2010)

Born 1966. Bachelor of Science in Mechanical Engineering and Masters in Manufacturing Systems Engineering from Stanford University, USA. MBA from the Stanford Graduate School of Business, USA. Board Member: None. Holdings in Ericsson¹⁾: None.

Principal work experience and other information: Partner at Index Ventures since July 2009. Previously CEO of Joost Inc.. Employed by Cisco from 1994-2007 in positions including Senior Vice President & General Manager of the Routing and Service Provider Technology Group and Chief Strategy Officer. Has also worked for Hewlett Packard in the optoelectronics division.

204

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

MEMBERS OF THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS

Board members and deputies appointed by the unions

Jan Hedlund (first appointed 1994)

Employee representative, Member of the Audit Committee

Born 1946. Appointed by the IF Metall union.

Holdings in Ericsson¹⁾: 964 Class B shares.

Employed since 1982. Previously working with model production mechanics within Business Unit Networks and currently working full time as union representative.

Anna Guldstrand (first appointed 2004)

Employee representative, Member of the Finance Committee

Born 1964. Appointed by the union The Swedish Association of Graduate Engineers.

Holdings in Ericsson¹⁾: 1,667 Class B shares.

Employed since 1996. Working as knowledge manager within Business Unit Global Services.

Karin Åberg (first appointed 2007)

Employee representative, Member of the Remuneration Committee

Born 1959. Appointed by the union Unionen.

Holdings in Ericsson¹⁾: 1,900 Class B shares.

Employed since 1995. Working as Service Engineer within Business Unit Global Services.

Kristina Davidsson (first appointed 2006)

Deputy employee representative

Born 1955. Appointed by the IF Metall union.

Holdings in Ericsson¹⁾: 1,146 Class B shares.

Employed since 1995. Previously working as repairman within Business Unit Networks and currently working full time as union representative.

Pehr Claesson (first appointed 2008)

Deputy employee representative

Born 1966. Appointed by the union The Swedish Association of Graduate Engineers.

Holdings in Ericsson¹⁾: 619 Class B shares

Employed since 1997. Working with marketing and communication for Consulting and Systems Integration within Business Unit Global Services.

Karin Lennartsson (first appointed 2010)

Deputy employee representative

Born 1957. Appointed by the Unionen union.

Holdings in Ericsson¹⁾: 328 Class B shares.

Employed since 1976. Working as Process Expert within Group Function Finance—Process and Quality.

Hans Vestberg was the only Director who held an operational management position at Ericsson in 2010. No Director has been elected pursuant to an arrangement or understanding with any major shareholder, customer, supplier or other person.

1) The number of Class B shares (and Class A shares, if applicable) includes holdings by related natural or legal persons and American Depositary Receipts, where applicable.

205

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

COMPANY MANAGEMENT

The President/CEO and Group management

The Board of Directors appoints the President and CEO and the Executive Vice Presidents. The President and CEO is responsible for the management of day-to-day operations and is supported by the Group management, called the Executive Leadership Team (ELT). In addition to the President and CEO, the ELT consists of heads of Group functions, heads of business units, two regional heads and the Chief Brand Officer. The role of the ELT is to:

• Establish a long-term vision, a strong corporate culture and group strategies and policies, all based on objectives stated by the Board

• Determine targets for operational units, allocate resources and monitor unit performance

• Secure operational excellence and realize global synergies through efficient organization of the Group.

Remuneration of the Executive Leadership Team

A Remuneration policy including guidelines on remuneration and other employment terms for the ELT were approved by the AGM 2010. For further information on fixed and variable remuneration, see the Remuneration Report and Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—Note C29, “Information Regarding Members of the Board of Directors, the Group management and Employees” in the Annual Report.

The Ericsson Group Management System

The CEO and heads of Group functions have implemented a management system to ensure that the business is managed:

• So that the objectives of Ericsson’s major stakeholders (customers, shareholders, employees) are fulfilled

• Within established risk limits and with reliable internal control

• So the Company is compliant with applicable laws, listing requirements and governance codes and fulfills its corporate social responsibilities.

Ericsson is ISO 9001 (quality) and ISO 14001 (environment) globally certified and ISO 27001 (information security) certified in selected units. Certification to OHSAS 18001 (health & safety) is ongoing. The management system is an important foundation and is continuously evaluated and improved in line with ISO requirements.

The Ericsson Group Management System comprises three elements:

• Management and control: corporate culture, objective setting, strategy formulation and steering documents such as Group policies and directives

• Operational processes and IT tools: to support operational excellence and leverage Ericsson’s scale advantages

• Organization and resources.

Risk management is an integrated part of the Ericsson Group Management System.

206

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Management and control

Strategy, targets and monitoring

Ericsson uses balanced scorecards as tools for translating strategic objectives into a set of performance indicators for its operational units. These focus primarily on:

• Market and customer performance

• Competitive position

• Internal efficiency

• Financial performance

• Employee satisfaction and empowerment.

Based on the annual strategy work, these scorecards are updated with targets for each unit for the next year and communicated throughout the organization. The balanced scorecard is also used as a management tool to align operating unit and individual goals to Company goals, follow up progress and monitor identified risks.

207

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Corporate culture

Corporate culture has long been acknowledged as an important factor for driving behavior, not only for compliance but also in communication, decision making, efficiency and reaching objectives. Respect, professionalism and perseverance are the values that underpin Ericsson’s culture, guiding daily work, relationships and business. Consequently, executive management makes the communication and development of Ericsson’s culture a key task in the management of the Group.

Group policies and directives

Group-wide policies and directives govern how the organization works. These include a Code of Business Ethics, policies on roles and responsibilities, segregation of duties, capital expenditures, management of intellectual property rights, financial reporting, environmental matters, and risk management.

Operational processes and IT tools

As a market leader, Ericsson tries to utilize the competitive advantages that are gained through scale and has implemented common processes and IT tools across all its operational units. Through management and continuous improvement of these processes and IT tools, Ericsson reduces costs with standardized internal controls and performance indicators.

Organization and resources

Ericsson is operated in two dimensions:

• Legal entities: more than 200 companies in more than 100 countries

• Operational units: Four business units and ten regions.

In addition, Group functions coordinate Ericsson’s strategies, operations and resource allocation and define the necessary directives, processes and organization for the effective governance of the Group.

Risk management

Ericsson’s risk management is integrated with the business and its operational processes and is a part of the Ericsson Group Management System to ensure accountability, effectiveness, efficiency, business continuity and compliance with corporate governance, legal and other requirements. The Board of Directors is also actively engaged in the Company’s risk management. Risks related to set long-term objectives are discussed and strategies are formally approved by the Board as part of the annual strategy process. Risks related to annual targets for the Company are also reviewed by the Board and then monitored continuously during the year. Certain transactional risks require specific Board approval, e.g. acquisitions, management remuneration, borrowing or customer finance in excess of pre-defined limits.

Strategic and tactical risks

Strategic risks constitute the highest risk to the Company if not managed properly as they could have a long-term impact. Ericsson therefore reviews its long-term objectives, main strategies and business scope on an annual basis and continuously works on the tactics to reach these objectives and mitigate any risks identified.

208

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

In the annual strategy and target setting process, objectives are set for the next five years, risks and opportunities are assessed and strategies are developed to achieve the objectives. The strategy process in the Company is well established and involves regions, business units and Group functions. The strategy is finally summarized and discussed in a yearly senior management meeting with approximately 250 managers from all parts of the business. By involving all parts of the business in the process, potential risks are identified early and mitigating actions can be incorporated in the strategy and in the annual target process following the finalization of the strategy.

Technology development, industry and market fundamentals as well as the development of the economy are key components in the evaluation of risks related to Ericsson’s long-term objectives.

The outcome from the strategy process forms the basis for the annual target process which involves regions, business units and Group functions. Risks and opportunities linked to the targets are identified as part of this process together with actions to mitigate the identified risks. Follow-up of targets, risks and mitigating actions are reported and discussed continuously in business unit and region steering groups as well as being reviewed by the Board of Directors.

The Company has been using the Balanced Scorecard concept to structure its targets, risks and opportunities for many years. For 2010 risks and opportunities were identified and analyzed in the five balanced scorecard perspectives. For more information on risks related to Ericsson’s business, see Risk Factors.

Operational and financial risks

Operational risks are owned and managed by operational units. Risk management is embedded in various process controls, such as decision tollgates and approvals. Certain cross-process risks, such as information security/IT, corporate responsibility & business continuity and insurable risks are centrally coordinated. Financial risk management is governed by a Group policy and carried out by the Treasury and Customer Finance functions, both supervised by the Finance Committee. The policy governs risk exposures related to foreign exchange, liquidity/financing, interest rates, credit risk and market price risk in equity instruments. For further information

209

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

on financial risk management, see Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements – Note C14, “Trade Receivables and Customer Finance”, Note C19, “Interest-Bearing Liabilities” and Note C20, “Financial Risk Management and Financial Instruments”.

Compliance risks

Ericsson has implemented Group policies and directives to ensure compliance with applicable laws and regulations, including a Code of Business Ethics and a Code of Conduct. Risk management is integrated in the Company’s business processes. Policies and controls are implemented to ensure compliance with financial reporting standards and stock market regulations, e.g. the US Sarbanes-Oxley Act.

Monitoring and audits

Company management monitors the compliance with policies, directives and processes through internal self-assessment within all units. This is complemented by internal and external audits. External financial audits are performed by PwC, and ISO/management system audits by Det Norske Veritas, DNV. Internal audits are performed by the company’s internal audit function which reports to the Audit Committee. Audits of suppliers are also conducted in order to secure compliance with agreed key performance indicators and Ericsson’s Code of Conduct which is mandatory for suppliers to the Ericsson Group.

210

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

MEMBERS OF THE EXECUTIVE LEADERSHIP TEAM

Hans Vestberg

President and CEO (since January 1, 2010).

Born 1965. Bachelor of Business Administration, University of Uppsala. Board member: Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB and Thernlunds AB. Chairman: ST-Ericsson and Svenska Handbollförbundet. Holdings in Ericsson¹⁾: 54,368 Class B shares.

Background: Chief Financial Officer and Head of Group Function Finance until October 31, 2009. Previously Executive Vice President and Head of Business Unit Global Services. Has held various positions in the Company since 1988, including Vice President and Head of Market Unit Mexico and Head of Finance and Control in USA, Brazil and Chile.

Jan Frykhammar

Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer and Head of Group Function Finance (since 2009).

Born 1965. Bachelor of Business Administration and Economics, University of Uppsala. Board member: Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB, ST-Ericsson. Holdings in Ericsson¹⁾: 3,650 Class B shares.

Background: Previously Senior Vice President and Head of Business Unit Global Services. Has held various positions within Ericsson such as Sales and Business Control in Business Unit Global Services, CFO in North America and Vice President, Finance and Commercial within the Global Customer Account for Vodafone.

Johan Wibergh

Executive Vice President (since January 1, 2010) and Head of Business Unit Networks (since 2008).

Born 1963. Master of Computer Science, Linköping Institute of Technology. Holdings in Ericsson¹⁾: 19,967 Class B shares.

Background: President of Ericsson Brazil. Has also been President of Market Unit Nordic and Baltics, Vice President and Head of Sales at Business Unit Global Services.

Cesare Avenia

Chief Brand Officer (since 2010).

Born 1950. Bachelor’s degree of Electronics engineering, University of Naples, Italy. Board member: Member of the Steering Committee for Innovation and Technology Services within the Association of Telecom service providers within Confindustria, the National Association of Industralists in Italy. Holdings in Ericsson¹⁾: 11,618 Class B shares.

Background: Previously Head of Market Unit Italy.

Carl Olof Blomqvist

Senior Vice President, General Counsel and Head of Group Function Legal Affairs (since 1999).

Born 1951. Master of Law, LLM, University of Uppsala. Holdings in Ericsson¹⁾: 1,216 Class A shares and 38,914 Class B shares.

Background: Previously partner of Mannheimer Swartling law firm.

211

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Bina Chaurasia

Senior Vice President and Head of Group Function Human Resources and Organization (since November 2010).

Born 1962. Holds a Master of Science in Management and Human Resources from the Ohio State University and a Masters of Arts in Philosophy from the University of Wisconsin. Holdings in Ericsson¹⁾: 11,627 Class B shares.

Background: Joined Ericsson from Hewlett Packard, where she was the Vice President of Global Talent Management. Has also held senior HR leadership roles at Gap, Sun Microsystems and PepsiCo/Yum.

Håkan Eriksson

Senior Vice President, Chief Technology Officer, Head of Group Function Technology & Portfolio Management (since 2003) and Head of Ericsson in Silicon Valley (since January 1, 2010).

Born 1961. Master of Science and Honorary Ph D, Linköping Institute of Technology. Board member: Vestas. Holdings in Ericsson¹⁾: 32,130 Class B shares.

Background: Previously Senior Vice President and Head of Research and Development. Has held various positions within Ericsson since 1986.

Douglas L. Gilstrap

Senior Vice President and Head of Group Function Strategy (since 2009).

Born 1963. Bachelor in accounting from the University of Richmond, Master of Business Administration, Emory University, Atlanta. Holdings in Ericsson¹⁾: 2,643 Class B shares.

Background: CFO and Co-Founder of Asia Pacific Exploration Consolidated (APEC), Has also held various global managerial positions in different companies within the telecommunications and IT sector for more than 15 years.

Mats H. Olsson

Head of Region China & North East Asia (since 2010).

Born 1954. Master of Business Administration from the Stockholm School of Economics. Holdings in Ericsson¹⁾: 43,088 Class B shares.

Background: Previously Head of Market Unit Greater China and has held various positions in Asia for Ericsson. Appointed President of Ericsson Greater China in 2004, with overall responsibility for Mainland China, Hong Kong, Macao and Taiwan.

212

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Magnus Mandersson

Senior Vice President and Head of Business Unit Global Services (since 2010).

Born 1959. Bachelor of Business Administration, University of Lund. Holdings in Ericsson¹⁾: 8,605 Class B shares.

Background: Previously Head of Business Unit CDMA, Head of Market Unit Northern Europe and Global Customer Account Deutsche Telekom AG.

Rima Qureshi

Senior Vice President and Head of Business Unit CDMA Mobile Systems (since 2010).

Born 1965. Holds a Bachelor’s degree of Information Systems and a Master’s degree of administration, McGill University, Montreal, Canada. Holdings in Ericsson¹⁾: 2,662 Class B shares

Background: Also serves as head of Ericsson Response. Previously head of the AT&T Improvement Program within Market Unit North America.

Angel Ruiz

Head of Region North America (since 2010).

Born 1956. Bachelor’s degree in Electrical Engineering from University of Central Florida and a Master’s degree in Management Science and Information Systems from Johns Hopkins University, USA. Holdings in Ericsson¹⁾: 21,688 Class B shares.

Background: Previously Head of Market Unit North America. He joined Ericsson in 1990 and has held a variety of sales and managerial positions within the company, including heading up the global account teams for Cingular/SBC/BellSouth (now AT&T). Appointed President of Ericsson North America in 2001.

Henry Sténson

Senior Vice President and Head of Group Function Communications (since 2002).

Born 1955. Studied law, sociology and political science, Linköping University and at the Swedish War Academy, Karlberg, Stockholm. Board member: Stronghold Invest AB. Holdings in Ericsson¹⁾: 27,855 Class B shares.

Background: Previously Head of SAS Group Communication.

213

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Jan Wäreby

Senior Vice President and Head of Business Unit Multimedia (since 2007).

Born 1956. Master of Science, Chalmers University, Göteborg. Board member: Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB, ST-Ericsson. Holdings in Ericsson¹⁾: 47,551 Class B shares.

Background: Executive Vice President and Head of Sales and Marketing for Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications from 2002-2006.

AUDITORS

According to the Articles of Association, the Parent Company shall have no less than one and no more than three registered public accounting firms as external independent auditors. The auditors have been elected by the shareholders at the Annual General Meeting for periods of four years. However, according to a recent change in the Swedish Companies Act, the mandate period of the Auditors shall be one year, unless the Articles of Association provides for a longer mandate period up to four years. The auditors report to the shareholders at General Meetings.

The auditors:

• Update the Board of Directors regarding the planning, scope and content of the annual audit

• Examine the interim and year-end financial statements to assess accuracy and completeness of the accounts and adherence to accounting standards and policies

• Advise the Board of Directors of non-audit services performed, the consideration paid and other issues that determine the auditors’ independence.

For further information on the contacts between the Board and the auditors, please see “Work of the Board of Directors” earlier in the report.

All Ericsson’s quarterly reports are reviewed by the auditors.

Current auditor

PricewaterhouseCoopers AB was elected at the Annual General Meeting 2007 for a period of four years until the close of the Annual General Meeting 2011.

PricewaterhouseCoopers AB has appointed Peter Clemedtson, Authorized Public Accountant, to serve as auditor in charge. Peter Clemedtson is also auditor in charge of Skandinaviska Enskilda Banken.

Fees to the auditor

Ericsson paid the fees (including expenses) for audit-related and other services listed in the table in Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—Note C31, “Fees to Auditors” in the Annual Report.

214

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING 2010

This section has been prepared in accordance with the Annual Accounts Act and the Swedish Corporate Governance Code and is limited to internal control over financial reporting.

Since Ericsson is listed in the United States, the requirements outlined in the Sarbanes-Oxley Act (SOX) apply. These regulate the establishment and maintenance of internal controls over financial reporting as well as management’s assessment of the effectiveness of the controls.

In order to comply with SOX, the Company has implemented detailed documented controls and testing and reporting procedures based on the COSO framework for internal control. The COSO framework is issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission.

Management’s internal control report according to SOX will be included in Ericsson’s Annual Report on Form 20-F and filed with the SEC in the United States.

During 2010, the Company has included operations of acquired entities as well as continued to improve the design and execution of its financial reporting controls.

Disclosure policies

Ericsson’s financial disclosure policies aim to ensure transparent, relevant and consistent communication with the equity and debt investors on a fair and equal basis. This will support a fair market value for Ericsson shares. Ericsson wants current and potential investors to have a good understanding of how the Company works, including operational performance, prospects and potential risks.

To achieve these objectives, financial reporting and disclosure must be:

• Transparent—enhancing understanding of the economic drivers and operational performance of the business, building trust and credibility

• Consistent—comparable in scope and level of detail to facilitate comparison between reporting periods

• Simple—to support understanding of business operations and performance and to avoid misinterpretations

• Relevant—with focus on what is relevant to Ericsson’s stakeholders or required by regulation or listing agreements, to avoid information overload

• Timely—with regular scheduled disclosures as well as ad-hoc information, such as press releases on important events, performed on a timely basis

• Fair and equal—where all material information is published via press releases to ensure the whole investor community receives the information at the same time

• Complete, free from material errors and a reflection of best practice—disclosure is compliant with applicable financial reporting standards and listing requirements and in line with industry norms.

Ericsson’s website (www.ericsson.com/investors) comprises comprehensive information on the Group, including:

• An archive of annual and interim reports

• On-demand access to recent news

• Copies of presentations given by senior management at industry conferences.

(Information on the Ericsson website does not form part of this Report).

215

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Disclosure controls and procedures

Ericsson has controls and procedures in place to ensure timely information disclosure under the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and under agreements with NASDAQ and NASDAQ OMX Stockholm. These procedures also ensure that such information is provided to management, including the CEO and CFO, so timely decisions can be made regarding required disclosure.

The Disclosure Committee comprises 15 members with various expertise. It assists managers in fulfilling their responsibility regarding disclosures made to the shareholders and the investment community. One of the main tasks of the committee is to monitor the integrity and effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures.

Ericsson has investments in certain entities that the Company does not control or manage. With respect to such entities, disclosure controls and procedures are substantially more limited than those maintained with respect to subsidiaries.

During the year, Ericsson’s President and CEO and the CFO evaluated the disclosure controls and procedures and concluded that they were effective at a reasonable assurance level as at December 31, 2010.

During the period covered by the Annual Report 2010, there were no changes to the disclosure controls and procedures that have materially affected, or are likely to materially affect, the internal control over financial reporting.

Internal control over financial reporting

Ericsson has integrated risk management and internal control into its business processes. As defined in the COSO framework, internal control includes components such as a control environment, risk assessment, control activities, information and communication and monitoring.

Control environment

The Company’s internal control structure is based on the division of labor between the Board of Directors and its Committees and the President and CEO. The Company has implemented a management system that is based on:

• Steering documents, such as policies, directives and a Code of Business Ethics

• A strong corporate culture

• The Company’s organization and mode of operations, with well-defined roles and responsibilities and delegations of authority

• Several well-defined group-wide processes for planning, operations and support.

The most essential parts of the control environment relative to financial reporting are included in steering documents and processes for accounting and financial reporting. These steering documents are updated regularly to include, among other things:

• Changes to laws

• Financial reporting standards and listing requirements, such as IFRS and SOX.

The processes include specific controls to be performed to ensure high quality reports. The management of each reporting legal entity, region and business unit is supported by a financial controller function with execution of controls related to transactions and reporting. A financial controller function is also established on Group level, reporting to the CFO.

216

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Risk assessment

Risks of material misstatements in financial reporting may exist in relation to recognition and measurement of assets, liabilities, revenue and cost or insufficient disclosure. Other risks related to financial reporting include fraud, loss or embezzlement of assets and undue favorable treatment of counterparties at the expense of the Company.

Policies and directives regarding accounting and financial reporting cover areas of particular significance to support correct, complete and timely accounting, reporting and disclosure.

Identified types of risks are mitigated through well-defined business processes with integrated risk management activities, segregation of duties and appropriate delegation of authority. This requires specific approval of material transactions and ensures adequate asset management.

Control activities

The Company’s business processes include financial controls regarding the approval and accounting of business transactions. The financial closing and reporting process has controls regarding recognition, measurement and disclosure. These include the application of critical accounting policies and estimates, in individual subsidiaries as well as in the consolidated accounts.

Regular analyses of the financial results for each subsidiary, region and business unit cover the significant elements of assets, liabilities, revenues, costs and cash flow. Together with further analysis of the consolidated financial statements performed at Group level, this ensures that the financial reports do not contain material errors.

For external financial reporting purposes, additional controls performed by the Disclosure Committee ensure that all disclosure requirements are fulfilled.

The Company has implemented controls to ensure that the financial reports are prepared in accordance with its internal accounting and reporting policies and IFRS as well as with relevant listing regulations. It maintains detailed documentation on internal controls related to accounting and financial reporting. It also keeps records on the monitoring of the execution and results of such controls. This ensures that the CEO and CFO can assess the effectiveness of the controls in a way that is compliant with SOX.

Entity-wide controls, focusing on the control environment and compliance with the financial reporting policies and directives, are implemented in all subsidiaries. Detailed process controls and documentation of controls performed are also implemented in almost all subsidiaries, covering all items with significant materiality and risk.

To ensure efficient and standardized accounting and reporting processes, the Company operates several shared services centers. Based on a common IT platform, a common chart of account and common master data, the centers perform accounting and financial reporting services for most subsidiaries.

Information and communication

The Company’s information and communication channels support complete, correct and timely financial reporting by making all relevant internal process instructions and policies accessible to all the employees concerned. Regular updates and briefing documents regarding changes in accounting policies, reporting and disclosure requirements are also supplied.

217

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Subsidiaries and operating units prepare regular financial and management reports to internal steering groups and Company management. These include analysis and comments on financial performance and risks. The Board of Directors receives financial reports monthly. The Audit Committee of the Board has established a whistleblower procedure for reporting violations in accounting, internal controls and auditing matters.

Monitoring

The Company’s process for financial reporting is reviewed annually by the management. This forms a basis for evaluating the internal management system and internal steering documents to ensure that they cover all significant areas related to financial reporting. The shared service center management continuously monitors accounting quality through a set of performance indicators. Compliance with policies and directives is monitored through annual self-assessments and representation letters from heads and controllers in all subsidiaries as well as in business units and regions.

The Company’s financial performance is also reviewed at each Board meeting. The committees of the Board fulfill important monitoring functions regarding remuneration, borrowing, investments, customer finance, cash management, financial reporting and internal control. The Audit Committee and the Board of Directors review all interim and annual financial reports before they are released to the market. The Company’s internal audit function, which reports to the Audit Committee, performs independent audits. The Audit Committee also receives regular reports from the external auditor. The Audit Committee follows up on any actions taken to improve or modify controls.

THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS

Stockholm, February 21, 2011 Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) Org. no. 556016–0680

218

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

AUDITOR’S REPORT ON THE CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT

To the annual meeting of the shareholders in Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ), corporate identity number 556016-0680

It is the Board of Directors who is responsible for the corporate governance report for the year 2010 and that it has been prepared in accordance with the Annual Accounts Act.

As a basis for our opinion that the corporate governance report has been prepared and is consistent with the annual accounts and the consolidated accounts, we have read the corporate governance report and assessed its statutory content based on our knowledge of the company.

In our opinion, the corporate governance report has been prepared and its statutory content is consistent with the annual accounts and the consolidated accounts.

Stockholm 21 February, 2011

Peter Clemedtson

Authorized Public Accountant PricewaterhouseCoopers AB

219

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

UNCERTAINTIES IN THE FUTURE

Some of the information provided in this material is or may contain forward-looking information such as statements about expectations, assumptions about future market conditions, projections or other characterizations of future events. The words “believe”, “expect”, “anticipate”, “intend”, “may”, “plan”, the negative of such terms, and similar expressions are intended to identify these statements. Although we believe that the expectations reflected in these and other forward-looking statements are reasonable, we can give no assurance that these expectations will prove to be correct and actual results may differ materially. We undertake no obligation to publicly update or revise any forward-looking statements, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise, except as required by law or stock exchange regulation. We advise you that Ericsson is subject to risks both specific to our industry and specific to our company that could cause the actual results to differ materially from those contained in our projections or forward-looking statements, including, among others, changing conditions in the telecommunications industry, political economic and regulatory developments in our markets, our management’s ability to develop and execute a successful strategy, various financial risks such as interest rate changes and exchange rate changes, erosion of our market position, structure and financial strength of our customer base, our credit ratings, product development risks, supply constraints, and our ability to recruit and retain quality staff.

220

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

MANAGEMENT’S REPORT ON INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING

Ericsson’s management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting for the Company. Ericsson’s internal control system related to financial reporting is designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles and includes those policies and procedures that:

• pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the Company;

• provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the Company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the Company; and

• provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use or disposition of the Company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

Although the purpose of internal control systems is to ensure adequate risk management all internal control systems, no matter how well designed, have inherent limitations which may result in that misstatements are not prevented or detected. Therefore, even systems determined to be effective can provide only reasonable assurance with respect to the reliability of financial statement preparation and presentation.

Ericsson’s management assessed the effectiveness of Ericsson’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2010. In making this assessment, management used the criteria set forth in “Internal Control—Integrated Framework”, issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission.

Based on this assessment, management has concluded that, as of December 31, 2010, Ericsson’s internal control over financial reporting was effective. The effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2010, has been audited by PricewaterhouseCoopers AB, an independent registered public accounting firm. PricewaterhouseCoopers AB has issued an attestation report on Ericsson’s internal control over financial reporting, which appears on page 67.

221

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION

The following information is provided for purposes of complying with certain requirements of Form 20-F which are not satisfied in full by the information in the Swedish Annual Report.

CONTENTS
GENERAL FACTS ON THE COMPANY	222
COMPANY HISTORY AND DEVELOPMENT	223
EXCHANGE RATES	224
PRIMARY MANUFACTURING AND ASSEMBLY FACILITIES	224
OPERATING RESULTS	225
MEMORANDUM AND ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION	227
EXCHANGE CONTROLS	231
TAXATION	231
DEPOSITARY FEES AND CHARGES	235
INDEPENDENCE REQUIREMENTS	236
AUDIT COMMITTEE PRE-APPROVAL POLICIES AND PROCEDURES	237
INVESTMENTS	238

GENERAL FACTS ON THE COMPANY

Legal name of the Parent Company:

Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ)

Organization number:

556016-0680

Legal form of the Parent Company: A Swedish limited liability company, organized under the Swedish Companies Act. The terms “Ericsson”, “the Company”, “the Group”, “us”, “we”, and “our” all refer to Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson and its subsidiaries.

Country of incorporation: Sweden.

Date of incorporation: The Parent Company was incorporated on August 18, 1918, as a result of a merger between AB LM Ericsson & Co. and Stockholms Allmänna Telefon AB.

Domicile: Our registered office is Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson, SE–164 83 Stockholm, Sweden. Our headquarters are located at Torshamnsgatan 23, Kista, Sweden.

Telephone number: +46 10 719 0000

Website: www.ericsson.com

Agent in the US: Ericsson Inc., Vice President Legal Affairs, 6300 Legacy Drive, Plano, Texas 75024. Telephone number: +1 972 583 0000.

222

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Shares: Ericsson’s Class A and Class B shares are traded on NASDAQ OMX Stockholm. In the US, our American Depository Shares (ADS), each representing one underlying Class B share, are traded on NASDAQ.

Parent Company operations: The business of the Parent Company, Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson, consists mainly of corporate management, holding company functions and internal banking activities. Parent Company operations also include customer credit management activities performed by Ericsson Credit AB on a commission basis.

Subsidiaries and associated companies: For a listing of our significant subsidiaries, please see section “Investments”. In addition to our joint ventures Sony Ericsson and ST-Ericsson, we are engaged in a number of other minor joint ventures, cooperative arrangements and venture capital initiatives. For more information regarding risks associated with joint ventures, strategic alliances and third-party agreements please see Risk Factors, “Market, Technology and Business Risks”.

Documents on display: We file annual reports and other information (normally in Swedish only) for certain domestic legal entities with Bolagsverket (Swedish Companies Registration Office) pursuant to Swedish rules and regulations.

You may order any of these reports from their website www.bolagsverket.se. If you access these reports, please be aware that the information included may not be indicative of our published consolidated results in all aspects. Other than information related to the Parent Company, only consolidated numbers for the Group totals are included in our reports.

Filing in the US: Annual reports and other information are filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) in the United States, pursuant to the rules and regulations that apply to foreign private issuers. Electronic access to these documents may be obtained from the SEC’s website, www.sec.gov/edgar/searchedgar/webusers.htm, where they are stored in the EDGAR database.

COMPANY HISTORY AND DEVELOPMENT

Innovating to empower people, business and society

Our origins date back to 1876 when Alexander Graham Bell filed a patent application in the United States for the telephone. The same year, Lars Magnus Ericsson opened a small workshop in Stockholm to repair telegraph instruments and sell his own telephone equipment.

Today, Ericsson is a leading provider of communications equipment, professional services and multimedia solutions. Our customers are operators of mobile and fixed networks worldwide. Over 1,000 networks in more than 180 countries utilize our equipment. More than 40 percent of all mobile traffic goes through Ericsson equipment.

TECHNICAL MILESTONES

• 1878 Telegraph to telephone

• 1923 Manual switching to automatic switching

• 1981 Fixed communications to mobile communications

• 1998 Integration of voice and data in mobile networks

• 2001 Launch of WCDMA/3G networks in Western Europe

• 2006 Launch of HSPA mobile broadband networks globally

• 2009 Mobile broadband traffic gains momentum and first LTE network launched

223

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

EXCHANGE RATES

The following tables provide information with respect to the exchange rate for SEK per USD 1.00, based on the noon buying rate for cable transfers in SEK as certified for customs purposes by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York. The noon buying rate of March 25 2011, was SEK 6.3552 per USD 1.00. The average is computed using the noon buying rate on the last business day of each month during the period indicated.

Average exchange rates

Year ended December 31			Average
2006				7.3098
2007				6.7232
2008				6.6424
2009				7.6232
2010				7.1895
Exchange rates, monthly high and low
Month	High		Low
September 2010		7.3134		6.7144
October 2010		6.7725		6.5580
November 2010		7.0130		6.5145
December 2010		6.9666		6.7571
January 2011		6.8977		6.4318
February 2011		6.5005		6.3442

We describe the effects of exchange rate fluctuations on our business in the Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—Note C20, “Financial Risk Management and Financial Instruments.”

PRIMARY MANUFACTURING AND ASSEMBLY FACILITIES

We continuously adjust our production capacity to meet expected customer demand. At year-end 2010, our overall capacity utilization was close to 100 percent. The table “Primary manufacturing and assembly facilities” summarizes where we have major sites as well as the total floor space at year-end. In Sweden, the majority of the floor space within our production facilities is used for node assembly and verification.

Primary manufacturing and assembly facilities

	2010				2009				2008
	Sites		Thousands of sq meters		Sites		Thousands of sq meters		Sites		Thousands of sq meters
Sweden		6		204.4		8		224.7		8		226.0
China		4		61.1		4		46.4		4		38.5
Estonia		1		20.6		1		26.6		—		—
Italy		2		20.1		2		20.1		2		20.1
Brazil		1		23.3		1		23.3		1		18.0
India		1		15.6		1		13.6		1		9.0
USA		—		—		—		—		1		5.0
Other		—		—		—		—		1		0.3
Total		15		345.1		17		354.7		18		316.9

224

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

OPERATING RESULTS

Years ended December 31, 2009 and 2010

Please refer to Board of Directors’ Report.

Years ended December 31, 2008 and 2009

Net sales

Consolidated

Consolidated net sales decreased by SEK 1 percent, to SEK 206.5 billion in 2009 from SEK 208.9 billion in 2008. Increased sales in the first half of 2009 were offset in the second half by the impact from the economic slowdown. Overall, sales declined marginally from last year to SEK 206.5 billion. Sales for comparable units were stable year over year, i.e. excluding SEK 2.7 billion of sales from the acquired Nortel business in North America in the fourth quarter and SEK 5.2 billion in 2008 from the divested PBX and mobile platform operations. Adjusted also for effects of exchange rates and hedging, sales declined 9 percent. Lower sales in Networks were largely offset by higher sales in Global Services and Multimedia. The economic downturn coupled with tighter credit supply impacted operator spending, in particular in certain emerging markets.

The demand varied considerably between markets. Among our largest markets, the US, China, UK and Turkey had good sales increases. Australia, India and Japan were stable, whereas sales in Brazil, Indonesia, Italy, Pakistan and Spain declined.

As of January 1, 2010, Ericsson reports the following segments: Networks, Global Services, Multimedia, Sony Ericsson and ST-Ericsson. The only change compared to previous years is that Network Rollout is now included in Global Services instead of in Networks. All other segments are unchanged.

Networks

Net sales in segment Networks decreased by 5 percent, to SEK 114.0 billion in 2009 from SEK 120.5 billion in 2008. Sales for comparable units declined by 5 percent, i.e. excluding SEK 2.7 billion of sales from acquired Nortel operations. Adjusted also for currency and hedge effects, sales declined in line with the market. Lower GSM sales, particularly in high-growth markets such as China, contributed to the decline. Sales in WCDMA continued to show good growth driven by demand for mobile broadband. However, WCDMA growth did not offset the GSM decline.

Global Services

Global Services sales increased by 12 (15) percent to SEK 79.2 (70.5) billion. However, sales were negatively affected by the reduced scope of a managed services agreement and somewhat lower sales of project-related services, reflecting the slowdown in network sales. Sales of related network rollout services grew 7 percent to SEK 23.1 (21.5) billion during 2009. Managed services was one of the main drivers for the sales increase, growing by 22 (17) percent to SEK 17.4 (14.3) billion, significantly outpacing the market.

Multimedia

Multimedia sales increased 5 percent for comparable units with revenue management negatively affected during the second half of the year by lower network deployments.

225

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Geographical regions

As of January 1, 2010, the geographical reporting structure was changed from five geographical areas to ten regions, mirroring the new internal geographical organization. A part called “Other” is also reported, consisting of business not reported in the geographical structure, e.g. embedded modules, cables, power modules as well as intellectual property rights and licenses.

The following regions increased their sales in 2009: North America by 54 percent, Western & Central Europe by 4 percent, Middle East by 2 percent and China & North East Asia by 18 percent. Sales in Sub Saharan Africa and India were flat. The following regions decreased their sales: Latin America by –13 percent, Northern Europe & Central Asia by –19 percent, Mediterranean by –15 percent, South East Asia & Oceania by –1 percent and region Other by –45 percent.

Financial results of operations

The gross margin declined only slightly to 34.0 percent in 2009 compared to 35.5 percent in 2008. The decline was due to effects of price pressure, increased share of services sales and the initial transition costs for the Sprint contract, which were largely offset by cost cutting and restructuring efforts.

Operating expenses in 2009 were almost flat at SEK –60.0 billion compared to SEK –60.6 billion in 2008. Operating expenses measured as a percentage of net sales was 29.0 percent in 2009 and 29.0 percent also in 2008.

Operating income declined to SEK 5.9 (16.3) billion with an operating margin of 2.9 (7.8) percent. The main reasons were a negative contribution from joint ventures of SEK –7.4 billion, compared to SEK –0.4 billion in 2008, increased restructuring charges of SEK –12.6 (–7.6) billion and the decline in gross income to SEK 70.2 (74.3) billion.

Earnings per share (EPS) diluted was SEK 1.14 (3.52) down 68 percent. The EPS decline was largely driven by the losses in our JVs and the restructuring program.

The AGM resolved on a dividend of SEK 2.00 (1.85) per share for 2009.

Financial position

Despite strategic investments and a difficult macro-economic business environment, a healthy capital structure and equity ratio were maintained. The debt maturity profile was also significantly improved. Cash remained strong at SEK 76.7 (75.0) billion. Due to a strong cash flow, a good level of cash and short-term investments was maintained. A strong liquidity was deemed important to keep flexibility for volatility in sales and cash flows and to be able to take advantage of opportunities in the market. Net Cash was SEK 36.1 (34.7) billion Working Capital remained the same as the previous year, at SEK 99.1 (100.0) billion. Return on Equity was 2.6 (8.2) percent. The decline in return on equity (ROE) was primarily a consequence of JV losses and the restructuring charges.

Cash flow

In 2009 cash flow from operating activities was SEK 24.5 (24.0) billion. A lower net income was offset by non-cash items, such as the losses in JVs, depreciation, amortization of intangibles, largely related to restructuring, and strong working capital reductions, resulting in a similar cash flow from operations as in 2008.

Cash flow from investing activities was SEK –37.5 (–8,5) billion. Cash outlays for recurring investing activities increased slightly to SEK –4.9 billion. Acquisitions/divestments during the year were net SEK –18.1 billion, with the major items being the formation of the ST-Ericsson joint venture, the minority stake in LHS and

226

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Nortel’s CDMA and LTE businesses. Cash outflow for short-term investments for cash management purposes and other investing activities was net SEK –14.5 billion, largely attributable to SEK –17.1 billion of short-term investments driven by the strong cash flow from operations.

In 2009 the cash flow from financing activities was SEK –1.7 (–7.2) billion. Dividends paid of SEK –6.3 billion were partly offset by increased borrowings of SEK 4.3 billion and other financing activities of SEK 0.2 billion.

Restructuring in 2008 and 2009

The restructuring charges in 2009 were SEK 11.3 billion compared to SEK 6.8 billion in 2008, relating to activities to reduce production costs, reduce product variants and platforms, increase the re-use of software, consolidate R&D activities, and improve administrative processes. In the beginning of 2009, a program to reduce annual run rate of costs by SEK 10 billion was launched, following the 2008 program aiming at SEK 6–7 billion. In the third quarter, additional SEK 5–6 billion of savings were targeted with anticipated costs of the same magnitude. This resulted in fewer platforms and solutions and was coupled with write-downs of capitalized development costs and acquired IPR assets for affected products.

MEMORANDUM AND ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION

Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson is entered under no. 556016–0680 in the Company Register kept by the Swedish Companies Registration Office. Our Company’s objective and purposes are described in §2 of the Articles of Association.

Our Articles of Association do not stipulate anything regarding a) a director’s power to vote on a proposal, arrangement, or contract in which the director is materially interested, b) our directors’ power to vote for compensation to themselves, c) our directors’ borrowing powers, d) retirements rules for our directors or e) the number of shares required for a director’s qualification. Applicable provisions are found in the Swedish Companies Act, as referred to in “Certain Powers of Directors and the President” below.

There are no age limit restrictions for directors and they are not required to own any shares in the Company.

Share Capital, Increases of Share Capital and Preferential Rights of Shareholders

The Articles of Association of Ericsson provide that the share capital of the Company may not be less than SEK 6,000 million nor more than SEK 24,000 million, and that the number of shares in the Company shall amount to no less than 3,000,000,000 and no more than 12,000,000,000. The registered share capital is SEK 16,366,758,678 and the Company has in total issued SEK 3,273,351,735 shares.

The Company’s shares are divided into three series: Class A shares, Class B shares and Class C shares; however, no Class C shares are currently outstanding. Under the Swedish Companies Act of 2005, applicable as of January 1, 2006 (the “Swedish Companies Act”), shareholders must approve each issue of additional shares either by deciding on the share issue at a shareholders’ meeting, or by a shareholders’ approval of a decision on a share issue by the Board, or by giving an authorization to the Board to decide about a share issue. If we decide to issue new Class A, Class B and Class C shares by means of a cash issue, or an issue against payment through set-off of claims, Class A, Class B and Class C shareholders (except for Ericsson and its subsidiaries, in the event they hold shares in Ericsson) have a primary preferential right to subscribe for new shares of the same type in relation to the number of shares previously held by them. Shares not subscribed for through a preferential right shall be offered to all shareholders for subscription on a pro rata basis. If we decide to issue new shares of only one series by means of a cash issue or an issue against payment through set-off of claims, all shareholders,

227

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

regardless of whether their shares are Class A, Class B or Class C, are entitled to a preferential right to subscribe for new shares in proportion to the number of shares previously held by them. Shareholders may vote to waive shareholders’ preferential rights at a general meeting.

If we decide to issue warrants or convertibles through a cash issue or an issue against payment through set-off of claims, the shareholders have preferential rights to subscribe to warrants as if the issue were of the shares that may be subscribed to pursuant to the warrant and, respectively, preferential rights to subscribe to convertibles as if the issue were of the shares that the convertibles may be converted to.

The above does not constitute any restriction to waive the shareholders’ preferential rights when deciding on either a cash issue, an issue against payment through set-off of claims, an issue of warrants or an issue of convertibles.

Dividends

Our Class A and Class B shareholders have the same right to dividends, while Class C shareholders have a right to a yearly dividend as described in article 15 of our Articles of Association. No Class C shares are currently outstanding.

Under Swedish law, only a general meeting of shareholders may decide on payment of dividends, which may not exceed the amount proposed by the Board of Directors (except in certain limited circumstances), and may only be paid from funds legally available for that purpose. Under Swedish law, no interim dividends may be paid in respect of any fiscal period for which audited financial statements of the company have not yet been adopted by the annual general meeting of shareholders. The market practice in Sweden is for dividends to be paid annually. Under the Swedish Companies Act, dividends to shareholders and other transfers of value from a company—such as purchases of own shares (see below)—may only be made in case the company’s restricted equity remains fully covered after the transfer of value has been made. The calculation shall be based upon the most recently adopted balance sheet, and any changes in the restricted equity that has occurred after the balance sheet date shall be taken into account. In addition, dividends to shareholders and other transfers of value from the company may only be made if this is justifiable taken into account the type of business activities of the company, their scope and risks related thereto and the company’s need for financial resources, its liquidity and financial position. In respect of parent companies, also the business activities of the group, their scope and risks related thereto and the group’s need for financial resources, its liquidity and financial position should be taken into account.

The Company’s shares are registered in the computerized book-entry share registration system administered by Euroclear Sweden AB (“Euroclear”). The rights attached to shares eligible for dividends accrue to those persons whose names are recorded in the register of shareholders on the record day. The dividends are then sent to a specified account as directed by the person registered with Euroclear, or to the address of that person. The relevant record day must, in most circumstances, be specified in the resolution declaring a dividend or resolving upon a capital increase or any similar matter in which shareholders have preferential rights, or the Board of Directors must be authorized to determine the relevant record day.

Where the registered holder is a nominee, the nominee receives, for the account of the beneficial owner, dividends and, on issues of shares with preferential rights for the shareholders, shares, as well as rights. Dividends are remitted in a single payment to the nominee who is responsible for the distribution of such dividends to the beneficial owner. A similar procedure is adopted for share issues. Specific authority to act as a nominee must be obtained from Euroclear. The nominee must issue a public report to Euroclear every third month, listing all beneficial holders of more than 500 shares. Euroclear is required to keep a register with regard to any holding on behalf of a single beneficial owner in excess of 500 shares in any one company. This list must reveal the names of the beneficial owner and must be open to public inspection.

228

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Voting

In a general meeting of Ericsson, each Class A share shall carry one vote, each Class B share one tenth of one vote and each Class C share one-thousandth of one vote.

We are required to publish notices to attend annual general meetings no earlier than six weeks and no later than four weeks prior to the general meeting and the same notice period requirements apply regarding extraordinary general meetings concerning changes in our articles of association. Notices to attend other types of extraordinary general meetings must be published no earlier than six weeks and no later than two weeks prior to the general meeting.

Directors are elected during the annual general meeting for a period of one year at a time and do not stand for reelection at staggered intervals.

A shareholder may attend and vote at the meeting in person or by proxy. For companies whose shares are registered in a central securities depositary register, proxies are valid for up to five years from the date of issuance. Any shareholder wishing to attend a general meeting must notify us no later than on the day specified in the notice, preferably before 4:00 p.m. (CET). We are required to accept all notifications of attendance received at least five business days (Saturdays normally included) prior to the meeting. A person designated in the register as a nominee (including the depositary of the ADSs) is not entitled to vote at a general meeting, nor is a beneficial owner whose share is registered in the name of a nominee (including the depositary of the ADSs) unless the beneficial owner first arranges to have such owner’s own name entered in the register of shareholders maintained by Euroclear no later than the designated record day.

Under the Swedish Companies Act, resolutions are passed by a simple majority of votes cast at the meeting with the chairman of the meeting having a decisive vote (except in respect of elections), unless otherwise required by law or a company’s articles of association. Under the Swedish Companies Act, certain resolutions require special quorums and majorities, including, but not limited to, the following:

A a resolution to amend the articles of association requires a majority of two-thirds of the votes cast as well as two-thirds of the shares represented at the meeting, except in those circumstances described in B – D below;

B a resolution to amend the articles of association which reduces any shareholder’s rights to profits or assets, restricts the transferability of shares or alters the legal relationship between shares, normally requires the unanimous approval of the shareholders present at the meeting and who hold nine-tenths of all outstanding shares;

C a resolution to amend the articles of association for the purpose of limiting the number of shares with which a shareholder may vote at a general meeting or allocating part of the net profit for the fiscal year to a restricted fund or limiting the use of the company’s profits or assets in a liquidation or dissolution, normally requires the approval of shareholders representing two-thirds of the votes cast and nine-tenths of the shares represented at the meeting;

D a resolution of the kind referred to under B or C above may, however, be taken with a lower supermajority requirement if the amendments referred to therein will only adversely affect specific shares or classes of shares. In such cases, the requirement under a above will apply together with the following separate supermajority: (a) where only a class of shares is adversely affected, approval of the owners of one-half of all shares of such class and nine-tenths of the shares of such class represented at the meeting, or (b) where the shares adversely affected do not constitute a class of shares, the unanimous approval of all such affected outstanding shares present at the meeting and who hold nine-tenths of all outstanding shares adversely affected;

229

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

E a resolution to issue, approve or authorize the issuance for cash of new shares, warrants or convertibles with a deviation from the—preferential right for existing shareholders requires a two-thirds—majority of votes cast at the meeting as well as two-thirds of the shares represented at the meeting;

F a resolution to reduce the outstanding share capital requires a two-thirds majority of votes cast at the meeting as well as two-thirds of the shares represented at the meeting. In case there are several classes of shares in a company, the above described majority requirement shall apply also within each share class represented at the meeting and for which the rights of the shares are adversely affected; and

G a resolution to approve a merger requires a two-thirds majority of the votes cast at the meeting and two-thirds of the shares represented at the meeting (however, under certain circumstances a higher majority is required).

At a general meeting of shareholders, a shareholder or proxy for one or more shareholders may cast full number of votes represented by the holder’s shares.

Purchase of Own Shares

A Swedish public limited liability company whose shares are traded on a regulated market place within the European Economic Area (“EEA”) or a market place comparable to a regulated market place outside the EEA is entitled to purchase its own shares under certain conditions. A purchase by us of our own shares may take place only if (a) the purchase has been decided upon by a general meeting of shareholders or the Board has been authorized by a general meeting of shareholders, in both cases by a two thirds majority of votes cast at the meeting as well as two-thirds of the shares represented at the meeting, (b) the purchase is effected on a regulated market place within the EEA or a market place comparable to a regulated market place outside the EEA (in the latter case with the approval of the Swedish Financial Supervisory Authority the “SFSA”) or pursuant to an offer to all shareholders or holders of a specific class of shares, (c) the Company’s restricted equity will still be fully covered and the purchase is justifiable taken into account the type of business activities of the Company and the group, their scope and risks related thereto and the Company’s and the group’s need for financial resources, its liquidity and financial position, and (d) we and our subsidiaries do not hold or, as a result of purchase, will not hold in excess of 10 percent of all our outstanding shares. As of December 31, 2010, the Company held an aggregate of 78,978,533 treasury stock of Class B shares.

Investment Restrictions

There are no limitations imposed by Swedish law or by our Articles of Association in respect of the rights of non-residents or foreign persons to purchase, own or sell securities issued by us.

There are, however, certain flagging and ownership examination rules that apply, irrespective of nationality.

Pursuant to the Swedish Financial Instruments Trading Act any change in a holding of shares, depository receipts with voting rights or financial instruments that entitle the holder to acquire shares in issue in a Swedish limited liability company whose shares are admitted for trading on a regulated market place within the EEA shall be reported by the holder to the company and the SFSA, where the change entails that the holder’s portion of all shares or votes in the company reaches, exceeds or falls below any of the limits of 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 50, 66 2/3 or 90 per cent. Such a change should, as a main rule, be reported not later than the trading day following the day on which the party with a duty to report has entered into an agreement for the acquisition or transfer of shares or any other change to the shareholding has occurred.

In addition, the Act on Reporting Obligations Regarding Certain Holdings of Financial Instruments requires, among other things, certain individuals who own shares representing 10 percent or more of the share capital or

230

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

the voting rights in a Swedish public limited liability company whose shares are traded on a regulated market within the EEA to report such ownership to the SFSA, which keeps a public register based on the information contained in such reports, and also to report any changes in such ownership within five business days.

EXCHANGE CONTROLS

There is no Swedish legislation affecting a) the import or export of capital or b) the remittance of dividends, interest or other payments to non-resident holders of our securities except that, subject to the provisions in any tax treaty, dividends are subject to withholding tax.

TAXATION

General

The taxation discussion set forth below does not purport to be a complete analysis or listing of all potential tax effects relevant to the acquisition, ownership or disposition of Class B shares or ADSs. The statements of United States and Swedish tax laws set forth below are based on the laws in force as of the date of this report and may be subject to any changes in United States or Swedish law, and in any double taxation convention or treaty between the United States and Sweden, occurring after that date, which changes may then have retroactive effect.

Specific tax provisions may apply for certain categories of tax payers. Your tax treatment if you are a holder of Class B shares or ADSs depends in part on your particular situation. If you are a holder of Class B shares or ADSs, you should therefore consult a tax advisor as to the tax consequences relating to your particular circumstances resulting from the ownership of Class B shares or ADSs.

The tax consequences to holders of ADSs, as discussed below, apply equally to holders of Class B shares.

Certain Swedish Tax Considerations

This section describes the material Swedish income and net wealth tax consequences for a holder of ADSs or Class B shares who is not considered to be a Swedish resident for Swedish tax purposes. This section applies to you only if you are a holder of portfolio investments representing less than 10 percent of capital and votes and is not applicable if the ADSs or Class B shares pertain to a permanent establishment or fixed place of business in Sweden.

Taxation on capital gains

Generally, non-residents of Sweden are not liable for Swedish capital gains taxation with respect to the sale of ADSs or Class B shares. However, under Swedish tax law, capital gains from the sale of shares in Swedish companies and certain other securities by an individual may be taxed in Sweden at a rate of 30 percent if the seller has been a resident of Sweden or has lived permanently in Sweden at any time during the year of the sale or the 10 calendar years preceding the year of the sale (absent treaty provisions to the contrary). The provision is applicable on ADSs or Class B shares. From 1 January 2008 the rule has been extended so that it also applies to shares in foreign companies, provided that the shares were acquired during the time that the person was liable to tax in Sweden.

This provision may, however, be limited by tax treaties that Sweden has concluded with other countries. Under the tax treaty between Sweden and the United States (the “U.S. Tax Treaty”), this provision applies for ten years from the date the individual became a non-resident of Sweden.

231

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Taxation on dividends

A Swedish dividend withholding tax at a rate of 30 percent is imposed on dividends paid by a Swedish corporation, such as us, to non-residents of Sweden. The same withholding tax applies to certain other payments made by a Swedish corporation, including payments as a result of redemption of shares and repurchase of stock through an offer directed to its shareholders. Exemption from the withholding tax or a lower tax rate may apply by virtue of a tax treaty. Under the U.S. Tax Treaty, the withholding tax on dividends paid on portfolio investments to eligible U.S. holders is reduced to 15 percent.

Under all Swedish tax treaties, except the tax treaty with Switzerland, withholding tax at the applicable treaty rate should be withheld by the payer of the dividends. With regard to dividends paid from shares in corporations registered with the Euroclear Sweden (such as our shares), a reduced rate of dividend withholding tax under a tax treaty is generally applied at the source by the Euroclear Sweden or, if the shares are registered with a nominee, the nominee, as long as the person entitled to the dividend is registered as a non-resident and sufficient information regarding the tax residency of the beneficial owner is available to the Euroclear Sweden or the nominee.

In those cases where Swedish withholding tax is withheld at the rate of 30 percent and the person who received the dividends is entitled to a reduced rate of withholding tax under a tax treaty, a refund may be claimed from the Swedish tax authorities before the end of the fifth calendar year following the year that the distribution was made.

Taxation on interest

No Swedish withholding tax is payable on interest paid to non-residents of Sweden.

Net wealth taxation

The Swedish net wealth tax has been abolished from 1 January 2007.

Certain United States Federal Income Tax Consequences

The following discussion is a summary of the material United States federal income tax consequences relevant to the ownership and disposition of ADSs or Class B shares. This discussion is based on the tax laws of the United States (including the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”), its legislative history, existing and proposed regulations thereunder, published rulings and court decisions) as in effect on the date hereof, all of which are subject to change, possibly with retroactive effect. The discussion is not a full discussion of all tax considerations that may be relevant to the ownership and disposition of ADSs or Class B shares. The discussion applies only if you will hold the ADSs and/or the Class B shares as capital assets and you use the USD as your functional currency. It does not deal with the tax treatment of investors subject to special rules, such as grantor trusts, real estate investment trusts, regulated investment companies, banks, brokers or dealers in securities, traders in securities or currencies that elect to use a mark-to-market method of recording for their securities holdings, financial institutions, insurance companies, tax-exempt entities, investors liable for alternative minimum tax, holders (either actually or constructively) of 10 percent or more of our Class B shares, persons holding ADSs and/or Class B shares as part of a hedging, straddle, conversion or constructive sale transaction and persons who are resident or ordinarily resident in Sweden. In addition, investors holding ADSs and/or Class B shares indirectly through partnerships are subject to special rules not discussed below. You should consult your own tax advisers about the United States federal, state, local and foreign tax consequences to you of the ownership and disposition of the ADSs or Class B shares.

The discussion below applies to you only if you are a beneficial owner of ADSs and/or Class B shares not resident in Sweden for purposes of the U.S. Tax Treaty and you are, for United States federal income tax

232

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

purposes, (1) a citizen or resident of the United States, (2) a corporation or any other entity treated as a corporation that is organized in or under the laws of the United States or its political subdivisions, including the District of Columbia, (3) a trust if all of the trust’s substantial decisions are subject to the control of one or more United States persons and the primary supervision of the trust is subject to a United States court, or if a valid election is in effect with respect to the trust to be taxed as a United States person, or (4) an estate the income of which is subject to United States federal income taxation regardless of its source.

The discussion below assumes that the representations contained in the deposit agreement are true and that the obligations in the deposit agreement and any related agreement will be complied with in accordance with the terms. If you hold ADSs, you will be treated as the holder of the underlying Class B shares represented by those ADSs for United States federal income tax purposes.

Taxation of ADSs or Class B shares

Dividends

Subject to the passive foreign investment company rules discussed below, the gross amount of dividends paid (before reduction for any Swedish withholding taxes) with respect to the ADSs or Class B shares generally will be included in your gross income as ordinary income from foreign sources to the extent paid out of our current or accumulated earnings and profits (as determined for United States federal income tax purposes). Distributions in excess of earnings and profits will be treated as a non-taxable return of capital to the extent of your adjusted tax basis in the ADSs or Class B shares and thereafter as capital gain. The dividends will not be eligible for the dividends received deduction available to corporations in respect of dividends received from other U.S. corporations. The amount of any dividend paid in SEK will be the U.S. dollar value of the dividend payment based on the exchange rate in effect on the date of receipt by you (or constructive receipt), in the case of Class B shares or by the depositary, in the case of ADSs, whether or not the payment is converted into USD at that time. Your tax basis in the SEK received will equal such USD amount. Gain or loss, if any, recognized on a subsequent sale or conversion of the SEK will be U.S. source ordinary income or loss.

If you are a non-corporate holder of ADSs or Class B shares, dividends you receive on the ADSs or Class B shares for taxable years beginning before January 1, 2013, may be taxed at the lower applicable capital gains rate provided that (1) we are not a passive foreign investment company (as discussed below) for either our taxable year in which the dividend was paid or the preceding taxable year, (2) certain holding period requirements are met and (3) either (a) our ADSs continue to be listed on the Nasdaq Stock Market (or a national securities exchange that is registered under section 6 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended) or (b) we are eligible for the benefits of the U.S. Tax Treaty. You should consult your own tax advisors regarding the availability of the lower rate for dividends paid with respect to ADSs or Class B shares.

Subject to certain limitations, you will generally be entitled to receive credit against your United States federal income tax liability (or a deduction against your United States federal taxable income) with respect to any Swedish tax withheld in accordance with the U.S. Tax Treaty and paid over to Sweden. If a refund of the tax withheld is available to you under the laws of Sweden or under the U.S. Tax Treaty, the amount of tax withheld that is refundable will not be eligible for such credit against your United States federal income tax liability (and will not be eligible for the deduction in computing your United States federal taxable income). For foreign tax credit limitation purposes, the dividend will be income from sources without the United States, and will generally be treated as “passive category income” (or, in the case of certain holders, “general category income”).

233

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Sale or exchange of ADSs or Class B shares

Subject to the passive foreign investment company rules discussed below, you will generally recognize capital gain or loss on the sale or other disposition of the ADSs or Class B shares equal to the difference between the USD value of the amount realized and your adjusted tax basis (determined in USD) in the ADSs or Class B shares. Such gain or loss will be capital gain or loss and will generally be treated as arising from U.S. sources for foreign tax credit limitation purposes.

The amount realized on a disposition of ADSs or Class B shares will generally be the amount of cash you receive for the ADSs or Class B shares (which, in the case of payment in a non-U.S. currency, will equal the USD value of the payment received determined on (a) the date of receipt of payment if you are a cash basis taxpayer and (b) the date of disposition if you are an accrual basis taxpayer). If the ADSs or Class B shares are treated as traded on an “established securities market,” if you are a cash basis taxpayer (or, if you are an accrual basis taxpayer, if you so elect) you will determine the USD value of the amount realized by translating the amount received at the spot rate of exchange on the settlement date of the sale.

You will have a tax basis in any foreign currency received equal to the USD amount realized. Any gain or loss you realize on a subsequent conversion of foreign currency will be U.S. source ordinary income or loss.

Passive foreign investment company status

A non-U.S. corporation is a passive foreign investment company (a “PFIC”) in any taxable year in which, after taking into account the income and assets of certain subsidiaries, either (a) at least 75 percent of its gross income is passive income or (b) at least 50 percent of the quarterly average value of its assets is attributable to assets that produce or are held to produce passive income. Based on the market value of our shares, the composition of our assets and income and our operations, we believe we were not a PFIC during the year 2010. However, whether or not we will be considered a PFIC will depend on the nature and source of our income and the value of our assets, as determined from time to time. If we are treated as a PFIC, we will not provide information necessary for the “qualified electing fund” election as the term is defined in the relevant provisions of the Code. You should consult your own tax advisors about the consequences of our potential classification as a PFIC.

If we were a PFIC, for any taxable year in which you held ADSs or Class B shares, you would be subject to special rules with respect to:

• any gain realized on the sale or other disposition of ADSs or Class B shares; and

• any “excess distribution” made to you (generally, any distributions to you in respect of ADSs or Class B shares during a single taxable year that are, in the aggregate, greater than 125 percent of the average annual distributions received by you in respect of ADSs or Class B shares during the three preceding taxable years or, if shorter, your holding period for ADSs or Class B shares).

Under these rules:

• the gain or excess distribution would be allocated ratably over your holding period for ADSs or Class B shares;

• the amount allocated to the taxable year in which the gain or excess distribution was realized and any year before we became a PFIC would be taxable as ordinary income and

• the amount allocated to each prior year, other than the current year and any taxable year prior to the first taxable year in which we were a PFIC, would be subject to tax at the highest applicable marginal tax rate in effect for each such year; and an interest charge would be imposed.

234

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

If we are a PFIC for any taxable year, you will also be deemed to own shares in any of our subsidiaries that are also PFICs in such a year. As an alternative to the special rules described above, holders of “marketable stock” in a PFIC may elect mark-to-market treatment with respect to their ADSs or Class B shares. ADSs or Class B shares will not be considered marketable stock unless they are regularly traded on a qualified exchange or other market. If the mark-to-market election is available and you elect mark-to-market treatment you will, in general, include as ordinary income each year an amount equal to the increase in value of your ADSs or Class B shares for that year (measured at the close of your taxable year) and will generally be allowed a deduction for any decrease in the value of your Class B shares for the year, but only to the extent of previously included mark-to-market income. However, a mark-to-market election would likely be unavailable with respect to your proportionate share in any of our subsidiaries that are PFICs.

If you own ADSs or Class B shares during any year in which we are a PFIC, you are required to make an annual return on IRS Form 8621 regarding distributions received with respect to ADSs or Class B shares and any gain realized on the disposition of your ADSs or Class B shares.

Information reporting and backup withholding

In general, information reporting requirements may apply to dividends paid in respect of ADSs or Class B shares and the proceeds received on the sale or exchange of the ADSs or Class B shares within the United States or by a broker with certain United States connections. Backup withholding, currently at a rate of 28 percent, may apply to payments to you of dividends paid in respect of ADSs or Class B shares or the proceeds of a sale or other disposition of ADSs or Class B shares if you fail to provide an accurate taxpayer identification number (certified on IRS Form W–9) or, upon request, to certify that you are not subject to backup withholding, or otherwise to comply with the applicable requirements of backup withholding. The amount of any backup withholding from a payment to you will be allowed as a credit against your United States federal income tax liability and a refund of any excess amount withheld under the backup withholding rules may be obtained by filing the appropriate claim for refund with the IRS and furnishing any required information.

New legislation

For taxable years beginning after March 18, 2010, new legislation requires certain holders who are individuals to report information relating to an interest in ADSs or Class B shares, subject to certain exceptions (including an exception for ADSs or Class B shares held in accounts maintained by certain financial institutions).

DEPOSITARY FEES AND CHARGES

Fees and charges payable by ADS holders

	Service	Rate	By whom paid
1)	Receipt of deposits and issuance of receipts	USD 5 per 100 American Depositary Shares of fraction thereof	Party to whom receipts are issued
2)	Delivery of deposited shares against surrender of receipts	USD 5 per 100 American Depositary Shares or fraction thereof	Party surrendering receipts
3)	Payments of dividends distributions or rights offering is respect of shares	No charge	Not applicable

235

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Except as otherwise provided in the Deposit Agreement, any and all other expenses of the Depositary, including , without limitation, expenses or charges for printing, stationery, postage, insurances, cables, etc, are to be borne by the Depositary, or by the Company in accordance with agreements entered into from time to time with the Company.

Fees payable by the Depositary to the Issuer

Citibank, as depositary, has agreed to reimburse Ericsson USD 5 million per year for expenses related to our ADS program (the “Program”), including Program-related legal fees, expenses related to investor relations in the US, US investor presentations, ADS-related financial advertising and public relations, fees and expenses of Citibank as administrator of the ADS Direct Plan, fees in relation to our Form 20-F and SOX compliance.

Citibank has further agreed to waive other ADS program related expenses amounting to USD 50,000 associated with the administration of the Program.

INDEPENDENCE REQUIREMENTS

The Ericsson Board of Directors is subject to, and applies, a variety of independence requirements. However, it has sought and received exemptions from certain Sarbanes-Oxley Act and NASDAQ requirements, including those that are contrary to Swedish Law, see “NASDAQ Corporate Governance Exemptions” for more information.

NASDAQ Marketplace Rules

Independence requirements on the board of directors:

• A majority of the members of the board of directors must be independent in line with the NASDAQ rules. Ericsson has obtained an exemption from NASDAQ which means employee representative directors can be exempt from NASDAQ’s independence requirements.

Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 and corresponding NASDAQ rules

Independence requirements on the audit committee:

• All members of the audit committee must be independent in line with the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002.

The Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 includes a specific exemption for non-executive employee representatives. The Company does not consider that reliance on the exemption adversely affect the ability of the Audit Committee to act independently or satisfy other SEC requirements.

NASDAQ Corporate Governance Exemptions

Following a 2005 amendment to NASDAQ’s Marketplace Rules, foreign private issuers such as Ericsson may follow home-country practice in lieu of certain NASDAQ corporate governance requirements.

Before the amendment was adopted, NASDAQ’s Marketplace Rules stated that, upon application, foreign private issuers could be exempt from certain corporate governance requirements. This only applied when the requirements were contrary to the laws, rules or regulations, or generally accepted business practices of the issuer’s home jurisdiction.

236

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Ericsson has received exemptions from NASDAQ’s corporate governance requirements under the Marketplace Rules (and is entitled to continue to rely thereon under the 2005 amendment). This is in order to allow:

• Employee representatives to be elected to the Board of Directors and serve on Committees (including the Audit Committee), in accordance with Swedish law.

• Shareholders to participate in the election of Directors and the Nomination Committee, in accordance with Swedish law and common market practice respectively.

• Employee representatives on the Board to attend all Board and Committee meetings (including those of the Audit Committee), in accordance with Swedish laws concerning attendance and decision making processes.

The Company does not consider that reliance on the exemption from the audit committee independence requirements adversely affects the ability of the Audit Committee to act independently or satisfy other SEC requirements.

In addition, Ericsson relies on the exemption provided by the 2005 amendment to overcome the requirements regarding quorums for its General Meetings of Shareholders since they are contrary to Swedish law.

AUDIT COMMITTEE PRE-APPROVAL POLICIES AND PROCEDURES

The Audit Committee reviews and approves the scope of audits to be performed (external and internal) and analyzes the results and costs of the audits. The Committee makes recommendations to the Board of Directors regarding the auditor’s performance. It also makes recommendations to the Nomination Committee regarding the external auditor’s fees. In order to ensure the auditor’s independence, the Audit Committee has established pre-approval policies and procedures for non-audit related services to be performed by the external auditor. Pre-approval authority may not be delegated to management. The policies and procedures include a list of prohibited services and services that require pre-approval by the Committee. Such services fall into two broad categories:

• General pre-approval—certain services regarding taxes, transactions, risk management, corporate finance, attestation and accounting and so called general services. These services have received general pre-approval by the Audit Committee, provided that the estimated fee for each project does not exceed SEK 1 million. The external auditor must advise the Audit Committee of services rendered under the general pre-approval policy.

• Specific pre-approval—all other non-audit related services must receive specific pre-approval. The Audit Committee Chairman has the delegated authority for specific pre-approval in between Committee meetings, provided that the fee in each case does not exceed SEK 2.5 million. The Chairman reports any pre-approval to the Audit Committee at its next meeting. For matters which may not be handled by the Chairman and require specific pre-approval by the Audit Committee, the auditor submits an application to the Parent Company for final approval by the Audit Committee

237

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

INVESTMENTS

The following listing shows certain shareholdings owned directly and indirectly by the Parent Company as of December 31, 2010. A complete listing of shareholdings, prepared in accordance with the Swedish Annual Accounts Act and filed with the Swedish Companies Registration Office (Bolagsverket), may be obtained upon request to: Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson, External Reporting, SE-164 83 Stockholm, Sweden.

Shares owned directly by the parent company

Type	Company	Reg. No.		Domicile	Percentage of ownership			Par value in local currency, million		Carrying value, SEK million
Subsidiary companies
I	Ericsson AB		556056-6258	Sweden		100			50		20,731
I	Ericsson Shared Services AB		556251-3266	Sweden		100			361		2,216
I	Netwise AB		556404-4286	Sweden		100			2		306
II	AB Aulis		556030-9899	Sweden		100			14		6
III	Ericsson Credit AB		556326-0552	Sweden		100			5		5
	Other (Sweden)					—			—		2,083
I	Ericsson Austria GmbH			Austria		100			4		115
I	Ericsson Danmark A/S			Denmark		100			90		216
I	Oy LM Ericsson Ab			Finland		100			13		196
II	Ericsson Participations France SAS			France		100			26		524
I	Ericsson GmbH			Germany		100			20		4,227
I	Ericsson Hungary Ltd.			Hungary		100			1,301		120
II	LM Ericsson Holdings Ltd.			Ireland		100			2		15
I	Ericsson Telecomunicazioni S.p.A.			Italy		53	1)		23		3,151
II	Ericsson Holding International B.V.			The Netherlands		100			222		3,200
I	Ericsson A/S			Norway		100			75		114
II	Ericsson Television AS			Norway		100			161		1,788
I	Ericsson Corporatia AO			Russia		100			5		5
I	Ericsson AG			Switzerland		100			—		—
II	Ericsson Holding Ltd.			United Kingdom		100			328		4,094
	Other (Europe, excluding Sweden)					—			—		428
II	Ericsson Holding II Inc.			United States		100			2,830		29,006
I	Cía Ericsson S.A.C.I.			Argentina		95	2)		41		178
I	Ericsson Telecom S.A. de C.V.			Mexico		100			n/a		1,550
	Other (United States, Latin America)					—			—		61
II	Teleric Pty Ltd.			Australia		100			20		100
I	Ericsson Ltd.			China		100			2		2
I	Ericsson (China) Company Ltd.			China		100			65		475
I	Ericsson India Private Ltd.			India		100			725		147
I	Ericsson India Global Services PVT. Ltd			India		100			389		65
I	LG-Ericsson Ltd.			Korea		50			100		1,943
I	Ericsson (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd.			Malaysia		70			2		4
I	Ericsson Telecommunications Pte. Ltd.			Singapore		100			2		1
I	Ericsson South Africa PTY. Ltd			South Africa		100			10		108
I	Ericsson Taiwan Ltd.			Taiwan		80			240		20
I	Ericsson (Thailand) Ltd.			Thailand		49	3)		90		17
	Other countries (the rest of the world)					—			—		349
	Total								—		77,566
Joint ventures and associated companies
I	Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB		556615-6658	Sweden		50			50		4,136
II	ST-Ericsson SA			Switzerland		50			436		8,325
III	ST-Ericsson AT SA			Switzerland		51			5		275
I	Ericsson Nikola Tesla d.d.			Croatia		49			65		330
	Total								—		13,066

238

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Key to type of company

I Manufacturing, distribution and development companies

II Holding companies

III Finance companies

1) Through subsidiary holdings, total holdings amount to 100% of Ericsson Telecomunicazioni S.p.A.

2) Through subsidiary holdings, total holdings amount to 100% of Cia Ericsson S.A.C.I.

3) Through subsidiary holdings, total holdings amount to 100% of Ericsson (Thailand) Ltd.

Shares owned by subsidiary companies

Type	Company	Reg. No.		Domicile		Percentage of ownership
Subsidiary companies
II	Ericsson Cables Holding AB		556044-9489		Sweden		100
I	Ericsson France SAS				France		100
I	LHS Telekommunikation GmbH & Co. KG1)				Germany		100
I	LM Ericsson Ltd.				Ireland		100
II	Ericsson Nederland B.V.				The Netherlands		100
I	Ericsson Telecommunicatie B.V.				The Netherlands		100
I	Ericsson España S.A.				Spain		100
I	Ericsson Telekomunikasyon A.S.				Turkey		100
I	Ericsson Ltd.				United Kingdom		100
I	Ericsson Canada Inc.				Canada		100
I	Ericsson Inc.				United States		100
I	Ericsson IP Infrastructure Inc.				United States		100
I	Ericsson Services Inc.				United States		100
I	Drutt Corporation Inc.				United States		100
I	Optimi Corporation				United States		100
I	Redback Networks Inc.				United States		100
I	Ericsson Telecommunicações S.A.				Brazil		100
I	Ericsson Australia Pty. Ltd.				Australia		100
I	Ericsson (China) Communications Co. Ltd.				China		100
I	Nanjing Ericsson Panda Communication Co. Ltd.				China		51
I	Nippon Ericsson K.K.				Japan		100
I	Ericsson Communication Solutions Pte Ltd.				Singapore		100

Key to type of company

I Manufacturing, distribution and development companies

II Holding companies

1) Disclosures Pursuant to Section 264b of the German Commercial Code (Handelsgesetzbuch—HGB) Applying Section 264b HGB, LHS Holding GmbH & Co. KG, LHS Communication GmbH & Co. KG and LHS Telekommunikation GmbH & Co. KG, all located in Frankfurt am Main/Germany, are exempted from the obligation to prepare, have audited and disclose financial statements and a management report in accordance with the legal requirements being applicable for German corporations.

239

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

SHAREHOLDER INFORMATION

Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson’s shareholders are invited to participate in the Annual General Meeting to be held on Wednesday, April 13, 2011, at 3 p.m. at the Annex to the Ericsson Globe, Globentorget, Stockholm.

REGISTRATION AND NOTICE OF ATTENDANCE

Shareholders who wish to attend the Annual General Meeting must

• be recorded in the share register kept by Euroclear Sweden AB (the Swedish Securities Registry) on Thursday, April 7, 2011, and

• give notice of attendance to the Company at the latest on Thursday, April 7, 2011. Notice of attendance can be given on Ericsson’s website: www.ericsson. com/investors, by telephone: +46 8 402 90 54 on weekdays between 10 a.m. and 4 p.m. or by fax: +46 8 402 9256.

Notice of attendance may also be given in writing to:

Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson

General Meeting of Shareholders

Box 7835, SE-103 98 Stockholm, Sweden

When giving notice of attendance, please state name, date of birth, address, telephone number and number of assistants.

The meeting will be conducted in Swedish and simultaneously interpreted into English.

SHARES REGISTERED IN THE NAME OF A NOMINEE

In addition to giving notice of attendance, shareholders who have their shares registered in the name of a nominee must request the nominee to temporarily enter the shareholder into the share register in order to be entitled to attend the meeting. In order for such registration to be effective on Thursday, April 7, 2011, shareholders should contact their nominee well before that day.

PROXY

Shareholders represented by proxy shall submit to the Company a power of attorney for the representative. A power of attorney issued by a legal entity must be accompanied by a copy of the entity’s certificate of registration (should no such certificate exist, a corresponding document of authority must be submitted). Such documents must be no more than one year old. In order to facilitate the registration at the Annual General Meeting, the power of attorney in original, certificates of registration and other documents of authority should be sent to the Company in advance. All documents should be sent to the Company at the address above for receipt by Tuesday, April 12, 2011. Forms of power of attorney in Swedish and English are available on Ericsson’s website: www.ericsson.com/investors.

DIVIDEND

The Board of Directors has decided to propose the Annual General Meeting to resolve on a dividend of SEK 2.25 per share for the year 2010 and that Monday, April 18, 2011 will be the record day for dividend.

240

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

FINANCIAL INFORMATION FROM ERICSSON

Interim reports 2011:	>	April 27, 2011 (Q1)	>	October 20, 2011 (Q3)
	>	July 21, 2011 (Q2)	>	January 25, 2012 (Q4)

Annual Report 2011: March, 2012

2010 Form 20-F for the US market: March, 2011

For printed publications, contact:

A printed copy of the Annual Report is provided on request.

• Strömberg Distribution

SE-120 88 Stockholm, Sweden

Phone: +46 8 449 89 57,

Email: ericsson@strd.se

• In the United States,

Ericsson’s Transfer Agent Citibank:

Citibank Shareholder Services

Registered holders: +1 877 881 59 69

(toll free within the U.S.)

Interested investors: +1 781 575 45 55

(outside of the U.S.)

Email: ericsson@shareholders-online.com

www.citi.com/dr

Ordering a hard copy of the Annual Report:

Phone toll free: +1 866 216 046

http://proxy.georgeson.com/annualreport/ericsson.htm

Where you can find out more:

It is our ambition to provide our shareholder with up to date information about Ericsson and its development. Information is available on Ericsson’s website: www.ericsson.com

On the website, the Annual Report is available as either an online version or as a pdf document. Previous Annual and Quarterly reports and other relevant shareholder information can be found on: www.ericsson.com/investors

By publishing the Annual Report on the web, we will not only reduce the cost for print and distribution, but also the impact on the environment.

The Annual Report on Form 20-F (filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission, SEC) is also available www.ericsson.com/investors

Contact information

Headquarters

Torshamnsgatan

23 Kista

Sweden

241

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Registered office

Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson

SE–164 83 Stockholm

Sweden

Investor Relations

For questions on the Company, please contact Investor Relations:

• Investor Relations for Europe, Middle East, Africa and Asia Pacific: Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson SE-164 83 Stockholm, Sweden Telephone: +46 10 719 00 00 Email: investor.relations@ericsson.com

• Investor Relations for the Americas: Ericsson, The Grace Building 1114 Ave of the Americas, Suite #3410 New York, NY 10036, USA Telephone: +1 212 685 40 30 Email: investor.relations@ericsson.com

242

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

GLOSSARY

2G

First digital generation of mobile systems, includes GSM, TDMA, PDC and cdmaOne.

3G

3rd generation mobile system, includes WCDMA/HSPA, EDGE, CDMA2000 and TD-SCDMA.

4G

See LTE.

All-IP

A single, common IP infrastructure that can handle all network services, including fixed and mobile communications, for voice and data services and also video services such as TV.

ARPU

Average Revenue Per User.

ATM

(Asynchronous Transfer Mode) A communication standard for transmission and management of high-speed packet-switched networks.

Backhaul

Transmission between radio base stations and the core network.

Broadband

Data speeds that are high enough to allow transmission of multimedia services with good quality.

Capex

Capital expenditure.

CDMA

(Code division multiple access) The cdmaOne (2G) and CDMA2000 (3G) mobile communication standards are both based on CDMA.

EDGE

A 3G mobile standard, developed as an enhancement of GSM. Enables the transmission of data at speeds up to 250 kbps.

Emerging market

Defined as a country that has a GNP per capita index below the World Bank average and a mobile subscription penetration below 60 percent.

243

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Evo RAN

A Radio Access Network (RAN) solution to run GSM, WCDMA and LTE as a single network.

Exabyte

= billion gigabytes.

FTTH

(Fiber-to-the-home) refers to fiber optic broadband connections to individual homes.

GDP

Gross domestic product the total annual cost of all finished goods and services produced within a country.

GPON

(Gigabit Passive Optical Network) Used for fiber-optic communication to the home (FTTH).

GPRS

(General Packet Radio Service) A packet-switched technology (2.5G) that enables GSM networks to handle mobile data communications at rates up to 115 kbps.

HSPA

(High Speed Packet Access) Enhancement of 3G/WCDMA that enables mobile broadband.

ICT

Information and Communication Technology.

IMS

(IP Multimedia Subsystem) A standard for offering voice and multimedia services over mobile and fixed networks using internet technology (IP).

IP

(Internet Protocol) Defines how information travels between network elements across the internet.

IPTV

(IP Television) A technology that delivers digital television via fixed broadband access.

JV

(Joint venture) A business enterprise in which two or more companies enter a partnership.

LTE

(Long-Term Evolution) The next evolutionary step of mobile technology beyond HSPA, allowing data rates above 100 Mbps.

244

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Managed services

Management of operator networks and/or hosting of their services.

Opex

Operating expenses.

Penetration

The number of subscriptions divided by the population in a geographical area.

Softswitch

A software-based system for handling call management functionality. Integrates IP-telephony and the legacy circuit-switched part of the network.

TDM

Time division multiplexing, legacy technology for circuit switching.

WCDMA

(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access) A 3G mobile communication standard. WCDMA builds on the same core network infrastructure as GSM.

xDSL

Digital Subscriber Line technologies for broadband multimedia communications in fixed line networks. Examples: IP-DSL, ADSL and VDSL.

245

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

FINANCIAL TERMINOLOGY

Capital employed

Total assets less non-interest-bearing provisions and liabilities.

Capital turnover

Net sales divided by average Capital employed.

Cash conversion

Cash flow from operating activities divided by net income reconciled to cash – expressed in percent.

Cash dividends per share

Dividends paid divided by average number of shares, basic.

Compound annual growth rate (CAGR)

The year-over-year growth rate over a specified period of time.

Days sales outstanding (DSO)

Trade receivables balance at quarter end divided by Net Sales in the quarter and multiplied by 90 days. If the amount of trade receivables is larger than last quarter’s sales, the excess amount is divided by Net Sales in the previous quarter and multiplied by 90 days, and total days outstanding (DSO) are the 90 days of the most current quarter plus the additional days from the previous quarter.

Earnings per share

Basic earnings per share; profit or loss attributable to stockholders of the Parent Company divided by the weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding during the period. Diluted earnings per share; the weighted average number of shares outstanding are adjusted for the effects of all dilutive potential ordinary shares.

EBITA margin

Earnings Before Interest, Taxes, Amortization and write-downs of acquired intangibles, as a percentage of Net Sales.

Equity ratio

Equity, expressed as a percentage of total assets.

Gross Cash

Cash and cash equivalents plus short-term investments.

Inventory turnover days (ITO-days)

365 divided by inventory turnover, calculated as total adjusted cost of sales divided by the average inventories for the year (net of advances from customers).

246

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

Net cash

Cash and cash equivalents plus short-term investments less interest-bearing liabilities and post-employment benefits.

Payable days

The average balance of Trade payables at the beginning and at the end of the year divided by Cost of sales for the year, and multiplied by 365 days.

Payment readiness

Cash and cash equivalents and short-term investments less short-term borrowings plus long-term unused credit commitments. Payment readiness is also shown as a percentage of Net Sales.

Return on capital employed

The total of Operating income plus Financial income as a percentage of average capital employed (based on the amounts at January 1 and December 31).

Return on equity

Net income attributable to stockholders of the Parent Company as a percentage of average Stockholders’ equity (based on the amounts at January 1 and December 31).

Stockholders’ equity per share

Stockholders’ equity divided by the number of shares outstanding at end of period, basic.

Total Shareholder Return (TSR)

The increase or decrease in share price during the period plus dividends paid, expressed as a percentage of the share price at the start of the period.

Trade receivables turnover

Net sales divided by average Trade receivables.

Value at Risk (VaR)

A statistical method that expresses the maximum potential loss that can arise with a certain degree of probability during a certain period of time.

Working capital

Current assets less current non-interest-bearing provisions and liabilities.

247

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2010

SIGNATURES

The registrant hereby certifies that it meets all of the requirements for filing on Form 20-F and that it has duly caused and authorized the undersigned to sign this Annual Report on its behalf.

TELEFONAKTIEBOLAGET LM ERICSSON

March 30, 2011

By:	/s/    ROLAND HAGMAN
	Roland Hagman
By:	/s/    NINA MACPHERSON
	Nina Macpherson

248